POP Pilates for Beginners Calendar!
Click to enlargeWEEK 1
Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5 Day 6 Day 7
WEEK 2
Day 8 Day 9 Day 10 Day 11 Day 12 Day 13 Day 14
WEEK 3
Day 15 Day 16 Day 17 Day 18 Day 19 Day 20 Day 21
WEEK 4
Day 22 Day 23 Day 24 Day 25 Day 26 Day 27 Day 28
Hey POPsters!
I developed this Beginner’s calendar to help those of you who are just starting out on your fitness journey and are unsure about how to ease into the routines. I want you to know that you are capable of ANYTHING and that all it takes is a little practice. This is a structured 4 week plan and compilation of videos that will really help you understand the basics of Pilates – like proper form, proper breathing, mind-body connection. Once you finish this calendar, I guarantee you’ll be ready to do the monthly calendars!
HOW TO USE:
1. Subscribe to YouTube.com/Blogilates
2. Print the calendar and hang on your wall
3. Do each of the videos once (video playlists are listed per day in the table above)
4. Check mark each video you do
5. Sign off and then tweet or instagram me your accomplishment @Blogilates! (I highly recommend creating a twitter and instagram account to get more active in the Blogilates community. It is also easy to communicate with me there!)
NOTES:
New workout videos are uploaded every Monday on YouTube.com/Blogilates. “Cheap Clean Eats” recipes also air every Thursday for your healthy foodie desires 🙂 Although the new vids are not included on the Beginner’s Calendar, I encourage you to take a look at them when they come out. Please try if you want to challenge yourself! If you can’t do it anymore, just stop, and start again. NO BIG DEAL. Breaks are ok. Everything you do is PROGRESS!
Do the best you can! All it takes is hard work and determination. If you want it bad enough, your dream of becoming fit will turn into a reality. I promise.
Please let me know if you have any questions. I am your friend and your instructor and I am here for you!
<3 Cassey
1,927 thoughts on “POP Pilates for Beginners Calendar!”
There are Array1927 comments posted by our users.
I love this workout it really works
Hey, thank you for the great videos! I just re-started doing pilates or any sports after a few months break. So, I’m in the 2nd week of the calendarand I feel that my muscles are too sore to work out every day like the calendar says. Is it okay to do, let’s say, every second day until I’m getting stronger and fitter or do I miss too much content then? Looking forward to hearing from you and thanks so much for this!
Taking breaks is literally the best thing you can do for yourself physically and mentally. If you don’t allow breaks its unhealthy and lead to eating disorders (I say this because it has happened to me)
I did the beginner’s calendar last year and then moved to the monthly calendar and then started PIIT. but I injured myself and everything went downhill after that. It’s been about 6 months since I stopped doing anything at all. Do you think I should start again with the beginner’s calendar or is it safe for me to join the monthly one? Thank you!!
You can def do either beginner’s or monthly! Just make sure to listen to your body and take modifications where you need it. You’ve got it though!!!!
Would like to know more
Would like to know more
Am new. would like to know more about it.
On the days where there are multiple videos, each 30mins long, are we meant to do each one back to back or for instance if there is a 30 min video and a 9 min video (you’re meant to repeat 4 times) how do you go about tht because I don’t know if I want to do an hour of workouts everyday 😵
Has anyone found a warm-up? These go right into exercises – not great for 430 am…
I just do the cardio warmup from day 3 every day before the other stuff. she has some other warmup videos in the calendar as well
Wow this is so creative
a beginner that can do 15 pushups on week 2??? what kind of beginners is this really for? i do not feel like I am one of them
Please please put this on CODA. It’s such a helpful tool!
Hi, I have downloaded the calendar and I hope to begin tomorrow. I was into yoga and pilates for very long but now I seem to lack the motivation, ..I need to tone off,
I liked your instruction but I find listening to you talk over song lyrics very stressful. I had hoped that day 2 would be different but it is not so I will have to search out another program unfortunately.
Hi how about the menu that I have to follow? Thanks
I am a beginner and many of the exercises hurt me in the elbows,thighs, tailbone and neck. Any suggestions? Thank you
Hi Cassey!! First, do excuse my bad english! ^^’ I’m a french fifty’s woman who has ever hated sport!
My oldest daughter has followed your challenge 2 years ago and she has shaped her body as nice as possible!She has recommanded me to follow it in my turn. I have started for 3 days ^^’ Thanks a lot for all you transmit to us!
Loves
Erica
Hey everyone I was looking for a workout routine. I was about to give up but I came across this site so I am going to give this a try I like how you have a routine for the whole month that’s what I was looking for so wish me luck. ☺
Started this calendário yesterday (because tuesday is also a good day to start something ?).
I think I’m going to love/hate these sessions… Lool
Just did the second day and my abs até killing me… Must be doing something right then ahahah!
Thank you só much Cassie for all you effort!
Greetings from Portugal,
Clau
Cassie, When we try to print the calendar, only 5 or the 7 days appear. It’s a simple fix, just copy and paste it into a word processing doc and then switch the page from vertical to horizontal. But to reduce that extra step for your newcomers, you might want to reduce the pdf a bit so it fits on one page. Thanks for all you do!
I’m so going to do this I have all ways wanted to have fun working out now I can
did I not know about Blogilates?! Am I the only one who missed this? What an amazing idea!!! I’m going to start the beginners […]
Read more at https://www.blogilates.com/blog/2013/06/03/beginners-calendar-for-popsters-just-starting-out/#4s01uktlQ3zhLYsW.99
Just finished the month! I did a minimum of 20 minutes of low-impact cardio each workout day in addition to the videos, and did each video of the day one time. I reduced my calorie intake, ate more fruits and veggies, but still ate my favorite foods most days.
Did my measurements this morning: I’ve lost an inch off of each of my arms, and two off of my hips: that is four inches! I also have lost 2.2 pounds! My clothes already start to fit better, and my posture has improved.
For you guys starting out: Don’t expect a magical, virtually instant visual change. You’ve got to understand that change takes time and commitment. Celebrate the little victories. Make realistic short-term goals. You will surely get to where you want to be. I made little changes and got little (but great) results. If you want big results, you’ve got to make big changes.
I can guarantee, however, that through completing this regimen you will:
~ Build muscle
~ Build confidence
~ Reduce stress
~ Be happier
I wish you the best of luck! Moving onto the 2015 Beginner Calendar now! We’ll see how much more I have changed over the coming four weeks!
i have this really large butt !! its no where near shaped and ive been trying to cut down fat from my butt for years !! can u plz help me
Day 4 and going strong! I’ve lost 7lbs already thanks to you Cassey; thank you so much! x
Casey, one video and I’m hooked up 🙂 You are nice to watch, you are also pretty but in the same time you mean business, you are able to motivate me to go on with the exercise, therefore my enthusiasm 🙂 I also go to the pilates classes 1-2/month and it feels the same when watching you: difficult, but rewarding. Thank you.
Hi all,
I don’t understand, when in 1 day there are more video’s do you have to follow all video’s?
Thanks
Yes, you should do all the videos listed on that day.
Don’t worry though, not all the videos are all that long; you still end up doing pilates for only about 30 minutes total.
🙂
Hi,
Yes ideally you would do all the videos to get your body moving!
Asking questions are truly pleasant thing if you are not
understanding anything entirely, however this piece of writing gives
nice understanding even.
I love Cassey! I HATE working out (I was so lazy) but Cassey makes it easy (well, not always easy, I think ABC Abs killed me!) but what I love most is how easy she is to watch! She doesn’t patronize or talk down to us who have no idea what we’re doing and explains things clearly! Well, let’s crack on with Day 4! (Longest I’ve ever stuck with exercise plan haha!)
Hello to all, for the reason that I am really eager of reading this webpage’s post to
be updated on a regular basis. It carries nice information.
Good day I am so thrilled I found your site, I really found you by error, while I was
searching on Google for something else, Nonetheless I am here
now and would just like to say thanks a lot for a incredible post and a all round
thrilling blog (I also love the theme/design), I don’t have time to
browse it all at the moment but I have saved it and also added in your RSS
feeds, so when I have time I will be back to read a lot
more, Please do keep up the fantastic work.
i have just started doing Squats, but the problem is that my lower body is extremely hurting me can you please give me some tips to what i can do about them.
love your videos ❤️
I’m 13, I’m 152 cm, and I weigh 131lbs, and I want to loose 20lbs by my birthday in June,I workout but I’m not loosing any weight
Behind the Technology The torrent technology is operated with a torrent
client sending bits of the torrent file via a torrent protocol.
Bahya kumbhaka is the state when the yogi surrenders his very self , inside form of
his breath, towards the lord and merges with universal breath it could be
the noblest way of surrender, because yogi’s identity is entirely merged with
all the Lord. Torrents really are a much
quicker plus more convenient approach to downloading on the internet, and Seedbox
could be the perfect treatment for get torrents downloaded or uploaded for sharing of one’s own.
What’s the difference between this calendar and the beginners 2.0 one?
The 2.0 one is the second calendar and this one is cassey’s first capendar as far as i know.
Just did my very first workout of the beginner calendar! I’m really excited to do this! I have so little strength in my body, I had to keep resting because I was just incapable of holding up my body weight. But I’m looking forward to changing this and powering through the burn! :3 thank you so much for your videos!!
Just finished day 2 week 1! And my *soon to be * abs and muscle are aching so bad it was so hard! But I’m determined and know I can do this! I am so motivated and thank you so much Cassey
Hi i’m doing the new beginners calender and some of the moves I just can’t do because i’m so unflexible is there anything i can do to become more flexible along with the pilates videos. 🙂
Also to lose weight and really tone my legs and bottom will just doing the videos work or should i do cardio as well ( is there anything other than running because I have tried so many times and I always give up it just doesn’t work for me). 🙂 x
Stretching and a lot of it, don’t be put off if you can’t stretch to the extent in the video, the more you do it the more flexible you will become.
Just finished day 1 of week 1
hi cassey! your videos rock! i don’t usually like wokring out or should i say i don’t really like it. but over the holidays i have gained so much and decided to do something about it. one day i saw Lindy Ng of bubzvlogs on youtube doing your work out. i got curious so i went and searched for your chanel. at first i was like oh no this looks so hard for me to do until i saw your website and found out you have a beginner’s program. so i gave it a shot and yes… it killed me the first day and everyday at the same time it kept me looking forward to dong the next set of exercises the next day. i feel so good doing the daily workouts you created. i am only on day 5 but i can already see results. its not that significant but i can see it. also i am still having difficulty in executing all of the exercises properly mainly because of my weight. but i still try and push as far as i can. thank you for sharing your workouts, tips, advices and encouragement.
Hey Cassey!
I really love your videos.
Unfortunately, I got really sick a few days ago and had to stop the workout 🙁
I hope I can start again soon.
It makes so much fun to work out with you and the best about it is that after a few days I already felt some changes!
Thanks so much for doing what you do and keep up your great work!!!
Kisses from Germany <3
I started this calendar recently and take note that I never stick with any type of exercise plan. I’m 4’11 and I weigh 116 pounds and my goal is 100 pounds! I’d like to lose weight to look better (in my eyes) and to also feel healthier 😀 As I said, I never stick with any exercise thing and I’m usually really lazy — always laying around and watching movies while eating lol! But I’m currently on day 6 and I’m very proud of myself. The first two days made me soooo sore and I could barely do a roll up, but on the third day I was able to do a roll up (with my legs kinda lifting up a bit) but progress is progress! I remember my attempt at a roll up on the first and second day — it wasn’t great lol I didn’t even make it up half way. I’m also eating more healthily and drinking lots of water throughout the day. I’m excited to finish this calendar and I hope anyone else who reads this and is teetering on the fence between giving up or moving on can also stay motivated!
I got the email but it wont give me the password
Hi! Could you please make a water drinking challenge? Like a one month challenge to drink x amount of water or like drink this many cups on one day and then the next more and more something like that! i have a very bad habit of not drinking water and i think this will help motivate me if i have like a goal each day 🙂 thanks so much <3
Hi Kayla!
Join the 30 day flat abs challenge! There are cups of water on the calendar to encourage you to drink more water than you usually do! Have fun 😀
If you are reasonably fit already is it recommended to start with the beginners calendar, or should one start with the regular calendars?
well, you could try the regular calendars at first to just try em out and if you find em to hard then switch to the beginners for the rest of the month
Hello fellow Popsters! I love doing things like this when I work out I feel happy with my self, but everytime I go to a work out I feel like someone is watching me and I get embarrassed and don’t do the work out. I feel stupid when I am about to began and just put it to the side and never do the workouts. Can someone help me get over this? Any advise?
Hi Cassie! I know exactly how you feel. I love doing these workouts but even when I’m alone I also feel like someone is watching me. It’s stopped me from doing workouts so many times but then I just told myself “Hey! It’s okay if someone is watching me anyways, I shouldn’t be embarrassed because I’m doing these workouts to help myself!” There is no shame at all in trying to take better care of your body, and don’t let anyone tell you otherwise. Best of luck! 🙂
I am just about to print my beginners calendar and I am so excited! I have lost weight but not nearly enough and I am starting to go backwards instead of forwards and feeling like I can’t go on so I thought I would try something new – my friend introduced me to Blogilates when you ran your Christmas comp and since then I have been popping onto your site more and more often and am now taking the plunge! It’s so great to see such a girly website where everyone encourages each other! I can’t wait to start this journey with you all!
With much love and excitement from South Africa
Sally <3
Whew, Day 5 was killer! But Cassey’s encouragement and positivity always helps. 🙂 Onto Day 6 tomorrow–working my way through the Beginner’s calendar.
i just did the first day and i feel fantastic!
Hopefully you are doing great , keep going I’m just starting this program now can’t wait for binkin season
I just finished day 1 … wow … hopefully I get better … my legs were burning during the leg segment!
I just did the first workout and I feel great!
I just did the first day abd I feel great!
Why do I have to pay for this calendar in the app?
You don’t.
Well it does ask for $0.99 a month to subscribe, which i believe is the only way i can see the workouts of everyday since i havent figures out how to do that for free.
I clicked on the button to see if it asked the pasword of the month but it obly says “error in-app purchase not allowed”
Hi, i am a girl who has been overweight since young and have been wondering ways to slim down. I came across your blog and was thinking if i should follow your plan. I am about 200 pounds and i totally do not know where to start from, as i am not sure if it suits a person who never really exercise in the first place.. Am i too late to start slimming down when i am already 20 years old?
Pls advise!:) A person who dreams to be slim…
It’s never too late to start and it’s always the right time to do it. If you are scared about no doing it perfectly, don’t worry we all started somewhere, if you can’t do the whole video or the whole workout for the day it’s ok you just have to understand that your body needs to adapt to this new phase and it takes time and a lot of effort, but it’s all worth it.
Right now I’m coming back from a spinal injury and it’s like starting all over, not being able to do everything, not moving every muscle the way you are supposed to but it’s a start, we just have to be patient and work our way up.
I recommend you start to be interested in kitchen. For me have been the best I could do for me, because sometimes I want to eat clean but my mom doesn’t. So I learned step by step to cook easy recipes. I started by breakfasts. They are very simple, just cut some fruits or push a button for mix. Oatmeal and fruits first, the I go to he second step, go with chicken, meat, with vegetables and little water on a pan and salt. So dinner it’s a slice of cake… not literally! dinner is simple like breakfast. And drink water, add some lemon (without sugar) and also exercising 🙂
I wish this can help you, is the way that works for me 🙂 and download Blogilates app, there is so much inspiration and pictures of food that you can use to imitate some meals.
Good luck Girl!
One thing i don’t understand is i’ve just spend money on the monthly calender, so does this even cost anything?
im almost done with the beginners calendar (i love it) which one should i do next?
When the next monthly calendar comes out do that one 🙂
might sound like a stupid question…
but, do you guys out there do the routines once, or do you do them multiple times in the day.
I am up to day 3, and I feel like doing them once I feel the burn straight after, but nothing much after that.
So, what do you guys do?
Hi Penny 🙂 I just started the beginners calendar, and i´ve repeated the routines two times if i feel like i can give more. I´m not an expert nor an instrictor, but I think you can listen to your body and feel how long you can go without hurting it. (:
Hi guys I just started working with the beginner’s calendar and I’m absolutely loving it. One thing I did not understand is when Cassey says “suck you’re belly bottom in”. What does this mean because every time I do this I feel like I’m holding my breath and can’t breath. Is there a proper technique to practice this? Pls let me know.
Thank you.
Sorry its “suck you’re belly button in” :p
By sucking your belly button in you’re tensing up your core thus using more muscles! If you feel like you’re holding in your breath, remember to breathe through your chest, not your tummy. Goodluck!
You’re simply sucking your stomach in, but REMEMBER TO BREATHE! 🙂
I do this because i have a big belly and it helps me look thinner. try and inhale until your stomach goes in, hold your stomach in that same position and breath out with your nose. Don’t release your body,,,, that’s what she means. hope i could help.
thanku guys:) I’ve been doing it and i feel really good!!
It’s more about contracting your lower abs and drawing your belly button down and less about breathing in to hold it down. Hope this helps!
Very interesting,thank you
I just started this today, feels so good! I’m just wondering, am I gonna get surprised with having to buy something at the end of the Beginner’s Calendar? Anyway, I feel like I already know by going through your website & your very friendly video. I’ve signed up for the newsletter & can’t wait to see results, I wish I had known about you sooner 🙁
All free! 🙂
I want to try this calender but reading through I don’t know what some of the exercises in the pink writing are. Could someone please just give me a short description of them? I have a rough idea but just to be sure. Thank you 🙂 X
If you go to her youtube page she has videos for every workout posted on the calendar im pretty sure. 🙂
I’m so excited that I found your blog. A friend introduced it to me. I have really been struggling with my stomach being all bloated like. I’m not very big I’m not overweight. I’m 5 foot three and I weigh 136 pounds but for some reason I have a 35 inch waist and my stomach seems bloated and I’m not sure how to fix that. Is there anything that you skin suggest anything you suggest that I eat any help would be so useful. I’ve been using your Pilates for beginners for about 10 days now and I can’t really tell much of a difference
First, 10 days isn’t much 🙂 Second, make sure your posture is correct, its possible that you suffer from lordosis: http://www.exrx.net/Kinesiology/Posture.html#anchor53622
If your posture isn’t correct, try to correct it. Otherwise just keep working out 🙂
Is it bad that I’m not sweating during and after the exercises? I work out every night (I’m on day 3) and it’s kinda cold in here but I should be sweating even just a drop, right? And don’t say I’m not doing it right because my heart rate always goes up and my muscles tremble during and after the exercises. Am I still able to burn fats/calories here??? Someone. Help. Me. Please.
Its not bad at all the reduce of sweat means your getting used to the exericise’s which means that you should do more advanced workouts from Blogilates, and yes you still are able to burn calories and fat I have been doing the exericise
Hi everyone!
So I am up to week 2 of the Beginners Calendar and I am loving it! Even if it gets to nine o’clock at night and I haven’t done it, I still find time because I love it so much! They also seem to go so much quicker because they are so fun! I hope everyone else finds it just as fun as I do 🙂
hi how many times in a day you do exercise ?i am so much confused please help#Claire
I just did day 1 of this… wow!! I feel the burn especially in my arms!! thank you so much Cassie for this I love it :))
Hey fellow POPsters ^^ ! I wanted to ask.. Um.. Is it normal if I’ve done the beginners calendar but I still find it very hard to do the monthly calendar videos >_< I feel really stupid cos I cant… So I'm thinking of doing it one more time :/ what do you think ._.
No way! Everybody is different. Maybe you should try the beginners calender again 🙂 Just keep doing!!:D
Don’t feel stupid if you aren’t ready yet! There’s nothing wrong with going at your own pace. You can do the calendar again or try some of the workouts on the monthly calendar with modifications(you can use the beginner videos as reference for that!). I’m doing the beginner’s calendar again after first injuring myself and then moving. I’m still having to be very careful and can’t go all out. But no shame in the beginner’s workout if you still feel that you are benefiting from it. I think that it’s great that you are sticking with it! 🙂
I can’t see the beginners videos… I don’t know why… 🙁
I am breastfeeding my 3month old preemie, gained soo much during my entire pregnancy and 71 days in NICU…used to workout alot before, jog and dance..Now I am not sure how to loose while doing these exercises I am on week 2 now…any dvice plz in mind i am breastfeeding 🙁
ibty, definitely don’t get discouraged. You are doing exactly what you need to do. Breastfeeding your baby is the best for you and it is God’s perfect after birth diet plan. Breastfeeding actually helps everything on the inside get back to its original size much quicker and it helps you get back to pre-baby weight and even more if you eat well and exercise. Drink lots of water and that will help you lose weight and produce more milk for baby. Do not diet by reducing calories. Just eat healthy and exercise. Wear a good sports bra for support.
I’m so proud of you for wanting to breastfeed your baby! Keep it up.
Thanks for a marvelous posting! Iquite enjoyed reading it, you happen to be a great author.I will remember to bookmark your blog and will eventually come back later in life.I want to encourage yourself to continue your great work, have a nicce afternoon!
what does it mean roll ups? help me!
You’ll learn how to do a roll up in the very first video! Pop pilates for beginners total body workout. Good luck!
Hi guys, may I know after Beginner’s workout I will be proceeding to Monthly workouts right? Where to find each video for the monthly workout?
(Cause basically beginner’s workout are all linked here. Where do I find monthly ones?) If it’s at her youtube channel, how do we find them?
THANK YOU!!
Do advice!
you type the indicated work out in the calendar and search it at youtube. 🙂
Just go to her youtube page, blogilates
then go to her playlists and she has them there
HEY THERE
I’m stoked that I found you and I’m planning on starting the beginners calendar tommorow!!
However i dont have great internet so as i progress its going to be a pain to keep downloading the youtube videos
i have a suggestion, if you could please make a list of the workouts/positions used in each video it would save me a tonne of internet and more time for PILATES
Please it would be a great help as im super eager to get fit and have new start for 2015!!!
I just set alarms on my phone and I’m gonna start this on Sunday! I am determined to do this entire thing
Losing weight tops my new year’s resolution lists this 2015. My friend introduced me last year to Pilates, but I’m such a procrastinator. I really want to be back on track again and face those morning grind by injecting my daily exercise again to my schedule. That calendar is such a big help for me. Looking forward to an amazing transformation with this blogilates calendar.
calendar printing Los Angeles
I’m up for this challenge. Got to try this one..
Is there a calender after the beginners one? one a little harder? And maybe has like protien and whey shots to take before and after the work outs? I’m loving this website !!
Cassey posts monthly ones but you need to sign up for the newsletter to get the passcode!
I have a question, before doing the videos mentioned in the calender, should you stretch and warm up? Because it specificly says to stretch on day 4, so I am not completely certain. Also before and after videos in general? If it is only a 6 min. work out, do you really need to stretch and warm up before hand?
Thanks in advance to anyone who answers 🙂
Hi Kirstine!
Yes you should always stretch. There are a couple of good stretching video’s Cassey made. It will help you avoid injuries. Good luck!
Yes u should stretch before and after all workouts even on rest/stretch days
It will help from mucle strains or other injuries
how much fat do you lose when your done?????
PLEAS REPLAY:)
I’m having a lot of fun doing your 30 day challenge…… sort-of. I am in medical school and studying or working constantly so I’m not doing the whole thing, but I start the day with 10 push-ups and then do one of the videos for the day on your calendar before bed. Day 2 and going strong!
My problem is the eating. I get too little sleep and spend a lot of time commuting, in lectures, and reading and it seems that every time I sit down I get so sleepy. I end up eating to stay awake because I have to get the reading done. I don’t drink coffee or tea. Any suggestions on other ways to stay awake during lectures and studying? And is there any way just doing the exercises will help me improve my weight and body shape if I don’t change my eating habits?
Hi Linnea,
Exercising, especially in the morning will help you wake up a bit more, but there’s no real substitution for getting enough sleep! One thing I’ve found helped me stay awake at work was trying to cut back on refined carbohydrates (white bread, white pasta etc) and replacing those with whole grains as well as cutting back in sugar. I definitely noticed I’ve stopped getting those post lunch crashes.
Doing the exercises alone will improve your muscles and your body shape (particularly if you’re not particularly overweight) but if you don’t change your eating habits at all you’re unlikely to lose much weight.
I definitely can relate to that hardcore studying phase so good luck! The more you look after your body the better you’ll feel!
I had lost 55 pounds in 5 months doing blogilates and eating clean, then I found out I was pregnant!! I had by baby exactly a month ago. The dr said I can start working out again so I am starting from the very beginning, the beginners workout calendar. Can’t wait to be slim and toned again!
Just finished #Day1 .
So happy, motivated and proud of myself! 🙂
I just did day 1 too! Yay!!!! Go us! My girlfriend did this program…she lost 25lbs…I’m so proud of her! And excited to see my results!
I’m loving the beginner calendar
Can’t wait to go onto the monthly one!
You’re the best Cassey
Hi Cassey,
my doctor and my psychologist recommended me to train in the morning to be awake in the morning. Could you advise me a routine to do that is not too long please?
Thanks a lot,
Maude
First of all: Thank you Cassey for offering your passion and these workouts for free!
As I am starting this calendar for the fourth time now, I wondered if you would consider making a DVD out of the beginner videos? I often don’t have good internet and therefore have to take breaks in the middle of some exercises to get the video going again. Pleeeaaase?! :*
Hi! I am loving this, and I’ve even gotten my husband to join me. He rolls his eyes sometimes, but it’s totally kicking his butt. (The other morning he was looking in the mirror, and said “hmm… My shoulder hair is gonna look weird in my backless dress…” Completely deadpan. Love him.) anyway, my question is this: any sort of teaser move, or when you have us on our tailbones, I either fall off to either side, or if I manage to stay balanced on the center, my tailbone hurts. Is this normal and just part of the process, or is there something I can do to minimize the pressure on my tailbone? My family says I’ve always had a bony butt… Also, my hips do this fun tendon-rolling-over-bone popping thing. I’m used to that one, and while its uncomfortable, it isn’t painful. I danced a lot growing up, so I dealt with it then. Just wondered if anyone had ideas on how to deal with that, too.
thanks!
Hi Ali. I have the same problem. I forget, or I don’t have time for lik 3 days in a row. It makes me feel like I’ve failed, and have to wait until the next month to start again, and then the same thing happens. But this month I have decided that when I miss days, I will just come back to it from where I left off.
I think I did day 1 on the 3rd, day 2 on the 5th and only today on the 8th am I up to day 3.
Sure, it’s not as solid as if I were remembering every day, but I can keep that feeling of moving forward, despite missing my work outs some days. I WILL get to the end of this calendar, even if it takes me 2 months. And surely that sense of accomplishment is better than feeling disheartened by my attempt to take better care of my health, I I am always moving towards that accomplishment, not constantly feeling like I have failed /again/.
Perhaps this approach may be helpful for you too as you find a way to work pilates into part of your daily routine?
All the best, Ali. You can do this. <3
Hi,
I am new here and I think this is a great blog site and I’m glad that I have found it. I used to do Pilates years back and it was beneficial for me but I had to stop. Anyway, I’m looking forward to start the four week plan. Also, I am reviewing for an intense government exam which I will take next year. I intend to do this plan side by side with my review in order to have a balance healthy mind and body. Wish me luck.
I also have a question, I can do the exercise but I am not sure with the meal plan. I used to be a vegan so is it ok if I just watch what I eat and follow your exercise instead? I appreciate your reply Cassie Thanks.
hey hello cassy, but since I’m following this schedule, I chiedert whether the various exercises (I mean the video) I have to repeat them more than once, and to get a result more in less time, what can I do.
Thanks for Everything
I started doing the POP pilates videos about 5 years ago, and for a while was in killer shape because of it. Pilates is and always has been the only exercise I am interested in doing, so when I got too lazy for POP pilates I got all soft and squishy… now, back at it after a 2 year hiatus, I’m working my way through the beginners calendar and it is AWESOME. Just the right amount of challenge. I love how the videos are short and I love how Cassey mixes it up with cameo appearances by other instructors. Keeping it fresh is the best way to keep me interested (with my short attention span). I hope I get just as obsessed with pilates this time around. Thanks for the great workout plan, Cassey!
I started the beginners calendar and I hope to don’t give it up!! Good luck for everyone!
We’re all in this together! Come on guys – we can do this! I’m starting tomorrow xx
Hey guys! I started the beginners calendar in mid-october and loved it! Unfortunately, I had a knee injury two weeks ago and put a pause on all workout-related activities. I’m re-starting today. Anyone with me?
Totally with you! I keep seeing the monthly calendars come out, but last time I tried to do one, just day 1 KILLED me and I could harly walk for 5 days. Decided to start with the beginners calendar for November. 🙂
hey girls! so, I started the beginners calendar 2 weeks ago but Im always forgeting to do it and have to star over. It makes me want to quit 🙁
i suggest you to make an alarm on your phone! it will help you to remember that you jave to workout and you will never forget. that’s what i do and it’s really helping me!:)
and put it on the wall it actually helps
Hi Ali. I have the same problem. I forget, or I don’t have time for lik 3 days in a row. It makes me feel like I’ve failed, and have to wait until the next month to start again, and then the same thing happens. But this month I have decided that when I miss days, I will just come back to it from where I left off.
I think I did day 1 on the 3rd, day 2 on the 5th and only today on the 8th am I up to day 3.
Sure, it’s not as solid as if I were remembering every day, but I can keep that feeling of moving forward, despite missing my work outs some days. I WILL get to the end of this calendar, even if it takes me 2 months. And surely that sense of accomplishment is better than feeling disheartened by my attempt to take better care of my health, I I am always moving towards that accomplishment, not constantly feeling like I have failed /again/.
Perhaps this approach may be helpful for you too as you find a way to work pilates into part of your daily routine?
All the best, Ali. You can do this. <3
Starting the beginners’ calendar today for the winter dance with my dream boy in January. Can’t wait for my smoking hot bod!
starting the beginners calendar today. wish me luck.. is there any meals that you can subscribe for me anyone. I currently weigh 170lbs and would like to lose some weight for my birthday in april.
I started the beginners calendar last week but I missed two days over the weekend, so I’m feeling really disheartened and lazy right now 🙁 I made it through today’s videos but I feel like I’ve gone a step backwards. I think I might have to put my social life on hold until this calendar is done and I’m in a better routine!
it would be great to find a person who has just started the beginners workout so that we can share our progress and encourage each other.
I just started yesterday!
Great 🙂 can I find you on facebook too ?
Hey I started on the 1st of November and am up to Day 4!!!
My abs are hurting but besides that I feel great!
I started 4 days ago! Would love to be in contact with you & Madison 🙂
I’m still on it .. day 9 now. It is so great:) Besides it is always fun to have someone around who is going through the same thing 🙂
Hi. Good morning. I am new to this website and will like to start on the beginners calender. Was wondering if there is a meal plan to go along with the work out. I dont have a yoga mat as yet znd was also wondering if i can start without one still until i buy one and if i can start the work out today sunday.
Thanks so much..
p.s. i love your videos.have been watching some and finally decided to start.. want to start losing weight and be in a better shape for my birthday in april..
please tell what i eaten in this month?????
This is so helpful. Thank you Cassey for your ability to make a workout calendar. It saves us the time and trouble trying to create out own.
When following the beginner calendar should we be doing any other cardio?? Thanks 🙂
Cardio would definitely help a lot, seeing as it burns fat and most of these videos seem to focus on toning 🙂
I would suggest not to overwork yourself though, definitely if you’re a beginner. I’m on day 3 of this calendar and I’m feeling great!
I know… I am so stiff… So great!!! We can keep in touch!!! Thanks
Hi cassey!
Just wondering if the 4 week plan is over whist program should we do next? There are heaps of videos in your YouTube channel and I do not know which is the next one!
Thanks a lot!
She posts a calendar every month with names of videos that you can search for on youtube, if you look through her website you’ll find it. Hope this helps 🙂
Hey, downloaded the calender and gonna start it tomorrow. but i dont get whats the plank, roll-up, burpee,situp ?? Is there videos about em ? Thank you.
Search the moves on Google and you should find some demonstrations! Cassey goes through some of those moves in the first few videos, too 🙂
Thanks for reply :))
Is anyone else having issues seeing the beginner’s calendar? It shows an error in the image.
I was really looking forward to printing it out and getting started!
I am also having issues viewing and printing out the calendar. I wanted to start today.
You don’t need the calendar. Just start on the days below the calendar. They have the videos you need to do. I know it is not as exciting checking them off but please don’t use that as your reason not to start this amazing workout plan. I am on week three and I feel SO MUCH STRONGER. 😀 Good luck
Hi guys its my 6th day of my beginners calendar but I should be on my 3week already and unfortunately i didnt do the 9thh day of the my workout because I got tired.. so here it goes, I noticed that my belly changed and have little curve but my tummy loosen I thought it will help tighten my tummy skin. I ALSO NOTICE THAT MY WEIGHT ARE STILL THE SAME though i can already fit on mysirt that I cannot already wear because I got pregnant and gain weight
Hey. I have also noticed changes (day 17) it seems like my belly has got flabbier :'( I think I’m eating more now that I’m exercising. I’m going to try drinking more water and keeping a food diary.
Hello …
I just regester now … and I wana ask am i late to start with these programm?
hey
can u plzz tell me how will my open the meal plan for 12 weeks …
i cant open it …
it wants my password …
but i got the password for this month as i just join u today…
if u search in the search bar, u will find it
1st week – beastm0de
2nd week- TICKITYTOCK
3rd week – feelingawesome
4th week – tonedinthezone
Hi Cassey!
I almost finished the beginners workout calendar! Jeej for me! 🙂
Now my question for you is, wich exercices can I do each day in the following 2 weeks to make a brigde to the november calendar? I would like to start the november calendar but do’nt want to do nothing for two weeks! Thanks for your feedback!
Annemie
Just start on the current calendar, but maybe don’t do the full hour yet, only if you feel up for it!
Hi Cassey! I can’t seem to open the calendar on Mac o PC. I am subscribed. Please Help!
Try opening it in Chrome, that worked for me 🙂
I have the same problem but i don’t have chrome only firefox and internet explorer but i only use the firefox browser
Hey guys,
I was just wondering – I don’t always have time to do these workouts in the morning and have to catch up on them later…does that really matter? Or should I try and wake up extra early to do them? It is only a couple of days in my week this happens so I am not sure. I still complete the videos just at like lunchtime or in the afternoon 🙂
Thanks guys :’) xx
I always seem to forget to do the pink highlighted things like “Wake up and do 10 push ups” or what ever it says that day. I was wondering if they’re really THAT important and if it was okay to skip it,
Hi Cassey I can’t seem to see any image let alone download it. Please help! Thanks 🙂
u think you need to subscribe first, then you will receive an email with the calendar. Thats how i got it (:
Hey cassey 🙂
Im 18 years old and I just found out about your website and those programs and Im so excited to make this change!
I just wanna say you are an amazing person and I simpley love you <3
Hey Cassie the link to the picture won’t open for some reason. Could you please fix this? 🙂 Thank you !
I can’t open it!! ???
Can i drink water while working out or should i drink it after or before
Hi!
I personally drink a ton the night before, another bottle before and then SIPS during. You can totally drink as much as you want after. I say sips during because if you drink too much, I’ve found that all the movement makes me want to throw up.
Hope this helps and good luck!
Hey. I am having trouble opening the calendar. I get a code screen whenever I click the link. What should I do?
Loving how planned out everything is, the calendar for example, the encouraging words, the huge effort put into. I’m starting today with the beginner’s calendar. Excited! 🙂
Me too!!
Hi!
I’m just had a baby by c section, nearly 7 weeks ago. My doctor has cleared me for exercise and I’m going to do the beginner calendar but are there any bits I should avoid? I’m conscious of not wanting to overdo it, particularly on my core which obviously was pretty damaged by the pregnancy and c section.
Thanks!
i had a c section also.. its been a while but just started back with working out. i cn just give the advise of trying to work moe on the lower abs not the top abs to get them at the same level. hope tht was helpful:)
I was just wondering. How long should I wait after a main meal (like lunch and dinner) before i do pilates?
that’s exactly what i was wondering, anybody that can help?
I would suggest to let your body digest the food and workout after, so I think 1-2 hours? Depends on what you eat
The research shows that exercising directly after a meal will help to lower insulin drastically (I forgot the actual percentage). They compared working out immediately after a meal versus waiting 30 minutes before working out. Only working out immediately after a meal is what made the difference.
Hi guys I’ll be doing the 1st day of beginners calendar but please help me how may repetition should I do evry workout? Or should I do the same cassey does to her video? Please help 🙂
I usually just follow along with everything she does but don’t worry if you can’t keep up/go as fast/do as many reps it just takes time
Tomorrow I’ll do the 1st day of the beginners workout. How many repetition should I do every workout? Or should I do the same repetition as casey does on her video? Hope you can help me 🙂
Should I do cardio with the videos or just what the calendar says ^^
It’s up if you can stand it or not! I like doing cardio but I don’t really have time to workout in a day so for the meantime I only follow what the calendar says 🙂 it’s perfectly OK to do both!
I usually add a few stretches, or a little of pilates basics (plank for a minute,or the hundreds) just to warm me up before I go into the schedule. But yeah, it depends on you and how much you’re willing to push yourself. That being said, you also have to be careful! My sister went straight into the HIIT workouts and ended up unable to go to work the next day because her thighs were so sore.
WE CAN DO THIS!!! 😀
This is my 3rd month repeating this calender with other videos and an ab challenge i’m down 55 pounds so far thanks cassie.
WOW!
That’s amazing, congratulations<3
WOW congrats ^.^
im just here not even losing a pound doing a workout a week >.<
I’m concerned-
I just finished day 2 last night and I was expecting to be really sore today- but I’m not at all. I wasn’t sore either after doing day 1 as well. Am I not doing something right, or is it too easy or? I have no idea- it’s frustrating though cause the normal calenders are too hard for me-
Same here! I’m on day 10 now and ever since I started the calendar I’ve never been sore, and though I thought I might be doing something wrong I’m seeing results! Not one day of soreness but I definitely feel stronger 😉
Yup, it’s normal. I finished 10 days already + did the days about 10 times every time until I could do all the moves well… and I was never sore but nevertheless I’m able to do the normal calendar now. So what I do is I do the beginner’s workout in the morning before work since it’s not very long and when I come back home I do the regular one :). Also, I learned that in the regular one I’m not able to do 100% of the moves BUT I do the beginner’s modification sometimes (because I have issues with my joints and can’t hold myself up :P) and I feel sore afterwards. So the workouts definitely build your core and train your muscles for harder stuff, at least if you repeat them / at the very end are able to perform the workouts without a problem. I hope it made sense and sorry for my bad english!
That’s great! I wish I had the time to do all that but I get up for school at 5 in the morning! :/
Can you recommend some easy leg and booty workouts because they’re hardest for me! 🙂
I have been watching your videos for a while now and I thought this was pretty cool that you offer a free workout calendar. !!!!!!!
I always thought I was in shape- my pants size and body’s reaction would disagree. I’m excited to know that my body is gonna get stronger. It’s a simple equation! If you follow this monthly calendar, you’ll get results! Woo!
How can I print this?
It might be a less complicated process if you go on google images..:
Try Google searching “Beginners Calendar Blogilates” > then go Google images > then in the extra search tools, click for a ‘large’ size > look for one that is pink-purple-blue coloured, it should have the name on top > then click the “view image” option. > you will just see the photo. > Right click it, and either print it if you know how, or copy and paste it into “Office Word” and then print it(When copy and pasting, the size remains BIG, so you might want to rotate your page to landscape)
~ Kay
click on the image
the image-only will come up in the tab
click on the image again and it will enlarge
right click on the image and hit ‘print’ (make sure your computer is hooked up to the printer first)
I can’t seem to enlarge this beginner calendar so i can actually read it.
Read above 🙂 use google images
click on the image
the image-only will come up in the tab
click on the image again and it will enlarge
Hey Cassey!
I’m really excited cause I’ve just begann your program (day one only but it hurts!!!!!). It has been a long time since I wanted to lose weight but I can’t get the perfect body I always wanted, although I do sport quite regularily: tennis, riding and sport at high school too…
But I saw the miracle your program has made on one of my friend and so I am hopeful that it will just do the same for me!
See you next month, I’ll tell you how it goes!! 😉
P.S. : forgive the bad English from a frenchy girl… :$
hey guys please i need to know can i have to eat i this month? please how much calories?
You just need to eat healthy. That is the only good advice I can give. And I absolutely don’t recommend counting calories ! It is stressful aand well I just don’t recommend it I deleted all the calorie apps I had on my phone. So just eat healthy. Lean protein lots of vegetables and fruits when craving something sweet and nuts are good too 🙂
I just donated blood yesterday, and wasn’t able to work out, but I’m confused if I should start again today, or just rest for another day?
I think you should try rest after giving blood for minimum of like 2-3 days. Then maybe repeat the ‘day’ you did before the blood test to get back into it. The calendars are made especially in the order: total body > abs > total body > lower body > abs > total body > rest
That’s why it’s bad to go from lower body to total body, follow the pattern if you can 🙂
~Kay
Does anyone know how many calories a day you’re supposed to have while on this calendar? Thanks 🙂
This is my opinion, but it is really unhealthy for you to count calories :/ It gives you a negative thinking when you suddenly look at your weight and it is higher than the day before. It also makes you feel hungry, like you have not eaten enough. I would just try to eat healthy, avoid fatty fast food or junk food. Try eat more veggies and fruits and not too many nuts. Eat the right size portions! and the very most important thing: take a little portion > chew for a long time – that one little spoonful(around 2min) > and then swallow.
~ Kay
Hi, Cassey! I’m really excited I found your website! I’m at a healthy weight and I’m a runner but I’d like to be more toned so I want to start this program. I run 3 times a week and I was wondering if I should do pilates also the days I run and if so before or after? I’m training for a Half Marathon so on Saturdays I have a super long run.
NADIA,
I’m a runner too. You are better off doing this program on the days you don’t run. I would suggest not doing this at all on your long run days. Your body needs time to recover. Pilates is a nice cross training element to your half marathon training. Good luck on you half!!
Hi,
I can´t seem to open the new Beginner´s Calender with any of the programs on my computer so I can´t print it :-(.
Can anyone help me or tell me which program to use?
Thank you for your help and thank you Cassy for the wonderful job you are doing!!!
Love your videos and this homepage!!
I’m having the same problem!!
I’m having the same problem too =(
I also am not able to open the calendar, but I really want to! Cassey, can you pretty please upload it another way so we can open it? Thank you so much! I appreciate your energy and smiles in all of your videos 🙂
I can open it on Chrome :0? But if that still doesn’t work.. Try Google searching “Beginners Calendar Blogilates” > then go Google images > then in the extra search tools, click for a ‘large’ size > look for one that is pink-purple-blue coloured, it should have the name on top
Hope this helps ^.^
~ Kay
I had the same problem but when i tried opening it on google chrome it worked. 🙂
I can open it on Chrome, but if that’s not possible anyway.. Try google searching it 🙂 “Beginners Calendar Blogilates” > Google images 🙂 Then use the extra search tools there and click to look for a large size. Hope it helps 🙂
Hi cassy , I have been doing a flat belly workout for about 2 month and more . At first my belly got thinner but in last 2 weeks it’s got bigger . It’s stressed me a lot . I need your advice .. or I need someone tell me what to do .?? Waiting a replay …
Hii Akina, I saw your comment and I thought maybe you are gaining muscle? I think this is a logical explenation for the fact that your belly is gaining volume. I read this is happens a lot of times. First the fat gets burned, and after a certian amount of time your muscles start to grow. I’m not an expert of anything, so maybe I’m not right. Xx
Hey Cassie. i wanna ask you a question. how can i get motivated to work out ?. every time i try to work out, i turn up sitting on my laptop and watching t.v episode or watching t.v. but not working out. because i don’t know when is the best time to work out ?. is it in the morning evening ? and is it before or after breakfast ?.i really hope you reply to my email. your biggest fan gousha from Kuwait <3.
Hey!
I pretty much had the same issue and truly the only person yhat can motvate you is yourself. You’ll workout because you want it. I finished the begginers calendar and after the second week, it was a given for me that I’d wake up and workout. As to when it’s better to workout, the difference between working out in the morning is that if you exercise just after you woke up, your body isnt fully up yet so you ll lose fat, and in the evening you burn calories. I prefer working out before breakfast, but some peope get dizzy so that s mostly up to you!
Hey Guys! I’m having a “shoe”-ation….This may be a dumb question but do you guys where workout shoes when you do blogilates or do you just go shoeless? If you go shoeless do you have trouble with your grip, and find that you sometimes slide? If you wear shoes, do your shoes ruin your yoga mat? Any solutions to fixing as well are greatly appreciated.
Thanks for the insight!
Hey, guys! I just had my first baby five months ago, and I just now got the inclination to start working out again. I started off with some kick boxing videos, then I ran a search for pilates videos on YouTube, and that’s how I found you.
I did your first video today and, coupled with the kick boxing, I feel great already!
I’m trying to print out the calendar but it seems the jpg is corrupted now. Is there going to be a fix to this soon?
On day 25! For all beginners, DO IT ALL! I’m so extremely toned now, more than I’ve ever dreamed of being, and my flexibility….wow. Can push my leg down to my face, whereas when I started, I had to bend it and it wouldn’t even be at a 90 degree angle. I thought it wasn’t possible, but after pushing through the 25 days, sweat and sometimes tears, I’m here. YOU CAN DO IT GUYS! 🙂
Thanks Emily. I can’t see any result it’s my day 10. Your words encouraged me to keep going.
Hi,
I have a problem, I cannot see/enlarge the calendar!
Does anyone maybe know why?
I am having the same issue! It’s in the first email i received when i signed up for the newsletter but its really blurry! Anyone have suggestions on what to do??
Yea, so I am I….
first day is done, I am going to push myself and do the whole month and hopefully see some results
Thank you so much :3!!
Is it me or is the calender broken? Cannot open it. :/
hey, i am a beginner and the videos doesnt want to start.who can me help.
Maybe a different browser? It didn’t seem to want to work in Chrome for me on my phone.
hey, i am a beginner and the videos doesnt want to start.who can me helpß.
I’m starting the calendar today, I weight 145Lb looking though 135Lb, 5ft 7in, wish me luck guys 😀
Hiii! I’d like to know, am I supposed to do each video one after the other, without stopping? Or should I do, for example, one after lunch and one after dinner? Thanks!!
I think it depends? I like to divide workouts between day and night! 😀 Don’t workout right after you eat, since the food is still proccessing and you wouldn’t want to throw up lol. For me, it’s best to stay at least one hour after eating before I workout! x
Thank you so much for these videos and your website. I’m a working mom but I love to stay fit to run around with my son. I just completed day one and I can’t wait to do the rest!
On day two.. feeling it already!! Tough work and I’m struggling but not giving up! Always feel AMAZING after I’ve completed a video 🙂
i started the blogilates calender not to long ago and when i started the cardio workout i started wheezing sort of. ive never had this problem before, has anyone experienced this before?
Hello! So I’m a beginner, and I’m totally stoked to begin working out. However, I cannot access the beginners calendar…whenever I press on the link, this huge lists of codes and symbols pop up. What should I do?
You’re probably using Explorer. I had the same problem but when using Chrome, the problem was solved.
I just started last week and I am seen results already and I am so happy.
What’s your routine? Do you do exactly what is said, or more?
i cannot download it T__________T
Me neither!! 🙁
Just google blogilates beginners calendar.
Goodluck!
Ehm, Hi! I discovered this blog by chance and I’m really interested… the fact is, I MUST exercise, I have high level of sugar in my blood and so, I must do at least 30 minutes of workout everyday. Not that I’m complaining, but I’m looking for something I can do everyday without getting bored and I’ve always been fashinated in pilates! So, I was wondering: could this be good as an exercise for me or I need something more “intense”?
I must say, I’m also overweight.
Thanks to everyone who’ll want to help me. 🙂
Hey Anna! I suggest you start with this calendar first to get used to POP Pilates alongside a 20 min walk/run. Then next month, do October’s calendar (subscribe to the newsletter) and work yourself up to running for twenty minutes! Don’t forget to eat mostly whole foods and drink at least 2L of water a day 🙂
I’m a guy and I’m sticking to these calenders as much as I can in addition to doing some of my own workouts. I want to build some muscle mass in addition to burning fat, I hope I’ve come to the right place because most charge membership fees for an exercise regime and diet plan. I feel like I’m certainly putting in the work, but eating is another story. It’s difficult to eat a consistently healthy diet when I live at home with my family (I’m 18) and most things on our shelves are junk. Anyway, I’ll skip to the point; what foods can I aim to eat which can build muscle mass and lower fat? I eat subway and boost whenever I can, which is about four days a week, but I don’t feel like it’s making much of a difference what I eat and that’s making me concerned. Currently, I’m about 173cm and 73kg, roughly average build. Any help, tips or advice would certainly be appreciated. Thanks in advance.
Hey, Kyle! The more whole foods you can incorporate into your diet, the better. Fruits and vegetables are super high in fiber and there are plenty of whole food options when it comes to eating protein. Seeds are a really great way to get tons of vitamins, plus they’re easy to sneak into everything! Try a smoothie with bananas, blueberries, tons of spinach, almond milk, a big scoop of peanut butter, and a tablespoon of chia seeds. This combination has tons of protein, amino acids, fiber, and best of all, WHOLE FOODS! Try eliminating as much sugar from your diet as you can (this includes “fake” sugar like what’s in your Boosts). Hope this helps, and remember, the more fruits and veg you eat, the more you’ll crave it. It’s totally normal to not be into them at first, but you’ll find that the cleaner you eat, the more you’ll like it!
Hey guys!
I’m on my 3rd day of the Beginners Calendar and I must say I’m quite excited. I’m 18 years old, 5’4” and 136 lbs and I can’t wait to see my results at the end of the calendar. I have one question though: when is it better to workout in order to lose weight? I’m usually doing it in the evening.. Any tips also on diet? I try to eat clean, but sometimes I fail because usually I’m not home for most of the day. Thank you! 😀
Sounds like we have the same body type! I’m 23 and I started my journey right around your age. I’ve heard that working out in the morning is best, but there’s no real “right answer”. If you work out too late in the day, it may keep you up at night, but ultimately do what you like best and what fits your schedule. When it comes to eating clean, try to prep meals and snacks you can take with you. It’s cheaper and healthier! If I have a free day, I spend most of it cooking so I don’t have to worry about finding the time to eat during my busy week. Hope this helps! Stick with the calendar! You can do it!
No mater how many times i reload the site or look on mobile, I can not get the calendar for beg. to print?!? I click enlarge but it’s not working. I did find a pintrest board and with a screen shot i printed but it’s blurry. Help… Please
I coul send it to you. If you want….
same here. I cannot view the beginners calendar. Help
just search beginners blogilates calender on google images :O)
I need advice on eating healthy. I’m not sure if there are picky eaters on this website but trust me when I say I’m picky. I almost hate every food and its hard for me to eat healthy when I’m grossed out by mostly every food, except junk food. Its not only healthy food I don’t like it’s unhealthy food as well. I hate cheese, salad even with the dressing on, soup, cold cuts, lasanga, vegtables, seafood in general, and a whole lot more. Seeing as I don’t like most foods I think some would assume that i’d be skinny but I’m chubby. I’m not really big just chubby and I feel like the only things that I can eat to eat healthy is oatmeal and healthy cereal. Can someone please help. Thanks
Hey don’t worry!
Sit down and write each food group on a piece of paper, then write every single food that you like (healthy or not) and write that under the correct food group. After that highlight all the healthy foods on the list, these are what you should try to eat as much as possible. Don’t worry about jumping in the deep end and saying that these are the only foods you an eat, gradually go into it. Try to swap one meal a day for a healthier one. You can use this as an opportunity to try some other healthy foods that you’ve never tasted before! Who knows, you might just find something else that you like. In the meantime workout as best you can and drink lots of water every day (around 2L).
Hope this helped you! xxx
Hello!! :)) I am writing to you from abroad 🙂 baku :)) I saw your videos YouTube approximately. And now I watching you. I loved your exercises. And I will do every day for your beginners calendar. But I am not fat : ) my weight is 48. I am thin 😀 and I want to be 50 or 51. But I cant. Do you have any comments for me? 🙂 love you ! 😉
I can’t download the JPG file, well, I can download it, but it won’t open because there’s something wrong with it.
Although the links are available, I’d like to have the calendar too though :/
You can find the calendar on Google. 🙂
Oh my God, thanks! 😀
Hi Cassie,
I was wondering if you probably could tell me why I can’t open the beginner calendar? It says that it is removed. Hope you can help. Btw I love your youtube videos! You’re amazing and your story about never give up on our dreams – ohhh I love it!!!!!
Hey Day 3 here (wooo) But I accidentally did a different workout day 1 instead of the Beginners Day 1…so day 2? ANY WAY I’m 5’4… and a half… and I’m in the 180’s (don’t remember the exact number sense I got on a scale last month) and I heard cardio is one of the biggest helps to losing weight (along with healthy diet) so should I stick with just the beginners videos before moving onto the normal ones? Or should I do the beginners videos every day and add one of Cassey’s cardio videos into my day as well? Please and thank you for the advise!
Hey there!
The videos on the calendar tend to help more with building muscle that losing fat. That’s not to say that you won’t lose fat when doing the calendar. What you can do to speed up the fat losing process is to do one of Cassey’s cardio videos or run/cycle/walk about 3-5 times a week as well as doing the calendar! I do the calendar everyday and run 3 times a week and I’ve noticed huge changes in my body! I’ve lost fat and now my abs and arms are more defined. Definitely continue with the calendar, its been a massive help to me! 😀
I really really love this calendar. I’ve never done such progress with excercising yet and I’m really happy that I’m close to the end of the 3rd week. 🙂 I like to add some extra challenges and even if I really don’t feel like doing anything I stick to at least the basics. I’ve never felt so determined about this before and I’ll try to keep on doing this and lose that weight and get in shape for the first time. =))
Can you tell us more about this? I’d want to find out more details.
So it’s the 18th. Should I start on that day or at the beginning??
In this calendar – at the beginning 😛
Hello
I just started this beginner’s calendar today.
I’m 5’1” and around 150lbs. Day 1 wasn’t too difficult.
If I stick through this calendar and then move onto the non beginner’s calendar,
would those (“exercise”) alone help with losing weight?
I can’t control my meals (“diet”) because of my grandmother
and I’d rather exercise more than to have to control what I eat.
Thanks 🙂
Hi there!
Exercising alone won’t help you lose weight. You might gain back the amount of calories burned during exercises, which won’t help you lose any weight. In order to lose weight, you have to consume 500 calories less than what you need and you can do this by exercising and dieting. Similar to what Cassie said, a toned body is made in the kitchen and not in the gym. I don’t know the exact words but you get the point. 🙂
Good luck!
🙂
I’m on day 15 and I’ve gained weight like 2 lbs and have reminded the same weight the whole time :/
I think this calendar really helps with toning your body and getting it into shape for more of the advanced pilates videos. Just keep going, and remember, it’s mostly 80% diet and 20% exercise. Hope this helped.
Don’t be discouraged! Muscle ways more than fat so you could have gained muscle! Just keep doing what you’re doing
Don’t be discouraged! You are building muscle, which weighs more than fat so though you are getting toned your scale weight may change.
hey cassie i like beginning workout
Hej Guys
Am I supposed to do all the workouts on each day, or can I just choose between them?
Thanks for you help!
Do everything listed each day! 🙂
Cassey
Have you ever thought of doing an aquatic version of your standing workouts.
I cant print the calendar its to big.help!!!!!!!!!!!!!!1
Hello! I’m planning to start this new makeover body meal plan next week together with the beginner’s workout calendar, because I’m still on the process of normalizing my sleeping patterns. Unlike the majority, what I want to achieve is the reverse transformation: to gain weight. I’m 19, only around 5’1” – 5’2” and weigh 93lbs. It just has come my attention that I’m underweight and 0.9 away from having the normal 18.5 BMI. I’ve been skinny and petite all my life till around 2 years ago when I started to become skinny fat. The last time I even had a flat stomach was perhaps 3 years ago. Admittedly, this makes me insecure, but I’m more worried about my health and that I fear I may develop eating disorders. T___T IDK.
Do you guys think the combination of this meal plan together with the beginner’s workout calendar is the best option for me or should I try out Cassey’s other plans? If so, which ones? What else do you suggest? Any tips? Thank you so much!
One thing you will find is that you will have more energy from exercising and from eating clean, the amount of protein you eat will help repair your muscles faster and give you more definition. If you feel worried or tired doing things then eat more, listen to your body as it needs the proper fuel to function. Food is energy.
You will probably gain scale weight as you get more muscle, but then the muscle will burn away the fat. You could end up weighing significantly more overall, due to muscle. Scale weight is an indication of where you are at, just like BMI but it doesn’t represent what you are made of.
In your mind you need to be thinking about burning fat and building muscle/strength and eating right/enough to fuel your body. Scale weight is just a number that represents the force of gravity in relation to your body. It isn’t your composition. It isn’t who you are.
Get healthy, eat clean and be happy <3
Thank u for the calendar it looks really good. I will defiantly start as soon as possible.
I am just wondering about the perfect time to exercise. should I exercise in the morning? and if the answer is yes do i need to have breakfast before or after the workout?
Thank u for your efforts, I appreciate it <3
Morning exercises before breakfast are the best for burning fat. Do how much you can and then again after lunch or dinner to burn calories. Really its whatever you prefer because either way it is beneficial. Good luck!
Oh my God. The first Day was so hard. I had to take some breaks but I tried so hard. Tomorrow I’ll try harder.
This is amazing!
Thank you so much
Day 1 complete. It was hard doing those leg lifts making me wanna quit but I struggled on thanks to Cassey’s encouragement in the video. Phew. Once it was over it felt great and I didn’t feel tired at all!
i need some advice! im on day 25 of this and i definitely see more definition in my stomach, legs, and arms. but im really actually looking to lose weight… i dont have a lot to lose, probably 7 pounds at the most, but this calendar wasn’t effective for weight loss. i think i need to pair these workouts with cardio, what would you recommend? does cassie have videos that are good cardio workouts that would help with weight loss? thanks so much! also – i really dont wanna have to run. ive tried it and i can keep it up for a week or two but then i just give up. im much more committed to workout plans like this calendar!
Check out the HIIT VIDEOS. They’re awesome for cardio workouts!
I would try doing her muffin top workouts. I’ve heard that they help a lot for losing weight. You don’t have to run for cardio. You can go outside for 20-30 minutes and just walk.
I’m on my 3rd week of this beginner’s calendar and it is amazing!! Whenever we do the Pop pilates beginner’s total body workout, I definitely noticed I’ve gotten so much stronger and I can finally do the video through without stopping or without flailing. On Day 1, I couldn’t even get past the whole video and I just felt like I wouldn’t ever be able to do the moves “properly” without flailing around so much! But after week 2, I’ve noticed huge changes! I’m losing weight, and somehow Cassey’s positive encouragements in her video is rubbing off on me! I just feel so much more positive and I’ve stopped the negative self talk to myself, and am loving and feeling like I’m accepting who I am so much more because I feel stronger and feel like I can do anything! Thank you so much Cassey!! <3 Can't wait to do more!!
I just started today. The leg circle was very challenging for me but I made it! I really like it that you always kind of telling stories in between, not just counting. That really helps me to get distracted from the tiredness and keep going! Thank you Cassey!
You should make this desktop wallpaper, this way you always remember suck that belly button in ^^
I do the same! I made this calender my desktop wallpaper so I am reminded and motivated all the time.
I had done this calendar before in march and then i proggresed to monthly calendar but i couldn’t even finish the day 1. Now Im doing the beegineer calendar again but I m afraid if i do the monthly one again i would give up. What should i do?
This daily routine is amazing! I struggled a bit at the beginning but the results are so encouraging 🙂 :). To reach my perfect summer body I also added a new drink to my diet called Botan, it’s a perfect appetite suppressant! No food cravings anymore <3 <3
Where do I find it!
I just discovered this amazing routine and after watching a few videos I think I’m inspired enough to get in shape. I’m gonna start this tomorrow. So Good luck to me and to everyone else doing this. Thanks Cassey!
I just found this on Pinterest! I’m excited to start my journey
I finished the first week! I have to tell you, this exercises are really nice. I struggled an bit on first and second day, but it is becoming easier to do them. I am sore as hell, especially after “What Makes You Bootyful”, but that only means I have worked those muscles hard. Can’t wait to complete week 2.
The first time I did this it was hard but also great , but how much do you have to do this 1x or more ?
just follow the calendar, if ur able to do the whole calendar, follow her normal calendar for each month. if your asking per day. do the routine once a day? i hope that helped
I’m on Day 5 now, but is it okay if I’m doing this without the diet? Or the meal plan or something? But I’m eating clean tho, plus I live in a rice-eating family, and my mom will get mad at me if she’ll notice I’m on a diet (which is I can’t). So, is it okay? I hope it’ll work. But does anyone of you guys are the same as me? Thanksssss! 😉
Hey ladies, so I’m on my second day of the beginners calendar and I weigh around 170ish lbs and I’m 5’1, I know thats super bad huh? Anyways I was wondering will I see a noticeable change by the time I’m done with this calendar? I mean by other not nearly as fun work outs I’ve lost a bit of weight and I’m two pant sizes smaller but I’m feeling a bit discouraged on whether ill see a difference…thanks for taking a look (:
Don’t get discouraged! Exercise needs time to take effect. There’s a quote I like to think about when I’m working out: “It takes 4 weeks for you to notice your body changing, 8 weeks for friends, and 12 weeks for the rest of the world.” It may not be immediate, but it will work. Good Luck!
Hey guys!! I just started this challenge (day 3 whoo!) and I just joined instagram as suggested! I don’t have any friends on there though and so if your all in the same boat please add me (ariannewells) so we can all share and support each other!! P.S. bare with me I am knew to the whole insta-whatever thingy…
i started this calendar on august 1st so that day 3 would be on august 3rd etc. and i would finish on august 28th but i missed 2 days (3rd and 4th) since today is the the 5th should i just do all the workouts i missed and today’s. i really want to stay on track and its upsetting me that i got 2 rest days
I started on August 1st so that i’d finish august 28th but ii missed 2 days (my 3rd and 4th) should i just start over or do them all now i really want to stay on track and its really upsetting me that i got two rest days
I finished day 4 of the #giveityourALLgust and made a vlog on youtube about it if anyone wants to watch it, its my first youtube video=] https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Jj1x2y0P99Q
I absolutely love love love this calendar! I have to admit I have been slacking recently so I’m starting from the beginning again. I even did a redesign of the calendar, to help motivate me! Check it out, I would love to hear your thoughts and hopefully Cassey likes it too!
http://www.thedesignloveaffair.com/blogilates-calendar-redesign/
Wow, the colors on the redesigned calendar are so beautiful! 😀 I’ve also been slacking, and am planning to start over. Hopefully, with the print out of your calendar, I’ll feel more dedicated and less guilty about my printer’s ink, haha. Thanks Margaret 🙂
Hey there 🙂 i’m new here, so can anybody help me please? can i choose everyday wich video i’m going to make, or do i have to do all off them each day?
Ps. sorry if my english isn’t correct 😉
your English was pretty god except its which and of 🙂 and you have to do all of them
I finished day 2 today and I can’t believe how much weaker I have gotten after 3 months. I couldn’t reach myself up or bend down slowly. The past 3 months, I was a bit sad because I couldn’t seem to lose weight. I was blind and lost muscle mass because my desire for my weight to decrease. Currently, I am restarting my blogilates journey and hope to see a healthier me!
i finished the calender today! although my results are subtle, i definitely feel a difference in my body. since the begnning when you said that holding in your stomach everyday is still considered working out the muscle, i’ve been doing that every single day now! now, i’m going to subscribe to your newsletter so i can begin august’s workout tomorrow! love you cassey! <3
I started today and I’m ready for more, it’s so fun!! (seriously). I’m from Spain:)
I completed the calendar last september, and went on with the monthly ones for a while. My confidence was boosted, I felt healthier, lost weight, got stronger. Unfortunately, my depression got worse and I stopped it all. I’m getting back on this because I have to remind myself that going into a spiral of self hate, purposely hurting myself and the people around me is not going to help me get better. Starting to work out with you and learning a healthy lifestyle is the only glimpse of real, reachable hope that I saw for years. You’re not going to read this, but thank you Cassey, thank you so much! (((day 4, I got so out of shape!!!!)))
Cassey may not get a chance to read this, but we all did. Depression is a lonely battle. Im glad you are recognizing the importance of exercise in fighting it. You are in my heart, Morgane.
Congrats Morgane!!! 😀 I’m proud of you! Even though I don’t know you I just wanted to tell you that as a fellow poster. I really admire your strength and willpower 🙂 Keep up the positive attitude and I hope you will one day make it to your goal. You got back up and started again, so that’s what matters 🙂
i just started today….. i will keep on doing it because it makes me feel fantastic, but at the same time TIRED my legs were burning …..
also,i will share will my friends so we all can have a sex, fit and healthy body……..
Onto day 2 I go, for the second time (I gave up last time around day 4 oops) BUT I’M DETERMINED TO STICK AT IT THIS TIME woop
Oh my godness. Thank so much for do this, Cassey! You’re incredible.
Today, i’ve done the 1000 squats challenge. It was so hard and it really hurts, but worth it. I’m so proud of myself right now. I thought that I couldn’t do it because i’m 14… But I was wrong. THANK YOU!!
Sorry by my english but i’m spanish 🙂 xx
Hi Casey,
I’m 13 yrs yrs old about to turn 14 in two months. I weigh 160 pounds and I’m 5’6 .i get really insecured around people who are skinnier then me and wonder if I can do it, I talk my self to doing these monthly calenders, inspired by you. I don’t look too big for my age but I just don’t feel right. I’m starting today and I hope I see a difference by the end of this month . You are truly my inspiration and watching your videos help me because even though your not with me physically, you are mentally helping me. Thank you so much!
Cassey, thank you SO much for taking your own time and putting all the effort into this! No one has ever done this for so many people. I’d like to also thank you for letting us use this and I’m going to try and follow this! I’m really into fitness but my health puts me off as I get bad abdominal pain whenever I workout. However, after months, it has gotten better and I did two workouts of yours and I feel like myself again! I love you and thank you so much.
Vic
xoxo
I may be dying, just finished day 1 of the beginner’s calendar. Didn’t realize how out of shape I truly am. Had to modify a few moves and may have screamed in muscle torturing pain a few times but made it through the full workout. Thanks for having this website.
Hello, would the beginners calendar be a good way to start loosing weight after having a baby.
After having 3 beautiful children I really want to go back to my pre-pregnancy body, and at that time I was only weighing in 140 and right now I’m too ashamed to go even near a scale. So do you think this would be a good way or should I go to something more lighter?
i can’t work out in the morning, i have to wake up really early to go to work. Would it still work if i do this when i get home at night. i don’t wanna start it if it isn’t a good idea 🙁
I think it’s fine! Just fit in the workout whenever you have time. Just think about it: working out (no matter when it is) is better than not working out! So, go for it!
I’m 14 and have struggled with my weight for the past four years. At the end of fifth grade (2011), I was around 130 lbs and felt self conscious and uncomfortable, so I took it seriously and lost about 20 lbs the next year through exercise and smaller meals and went down to my smallest weight, 112 pounds. Since then I had been maintaining a healthy weight of 120, and then less when I got very sick this spring. In the last three months I started eating at restaurants more often, and spending more time on the couch, and by doing this I gained about 20 pounds. I’m starting this plan because most exercise just doesn’t keep me motivated but Cassey’s videos are fun and entertaining. I’m hoping to get more serious once I finish the Beginner plan and to lose those 20 pounds by a year from now. I’m so happy I found something I like!
Hi Cassey!! Just wanted to say thank you for helping me get in shape for my wedding!! I’ve been doing your workouts for about two weeks now and can feel a difference!! My fiancé is impressed too!! 🙂
Hello,
This is my very first day and I am absolutely new to the fitness world (I dont want to lose weight but rather tone up and got interested by pilates as a holistic discipline to reach a healthier lifestyle). So I have absolutely no clue about planks, roll ups, burps etc (all the morning exercises), do you know where I can find a blogilates approved lexicon (with images if possible) ?
Thanks!
Mina
I don’t know if I should start with this calender or with the august one. Does anyone have any tips?
Hi, I’m a 14 year old girl, at 5″3 and I weigh at about 94 pounds, but I really want to get rid of my tummy fat. I tried hula hooping for a while but the only result I got from that was bigger hips, which aren’t really a good thing in my country. So now, I want to get rid of tummy fat and also get smaller hips. I actually have no confidence in wearing clothes that show my tummy even though people reassure me i look fine.
Hi Cassey,
Absolutely love your site. Just finished my second day. May I make a suggestion. On your workout calenders the time could be noted. So that we know how long the workout will be. I do alot of running, weight training and HITT on a stationary bike. Your pop pilates is just what I was missing.
Love your energy!
I’m 14, 5’8 and 140-150 pounds and I really want to lose some weight before school starts! I’m gonna start this tommaro does anyone have expierences? I’m so excited
Thank you Casey!
Hi!
If I want lean muscle, do I need to add a cardio workout (i.e. running or going on the elliptical) to these video workouts?
Thanks!
Today was the first day I tried this and wow I feel tired but great! Just trying to get rid of that freshman 15 here.
Hahaha same here!
Hey guys!
I was just thinking about starting the beginners calender but I’m a generally a really sloppy person and lazy. so it’ll probably take a while for me to actually start the diet and exercise but this time i’m really serious so wish me luck!! x I’ve gotten really sensitive about my weight i’m like 64.8kgs and i’m only 16 🙁 anyways I CAN DO IT AND I WILL DO IT!!!!
hey, don’t be afraid! You can do it! I’m seriously so lazy and it took be forever to actually build up the courage to start this thing. I just finished day 2 and it’s actually not as bad as I thought. And Casey really takes your mind off of the exercise. I’m about 60kg as well and I’m 15. Good luck, YOU CAN DO IT!!!!!!!
5’2 , 15, and 140 pounds :(. This blog has really inspired me to lose weight and get fit before the school starts. I would really like to hear about your results 🙂
Okay! ~ I’m almost ready.
I’m 5’5 in/ 1,65 m and 135 lbs/ 60 kg. o:
I’m kinda curvy, but when it comes to muscles… damn dangerous curves. T_T
I’m looking forward to lose some weight and be healthy.
I feel so stressed and tired… I’m only 14…
Omg I feel you im only 13 but I have a really curvy body and I absolutely hate it. I have bigger boobs than most girls in my school :/ but I did casseys july calander and I see a big difference on my body.my stomach is flatter my legs are toned and becoming more lean. Im hoping to drop one cup size by schooltime. But dont feel stressed. It is very tiring sometimes but dont give up. You can do it! Once you start youll feel amazing both inside and out . Good luck:)
@Rabbab, thank you so much, dearie! Good luck for you too! 😀 I’m cheering for you all to achieve your goals.
So, today I’m starting my first week. I have been running while watching movies (running in place. lol that’s kinda crazy) and I realized how out of shape I am. I’ve been running for 10-15 min and it felts like I was dying. I’m drinking 85.000-119.000 fl oz of water per day and sleeping more. I feel more energized and even my skin looks better! <3
AND CASSEY THANK YOU SOOOOOOOOOO MUCH! _> But a big X on day one. woohoo!)
I’ve been doing some of Blogilates videos the last weeks, and I just starting with the beginners calendar and I’m so exited! I just have a question… When is the recommended time to do my workout is better in the morning or afternoon?
Hello! I usually hate exercising in the morning, but i definitely think it would be a good idea to do it then. I’ve been trying that recently and i’ve been managing to do the entire workout for the day. I think it’s because you’re more fresh in the morning, rather than in the afternoon where you’ve probably gotten a little tired from a day’s work. Hope i helped!
Hi everyone, I’m just starting this calendar today and so far so good! Can’t wait to see if I make it the whole month! Good lucky everyone!
(174cm tall, 72kg girly looking to lose some flab and become a more energetic version of myself!) 🙂
I’ve always been a couch potato. When I was younger, I was in dance and much more active, but in the past years, I’ve just stopped physical activity (because I just couldn’t be bothered or didn’t have time for it). As a senior in high school now, (I have senior portraits in just two weeks, and I want to get in better shape for it) , I’m starting to pay more attention to my body. I’ve lost my flat stomach and I really want to get it back. I’m optimistic that BlogPilates will help me on my way to find my ideal body shape again and also help me maintain my fitness! For everyone out there, I wish you the best of luck! 🙂 We can do it!!
Hey Cassey! I am on day 8 of the beginner’s workout and I am a bit worried because I can’t do the roll-ups anymore. On day 1 I could do them easily, and now I can’t get up anymore. Is this normal or is it something that I do wrong? I feel like I am not getting stronger 🙁
Hi, I’m doing the beginner calendar for the second time now!
It happened to me as well when you start of your muscles get sore
Don’t worry your still getting stronger, it’s actually a good sign!
xxx jannie
Hey– do the videos work out our obliques at all?? thanks!
I’m not sure, but if they do it probably isn’t much. I recommend Cassey’s Muffin Top Massacre video, it’s not to difficult, and I’ve only done it two days and already feel new muscle in my waist/obliques!
Hi^^
My Name is Barbara, and I want to Start this whole story! But I Need somebody to do this with me. Do you want to Start with me. Im an 14 Year Old girl from germany and weigh 121 Ibs (55kg). I want to lose so weigh!
Love Babs..
Hi i want to start this workout to i’ll do it with you !
i’m Nessa from Canada, 20years old i’m 87kg I really need to loose weight
Hi, I’ll start my journey today!
I am 22 and also weigh around 87kg. Going to start day 1 now 🙂
How is it going so far for you?
Hey Barbara,
Ich heiße Nassira und lebe auch in Deutschland und möchte auch damit anfangen und bin auch 14 🙂 Allerdings muss ich viel mehr abnehmen als du weil 55 kg eigentlich Idealgewicht ist 😀
Hi Barbara!
I am Jam from the Philippines and I’m on Day 20 of the Beginners calendar. Just keep doing the daily exercise and don’t give up. As Cassey quoted, “Train Insane or remain the same”. Don’t worry if there are days you don’t feel like doing any exercise at all, just watch what you eat and you’ll be okay! 🙂
BTW, read some comments here because some of them really helps in the journey to fitness 😀
I’m 18 (weight: 180lbs) and I started this last summer but because of travels and festivals I had to pause it – but I never came back!
I have decided that I want to start again because it just gave me more energy, I had fun and it just made me happy! I have like many others tried other exercise classes but they just didn’t give me the same results! I remember feeling better about myself and I was just glowing! But THIS TIME I’m gonna keep to it and start again! It’s hard – yes – but it’s just worth it in the end!!
Lots of love to all of you who are starting! ♥
– Kira
Just finished day 3, so far so good! I’ve been feeling very out of shape lately, and this calendar is already starting to motivate me towards a healthy lifestyle. So excited to see where Cassie’s videos will take me!
Almost done with week 2! I’m 14 and I started out 20 pounds overweight, my bmi index was 27,that over average and kinda high! Now I’m already down to a bmi index of 26 weighing only 10 pounds overweight and I’m eating healthier but I’m not doing Casey’s meal plan because for my age it could be taken to extremes so I’m just eating what a normal healthy teen would eat!
Hi! I think I am overweight too and just started this program. Can I ask you what you usually eat? :)))
I just started this today, and I’m excited! My only question is if there is any special equipment needed for this beginner’s calendar (bands, etc…).
No equipment. There’s a video where you she uses a band to pull her leg but you can use a towel, a scarf or whatever.. Good luck!
Hey Cassey! So I’m almost 13 and I decided I’m going to take my eating and fitness seriously. But I don’t know where to start. I’m about 5 pounds overweight for my size. so I’m hoping this will help me 🙂 I’m hoping to get my friend to do it with me. We both want to start being healthier. STARTING THIS TODAY!!
Hey, Leigh!
I’m 15 years old and started my fitness journey when I was about you age going into 14 and since you are still very young and developing, I encourage you not to diet but to eat clean instead.
I’m glad people are starting to get into this lifestyle change at younger ages and as always, determination is key.
Welcome to your new life! You have all of the Popsters’ support!
We should help each other!
You can do it!
Yaaaaay !!:)
Started this today 🙂
I am a 17 year old girl who just hit 200 pounds. Although I don’t really look that heavy, I am, and I am seriously out of shape. I tried Day 1 of the Beginner’s Calender and I’m going to be honest: It was too hard for me. Cassey is extremely motivating and a good teacher but I think I need to start out with something a little easier than pilates. I hope to try this exercise plan in the future, but for now, it’s not for me.
I tried this last year and it worked but I thought the same way that it was too hard for me and I decided to ditch it….I tried every other type of exercise video possible and NOTHING Gave me results like this did now I am in the same boat as you 17 and just hit 200 pounds and I’m back here and I saw this and figured I should let you know! Also follow her diet schedule too!!
Try this calendar, all of us are struggling at the beginning but it’s worth it!
If you really will feel demotivated and not strong enough then maybe yoga? On youtube there’s a lot of beginners’ videos. May not be as fast as pilates but I’ve felt a bit stronger after yoga.
Please do come back soon! Trust me even for a girl that was already into exercising I found this as difficult, but keep going and you WILL get so much stronger and so much more determined. I completed the calendar in june-July last year and even from the first week you feel the improvements and by the end you can see it! If the monthly calendar is too hard afterwards, continue doing these videos and slowly work your way up. Every minute that you do will contribute to your health and fitness. 🙂 Don’t give up and try your hardest, you’ll do so good.
Hi I am 19 yrs old and weigh 240 labs I have tried this before but the lack of companionship made me quit, I should not have because I must do this for myself. I have struggled with my weight all my life and am determined to do something about it. I am 5′ .5″in which means about half my body is fat and I can’t keep living this way. I will succeed, l must!
Hi everyone.
I´ve just downloaded the app and paid 0,89€ (received the confirmation email) but I still don’t have access to the videos on the app. Is there something more I have to do?
Hugs&Kisses
Almost done with week 2! Yeah me!
ME too!!!
Starting this TODAY!!
Just finished Day 3. So happy because I’m feeling and seeing results already. Can’t wait for tomorrow’s workout. I really want to finish the Beginner’s Calendar so I can go and do the monthly ones. 🙂
Feeling good.
Week 1 DONE!! So happy with myself! Baby steps,I’ll get there !I’m really confident!
I found out about Cassey’s blog via Youtube. I was watching a Youtubers video and she mentioned her. A little whilte later I stumbled onto Cassey’s channel which made me very happy! She had such positive attitude and her videos are so fun to watch. I just printed out my July calender even though I’m a few days behind. I will try out as much as I can to prepare myself and officially start the beginners calender in August. I cant wait! Though I have a question. The first workout each day is lightlighted which means I do this in the morning. Can I decide when I do the other exercies or do I need to do them all after one another? If the second statement is the answer Im not sure how I can do them as I have to get up at 5 am each day for work and dont reallly want to get up even earlier to do the exercises. Sleep is healthy too you know 🙂
Thank you Cassey for your positive attitude!
Hey I was wondering do I just start from the beginning or do I just start at the day I am at?
Just start at the beginning! 😉
Man! I hate day 10! The reason why I stopped the first time. But I’m gonna try to conquer it the second time! muahahaha! XD
I am 22, 5’3 and weight 139 pounds. Should I do these workouts in combination with cardio?
Just complete the first workout with only a little resistance from my legs on the leg triangles.
Can’t wait for day 2!
I did this calendar until day 7, My abs and my butt getting tone but my arms getting bigger. Anyone knows why ?
It’s awesome that you’re seeing results! As for your arms, I think it’s growing because you are toning the muscles underneath the arm fat. If you want sculpted arms, usually cardio helps burn fat so you can see those hard earned muscles.
Hey! This is so genius! I can´t wait to try it. I hope it can help me. I´m not fat, but I have not muscles so I decided change it with you. Thank you so much.
PS: Sorry for my bad english…I´m from Czech republic in Europe… lol
Hello Cassey, i have a Problem with your blogilates App.:
Since today i have your App. Also installed on my New iPad. Now it tells me
That i have to purchase the beginners calendar Again although i have it
Already purchased since 14 days on my iPhone App!
Please Help me with that Problem! Thanks!
YES! so i finally started doing the beginner’s workout calendar (again) since i was delayed in the previous month, and i can say that i’m definitely more determined to finish it this time! the only thing is, i also want to do the other Blogilates videos, too, so probably like the inner thigh workout, belly toning, and body slimming videos that Cassey has. so, i’m just confused how i incorporate those workouts to the Beginner’s Calendar. i would greatly appreciate an answer!
Thanks POPsters!
I would just add them into whichever body group the day is working (i.e., if it’s an abs day, add in the belly toning video). That way you are still giving your muscle groups rest on the same days.
Hey everybody just found this little slice of heaven and I ready to give it a try. Beginner as of today and I even downloaded the app to keep me motivated on in task.
Hey! So I’ve just finished day 2 of this calendar, and I’m really loving it so far. But I was wondering, should I be doing extra cardio on top of this? I’m not overweight at all but I’d like to loose about 5 – 10lbs – is this calendar more for toning up than actual weight loss? Thanks in advance for any advice! (:
I think you will mostly tone up your body. However there is a lot of people who lost also weight by doing this calendar. It all depends on your activity level, eating habits etc…. But if you have time, sure you can do cardio! The more the better! Just be sure you don’t hurt your body and eat healthy!
Hello Cassey, I’m from Belgium(now France) !
First, sorry for my bad english !
I just want to thank you, because, I begin a new diet ( the 2143687354 diet of my life ), and with you I have enought motivation to do it with your workouts !
Sometimes I don’t have this motivation but I remember how your video are nice and I did them.
It’s the second time I do this Begginers, cause I wanna try July calendar but, my god, I know I can’t do it !
I want to do this right before an hard calendar.
And today I did ABC abs and wow, first time I can did it!
But I change a little I put my feet on the ground. I prefer more easy and do it than hard and can’t really do it…
( Raah this english ^^”)
So I just want to say , I feel better since I begin this, and hope to be better later!
Thank you Cassey !
I hope I can work august calendar !
Hey everyone! Just joined today and this looks like where I need to start at! Glad I found this coz the July calender was looking a little scary lol. I am working on toning up and still losing a few lbs. Kind of afraid of being too small, but if I do everything my body actually needs, I’ll just have to buck up and learn to love me small huh. I love pilates and Cassey is motivating, especially with clean eating!
Hi all! I have a kinda stupid question: I really want to do this calender and I’m super hyped about it! so my question is how do I do the workouts for every day – one after another like it says or trough out the day? I mean do I do them at once or I have to seperate them trough out the day? LOL sorry 😀
Usually the videos add up to an hour ish, so if you just do them all at once it’ll work. Also it helps to keep motivation high if you do them all at one time of day! 🙂
Thanks! I’m starting today! Wish me luck LOL
Hey! I wanted to know what kind of meal plan do i need to do during that month. I’m really new at this, but just taking a look at the videos and the website, it really has encouraged me to start getting fit! I’m so excited.
Thanks, Ander:3
Cassey has a mealplan here somewhere, i recommend using that one, otherwise consult a specialist
Hiiiii I’m starting and i wanted to know if anyone has done it before and could tell the results of it ? I wanna do this + 400abs per day… do you think it’s good ?
Thanks for answering,
xxxxx
I’m on day 24 and so far I can definitely say my abs and my butt are more toned 🙂
after one week i saw a very significant amount of progress. my stomach was so much more toned and it was only a week, and my butt got lifted! try it out, it’ll work wonders haha 🙂
I’m only on day 5 and I can just feel myself becoming more toned. It hurts so good! haha
hi loves,
i’ve been doing this calendar up to day 20, on that day i stood up after my workout and i saw like these black points that you see before you pass out (hope you know what i mean). i worked out in the morning, had cereals and a banana for breakfast. ever since that i’m scared to work out because it was just a scary experience. do you guys have any idea what i did wrong or what i could do to prevent it from happening?
thank you x
Hi Sophia!! I have had very similar things happen to me! I see black spots every so often after I work out. For me, part of it was my health. I have naturally low blood sugar, and I have some breathing problems. You might want to get checked out to see if you are the same way. I always just make sure to have enough sugar in my body before working out, and I always try to breathe from my stomach, instead of from my chest. If you have the black spots again, just lay down with your feet above your head to get your body back to normal! Hope this helps!
I think you probably stood/sat up too suddenly, so your body had trouble adjusting to the new position so fast. Dehydration might also be an issue. It happens to me a lot. Just take things slow and hydrate yourself a lot throughout the day, and take breaks if you’re feeling faint.
How much weight will I lose after following this calendar? Thanks
It all depends on how much you eat and the quality of the food. Additional exercise could help a lot too!
I’m thinking of starting this soon but I’m not sure if I should because I don’t want to lose a lot of weight. I’m 15 and I weigh 117 pounds and I’m 5’3. People tell me that I don’t need to lose weight and I don’t want to. I just want to strengthen my body. Should I use this?
in in the same boat (15 too) ive been doing this for 3 weeks so i guess i cant speck for in the long run but i have personally found this really helpful for getting stronger, most of the exercises are aimed to build mussel and strength. I would highly recommend doing it. i love blogilates so much its so motivating!
This will help you lose fat and build up muscle! I finished this calender and I actually gained three pounds from muscle but I actually look a lot slimmer and toned. And of course, I feel healthier which is all that matters! Best decision I ever made.
You’ll probably lose fat and gain muscle. This will definitely make your body stronger.
This calendar really helps for consistency, thanks! It’s much easier to attain fitness goals when you have realistic and concrete steps to follow.
New to the website and so exited to lose weight and feel active
Onto week 3 already – but finding some issues that I can’t stay balanced standing on one leg… any advice?
For help with balance, you can focus your eyesight on one point. For example, if I stare at a knob on my piano while balancing on one foot, I find it’s easier than when my eyes wander.
hey does anyone know what meal plan goes with this calendar?
Hey girls!
I’m really new to blogilates, I started the beginner’s calendar last week and I do enjoy it a lot! I just find quite hard to stay motivated ( I’m the kind of person that gets bored of things way too quickly!) I was wondering, besides the videos how much other exercise do you do? like how many times per week? I always tend to do amazing the first week ( regular on the videos, running almost every day, eating clean..) and then I slowly start giving up on it :/ I’m not fat but my legs, although they are quite tone, are kind of wrapped in this soft layer that protects them from the cold and really doesn’t want to go away ^^’ Any advise about the kind of exercise I should actually start doing? So far I’ve been following the workout calendar and running or walking around 1 hour every day, but I’ve been struggling with that fat and cellulite for years and it never seem to go away!
So Cassey, HELP! ahahahahha
Thanks so much for any tips or advice from any of you! You guys are great!
Do I do these videos once a day or more times?
Do these videos once a day, because they should be around an hour long, no need for more.
HI everyone! I just started the beginner workout calendar. My first couple of days was great and I felt so energized afterwards. But now after each video, I tend to feel extremely nauseas and feel exhausted after each workout. I’m making sure I’m drinking a lot of water during and after, but I have been feeling so nauseas afterwards that I’m not sure what to do. Does anyone else feel this way or does anyone have any suggestions on how I can solve this problem? Thanks so much!
eat something an hour before hand. After I drink my green protein drink.
try not drink too much water during workouts, it may be the cause of your nausea
Do you complete the beginners calendar using the you tube videos and then once you’ve done the 4 weeks do you buy the DVDs? When do you use the DVDs? I’m excited to start this! I hope someone can help explain when to use DVDs vs the you tube videos 🙂
Thank you,
Danielle
I’ve always been unhappy with my weight – I always used to start exercise but struggle, so when I was diagnosed with asthma it got a whole lot easier and I started using your website. I kinda believe that you need to build up your inner strength before blasting it out on a treadmill and I love how you introduce cardio in slowly but surely. I started your videos back in April when I had a break from university but had a lot of hard work to do in May. Now I’m back again in June and I’m still 10lb lighter (from 127lb to 117lb) – I feel like you’ve completely changed my metabolism! There’s still a way to go, but I feel like there’s hope now. Thanks 🙂
I just started day 1 today. I have been doing your videos for a while but I got lazy and stopped working out. But I’m back at it again! I love working out with you!
day 25 done! I feel so much better than during the first days of this challenge.
Does this beginners calendar help you loose weight? If so, how much do you usually loose?
I lost 10lb in the first week
i am very happy to join the website .my dream that have a beatuiful body .but i afraid to miss a day in the calender . what should i do in this case?
How much weight can i lose if i follow the calender and eat1400 calories a day
How much weight do you think i will lose if i follow the calender and eat 1400 calories a day?
Hi I’m 15 and I’m thinking of starting this calendar on Monday but I have a question… So like– I get sore easily and my dad says that I should rest my body everytime I get sore because when I rest that’s what actually makes the muscle grow. On the calendar I only see one rest day per week… If you are really sore in the middle of the week can you take a break or is that frowned upon…?
I think it should be alright 🙂 If you look at the calender, you’ll notice that exercises that target a specific area, like your calves, abs, arms, etc, rarely appear again during the same week. If so, there’s a couple of days between them, so your body will have time to rest and build muscles. Although I am by no means an expert, I think it’s better to move around a little bit when you’re sore. My calves hurt horribly for 3-4 days after a workout (couldn’t walk properly during the first two days, the last two it looked very awkward), but they actually felt better the more I walked. Though, I don’t know if I would recommend doing an intense workout if it’s REALLY sore…it’s easy to overexert yourself and you might end up damaging your body if you’re not fit and try to do more than you should. Just trust your own judgement and listen to your body and I’m sure it’ll be fine 🙂
Thank you Emma ! (:
So I’m not new to the fitness thing. I do a lot of HIIT and circuit training as well as weight training. However, I SUCK at pilates or yoga and I really want to work on my core. Should I start out doing the 4 week beginners program and if it seems like I got it down, move on?
I’d do that. Watch your form too. I know I am not going to be able to do four videos at once. So I do one or two from different days.
Thanks for finally writing about >POP Pilates for Beginners Calendar!
<Loved it!
Hey Cassey!
I’m from Germany and only a beginner but already so happy that I found you.
Unfortunately I can’t afford to go in a fitness centre and I am so glad and thankful that now I can do my workouts for FREE!
Your videos are so rich in variety and you’re so sweet 🙂
So, please Cassey keep up the good work! You are a great mentor <3
Hey everyone! I was wondering, after each workout, am I supposed to do some cardio everyday? I’m trying to tone and lose weight, so, help please? 🙂
You can do cardio before or after your workouts! Some of the days will include cardio routines, but when I started I also ran 20 minutes every other day. Make sure if you do pair the videos with cardio that you don’t overexert yourself. You want to be tired to get a good workout, but you also don’t want to potentially injure yourself! I’m not expert, but it would probably be a good idea to start with doing additional cardio every other day to give your legs a rest. Cassie says in a lot of her videos that the pilates will help you tone your muscles, but cardio will help you shave the fat off. That and a healthy diet. Good luck on starting the calander!
I am jus about to start the Beginner’s Calendar, and I was just wondering since I’m only almost fourteen years old (so I’m no pro at all of this), can I ever treat myself, or is there some kind of strict meal plan that I absolutely MUST follow? I’m starting tomorrow so please reply asap! (:
Thank you!
Of course you can treat yourself! I am not on a strict meal plan. I eat healthy when I can but if I fancy some chocolate or something I have some and whenever I got out with friends and for meals and stuff like that I eat whatever I want for a treat. 🙂
Oh yay!!! What a relief!! Thanks for the info, I needed to learn that too.
It’s actually a great and useful piece of info. I’m satisfied
that you simply shared this helpful information with us.
Please stay us up to date like this. Thanks for sharing.
Cassey,
I was wondering if there is any lifting I could be doing with this workout plan? If so, what and when should I do it?
Sorry if this question is too much. I really hope you will see this!
Thank you so much!
#BEASTMODE
I love the dance at the beginning of the Saddlebag shaver <33 I do it all the time! I have seen a major improvement in my body! My main goal hasn't been to loose weight, but to improve how I look. I am staying away from numbers because I am over a month into recovery from anorexia nervosa. Once I was released from the hospital and had regained lost weight and muscle, and my organs (such as my heart) were functioning normally again, I was feeling icky about my body because much muscle still had to be rebuilt. So my goal became to regain the muscle and get fit! Being active in Pilates and other activities has improved my self esteem and has made me feel reborn! Today is my rest day (day 14), and I was so upset when I read on the beginners calendar that it was a rest day… so I went over to June's calendar and did the workout of the day on there! Haha. Thank you so much Cassey and thank you to the blogilates community! Both Cassey and the amazing group of individuals have inspired and motivated me so much!
Hey the calendar is nt clear to me please print out a clear calendar so tht i could see nd get strted thnk u
For the reason that the admin of this web page is working, no doubt very rapidly it will be famous, due to its
quality contents.
Hey! I started this beginner workout 5 days ago and I was wondering if by doing this workout calendar, will I lose weight? I hate my figure and I would love to lose weight, that’s why I started this beginner calendar and also because Cassey is my idol! =)
Thank you 🙂
Hey Cassey! I i’ve don’t your beginner calender for a month.., Thank so much, doing this work out in the day has really helped me to sleep thought the night. I haven’t been able to for a long time. i do plane to keep working out…. But i was wondering how many months do you recommend doing the beginner calender….
I struggle with anything to the knee….. although my knee pain me i fight thought it. Some one crashed into me on a bike before so their are time is act up… I did your 1june shread it video this morning. brilliant but it nearly killed me should i go back and do another month of the beginner calender or still with the june! Thank you
Hey Cassey! I am REALLY wanting to start the beginner calendar workout schedule tomorrow and was wondering how many months do you recommend doing this schedule before moving on to more advanced workouts for someone like me that has weak knees and elbows? That’s what my problem is every time I do try to get into working out on a regular basis. My flexibility isn’t the greatest right now either, but hopefully that will improve. Please let me know what you think! Thanks!!!
Your knees and elbows will become much stronger while doing this calendar. I myself had really bad wrists and elbows as well (I had a bad elbow injury, like it was twisted, sprained and broken at once, crazy stuff) and after 4 weeks I remember it got much better!
If after that calendar you will still feel kinda weak in those areas you may want to just do normal calendars but at your peace, not rushing much.. If you will really feel like you need to get more stronger then you can do this calendar one more time.
Just one thing: don’t ask about months when you didn’t even begin. really. there’s a big difference between “I have just 4 weeks” and “I have 8 weeks”. Start doing this and after you end then see 🙂
I have a question for you Cassy. What time of the day are you supposed to do the workoutss? Can i do it after school or something or do I have to do before school? Please answer me. I´m planning to start tomorrow, but i need answer as quikley as possible.
Thank You <3
it doesn’t matter when you workout. whenever you can fit in the time to do it-do it! 🙂 as long as you get a workout in, you are one step closer to your goal!
One more week to go–I can’t believe it!! If you are just starting out on the beginner’s calendar, stick with it!! You will see results if you are consistent 🙂 I am so impressed with my increased flexibility and muscle definition AND I actually look forward to my workouts now! Thanks so much Cassey!!
Thanks so much for having this out there! I’ve been wanting to start doing your workouts for the past two weeks, but I felt as if I had to wait for June 1st to really get started. I’ve just discovered this, and instead of starting on the first of June, I’m going to start a day early (because I’m unique). Thanks for having all these resources out there! I’m ready to become a better me. 🙂
Pretty! This was an incredibly wonderful post. Thanks for supplying this info.
Hey guys! Started working out everyday I do a video everyday from the beginners work out. Just curious after these are finished which ones do you do next and what do you eat while trying to lose weight. I am mainly working on my stomach fat
Hello!
What should I do if I cant work out one day? I dont have time or im travelling etc. Should I do 2 workouts in one day or?
Thank you!
Hey Holly
– I don’t what the right thing to do is, however if I don’t manage to the workout on the exact date I just do it the next day and then push the schedule a day forward. I don’t see it as a big problem because it is your goal to become fit and you don’t have keep up with anyone else than yourself. The workout should be fit into your lifestyle, so i can become a natural thing to do. But that’s just my opinion 🙂
Hi! I was wondering if this would work for a person who has scoliosis. I am planning to start this although I don’t know what it may do to my back. It might make it worse or something. I really want to try this since I have seen great results but that’s just my problem. Can you please reply if it’s okay or not? Thank you so much!! 🙂
Hey,
I suffer from scheuermann’s disease, very similar to scoliosis and I find Pilates really helpful in relation to pain management and stuff like that so you should be fine. Just avoid any jumping that could knock your back from being stable and if you are in pain at any point from doing a certain move just skip that move. I can do basically everything apart from things that include rolling on my back like neck stands and stuff like that.
Hope this helps!
I came across this site yesterday and thought it looked great for keeping fit etc, I also thought that the beginner’s workout calender looked fun. I am quite self – conscious about the way I look and I want to have a healthier lifestyle. Do you think that this work might be too advanced for me as I am a 12 year old girl?
Go for it, girl! I don’t think there’s anything wrong with wanting to do exercise at 12 years old. I WISH i had that same mentality when I was your age 13 years ago. I’m just now whipping myself into shape. Do this for you and be confident that you are creating healthy lifestyle habits that will stick for the rest of your life!
Hi everybody
I am going to use the calender from today. however I am really busy but I am going to wake up earlier to have time for some workout. /my question is that it is okay to start the day with workout? because I have heard that this might make the sugar blood to go very low. I actually don’t want to lose weight I just want to shape my body because after pregnancy my body is completely destroyed!
Good luck with everyone!
Hi,
i heard it too but i zhink it’s still better to exercise in the morning than never 🙂 But when i did those workouts in the morning i needed really long stretching before and after exercises, be careful about that. I just finished the beginner’s calendar and i feel totally ready for the monthly calendars 🙂
good luck and enjoy as I do 🙂
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bVfb-_Pr5Bw
Look at this 🙂
Hi. I came across this site two days ago looking for a fun way to get in shape and saw the Beginners Workout Calendar and started yesterday. I’m also planning on starting the meal plan but that will have to wait until we go shopping for more food. Anyway, I wanted to ask a question. When I did the video yesterday and we were in that tabletop position and raised our shoulders, my abs felt it but not as much as my lower back. I’ve always had this issue which is one of the reasons I don’t do sit ups, it just hurts like hell. I’ve had people show me how these things are done so I don’t do something wrong and I can do a few just fine but I always end up feeling pain in my back before I feel anything in my abs. Any suggestions? I’m probably doing something wrong, just frustrating not knowing what.
Me and my boyfriend are going away to Amsterday next month for our first holiday away together in nearly 9 years and I want to look really nice (as nice as can get in a month). I’m planning on doing the calendar, eat by the meal planner and use my crosstrainer. Do you guys think I or anyone else, will notice a difference by then?
Thanks.
Hey, I am just starting pilates and was wondering if someone could answer my question. I am more looking to shed a few pounds then tone my body. Is pilates just for toning or will it help me lose weight. I’m not only doing the pilates Im also doing cardio. If someone could answer this or has some tips that would be great!
I find that dong pilates with cardio does help me lose weight! Also pilates does tone, but as you build muscles, you lose weight as muscles help with that. 🙂
hey I was wondering if there is any age this would not be recommended to. I am 15 and I’d like to try this, but I don’t know if I might be too young and that it might be too hard for me or something. I have a condition of endurance that is equal to nothing, so is it maybe aimed too high to start this?
If it is, does anyone know what would be a good thing for me to start?
*a condition and endurance, sorry. 🙂
You can workout at any age. Start where you’re comfortable. If you get tired it’s ok to stop. The more you do it the better you’ll get. Have patience, but if you stay dedicated you’ll start to see the health benefits and you’ll love living a healthier lifestyle. Everyone here started somewhere!
I’m gone to tell my little brother, that he should also go to see this website on regular basis to obtain updated from
newest news.
I love this. I’m only on week 1, have been sore the whole time. XD But the worst thing was when I laughed at a joke Cassey made and ended up pulling a muscle in my chest, omg. I smile and laugh through all her videos – secret ab workout in every single one 😛
Also I am gaining weight, not losing it XD but that is because my muscles are coming back, woo!
the day 1 video is not working, please rectify the problem.
Hey guys so Im starting this!! i am tired of making excuses i have to get off my but and start someday and that day is today!!.. my only question is…. is there an specific menu you need to do i n order to lose weight? besides eating healthy i know that’s obvious but is there anything specific i need to eat??? please respond!!
Hi Rocio!
I definitely know how you feel, I started my journey yesterday! If you really want a good eating plan, Cassey/blogilates has a meal plan. But I think you have to buy one of the fit journals to get it, it’s I think a 12 week plan. It’s a really nice plan I’m trying it myself! I would love to say I’ve gotten success, but it’s only day two! Lol. 🙂 Hope this helps, if you need more help let me know!
I started the Beginners’ Workout yesterday to go alongside a Pilates class that I’m doing weekly. Did anybody else find it a struggle from the beginning? I was OK with the first day but today’s ABC Abs was almost impossible! I’d say that I’m pretty fit but I have MS so have had to stop kidding myself that I’ll be able to do a lot of the exercises I used to but would really like to improve my core strength because it’ll help in so many ways. I’m going to carry on with it because I really like these videos and the way they’re presented but wanted to know if I’m the only one who’s struggling?!
Hi Bex!
I also have been doing the Beginner’s Calendar and I’m up to day 6 and it’s still crazy!
I take rests in between exercises when I feel like I’m really pushing my limit. I try not to force myself to keep up with Casey’s pace, although I push my hardest to really get those exercises working on my body. Some videos really get me huffing and puffing but my aim is to finish them as best as I can. So you’re not alone there, girl!
P.S. ABC Abs was one of the hardest videos for me too!
Thanks so much for your reply, so good to know I’m not alone! I’m starting to find muscles that I’d forgotten about although they are complaining about being found at the moment! I will carry on trying, when I can do the ABC Abs I’ll know that I’ve won…
Thanks again, we can do this! xxx
I’m currently on day 22, and I can say ABC abs is still hard, but it does get better! 22 days down the line and I can already feel progress, and it is so worthwhile! Keep on going and it will get easier 🙂
Hi Cassey
I had a baby a few months ago and started the beginners workout after i got rid of diastasis. Do u have any recommendations to prevents recurrence of diastasis?
This calendar has been going GREAT for me *weightloss around 3-4 kg, toned, strength improved), but sadly, now workouts are being BLOCKED by GEMA because I’m in Germany. What am I going to do now?
Its actually even more sad than that, because often the problem I have with the video is that I can barely hear the music anyway 🙁
A BIG roadblock here…
Hey,
I’m from Germany too, so I know the problem. Stupid GEMA! -.-
But you can use a Proxy so youtube doesn’t know what country you are from and then you can watch it =)
I use Hidemyass. Just google it: youtube hidemyass
Good luck!
I finished week 3 now with a great feeling, Cassey! I just feel how my body really gets strong through all the weeks and how fit I become! <3 This is the best workout and it helped me really much!^^ Ofc, I'll continue in week 4 and I'll go on this way of my journey! 😀
Hi,
I am slim and fit otherwise but I have this big tummy pouch which I got after 2 consecutive pregnancies. Is there any exercise or routine you recommend to make it flat.
Thanks in advance
Hey guys! Has anyone lost any weight during this?
Hey I need help!! I am signed up to the newsletter but I didn’t get the email this month with the password or the calendar!? would it be an good unsubscribing and then doing it again?
its bodypop :)))
Hi!
I just want to say that these workout videos are really good! And all of the “before and after” stories inspire me to get myself in shape and get a better health.
In my whole childhood I was overweight and bullied. When I was 11 I lost over 18 kg and got a bit more confidance, but…after a couple of monthes after I lost all the weight I got a heart problem that made me scared to train more (still a bit scared, but I have medicin for my heart problem now). So for 11 years (I’m 22 now) I’ve had a slim yet “flabby” body.
But now I want to feel beautiful, inside and out. I just want to thank you all for being such inspiration! <3
Jessica from Sweden
Hello, I am going to begin the calendar, but I wonder how to do it? Should I do all the activities in the morning before the breakfast? Or I can finish them in different time of a day?
Did day 12 and iT feels so good. I feel so energized and healthy! Cassie you’re my insperation. xxx loves from Holland
Hi guys! I am currently in day 20 and i’m wondering, what calendar month should I next? Im afraid if I do the may calendar next it would be too hard for me. :/ please suggest me a month calendar that’s not very tough. Thanks! 🙂
Hi,
my friend said me, she did the april calendar after this one and it was awful for her. So she started again this Beginner’s and she adds some videos by herself 🙂 I will try the May calendar and if it’s too hard i’ll do the same as my friend 🙂 i think that’s good idea 🙂 Or you can do the beginner’s calendar from the beginnig but do each videos two times or three times.. 🙂
Hey Athea, I actually have the same question. If no one has any suggestions, I’ll probably just look over all the different options, then select the one that seems the best for my body type/body parts I want to focus on 🙂
…hopefully someone will pull through with a suggestion though, hahaha
I was sooo tempted to do tomarrows workout, so I did ABC Abs, BIKINI BURNOUT,
2012 MUSIC MASHUP and NOT GETTING BACK TOGETHER WORKOUT!
I hurt so bad, but I was so proud of myself that I did all that in one day! I looked better too, but maybe
that was me….Thanks Cassie, you’re my favorite person in the word!
Laura, 12
Hello..I just started the day 1 and I can feel it…
My friends surrounded are look down on me..
This time I will let them know I’m changing!!!
Keep going!!!!
excited and is looking for the day 2 🙂
I was wondering what kind equipment is needed for these work outs. Thanks! 🙂
You don’t need anything just your body!
It would be handy to have a Yoga matt or a towel to put down so you aren’t on a hard floor!
i’m only at week 2, but at some days, such as day 11 she also advices to grab some weights (Though, it can also be books or something like that) but it’s not that often 🙂
Finished the beginners calendar for the first time 😀 Today I wanted to start with the ah-MAY-zing one, but wow. That’s a waaaaaay higher level than this calendar.. I felt like going from level 1 tot level 10 at once! So I quit. I guess I’m going to do the beginners calendar again and add some other videos to make it harder for myself. I hope that I’ll be able to proceed to the monthly calendars after I finish the beginners one again.
I totally agree with you B. I’m not a complete beginner to pilates but O.M.G! After a few days of attempting the May calendar, I’m going to switch to the beginners for the rest of the month. IDK, the moves, plus the length… I’m not ready. Hoping to be one day though!
That’s awesome! I’m still in my day 5 and took two break days (woops I guess I need to skip the upcoming rest day). Although, I think you should simply go with the calendar now! I mean, the beginner’s calendar was difficult at first, but you got here! Now, just go up for a new challenge, and just keep on moving! 😉 Repeating it again may result to plateau, but do whatever makes you happy! 🙂 Congrats on finishing it!
So I starded the “Beginners Calandar” and I am wondering how I am going to keep this up with my studies…. Maybe some o you guys have any tips for me?
Tomorrow is going to be my day 4, I have searched for a good quote to get me motivated and this was the perfect quote:
“When you feel like QUITTING, think about why you STARDED”
Thanks 🙂
Do it during your free time! I think it’s difficult to squeeze them up all at once, so do one video per free time you have, until you’re done! I always study during night time, and it’s just a habit of mine. I would do it after I come home from school, and study! Except when I have upcoming exams, I might do one video or two than finishing the whole thing. 🙂
I just wanted to know if doing these exercises can help me get abs?
Im not trying to loose weight, i dont need to. I’m just trying to stay healthy.
But i am aiming for abs so i wanted to know if these exercises can get me abs.
Please let me know.
Hi, I’m looking to start this but have a few questions. First: at least a couple of times it says to start with a one minute plank. At the moment my best is about 45 seconds. Should I just do it as long as I can or do two 30 second ones? Second: some of the morning exercises are unfamiliar to me. Is there a good place to look to find out what those are and how to do them?
Thanks for your help!
In one of the earlier vids Cassie shows some variations to the plank. You can start by doing them on your knees and elbows. I personally also find it easier to do on hands and toes than it is on elbows and toes.
Also I just google the exercises and look at youtube/google images. Most of them will already have come up in some video or another though.
Done!… 1st day of my own may-challenge!
It “hurt” me on muscles i have forgotten i had during my “3 pregnancies in a row”
Can ´t wait to be tomorrow!
(Really hard to write in english when my iphone is constantly autocorrect me in french 😉 )
Stupid question: do I do everything listed under the day or choose a workout to do?
Not a stupid question! You do everything listed in the day.
Everything listed under the day 🙂
You are supposed to do all videos :-))
Btw: There are no stupid questions, just stupid answers 😉
I just finished Day 1 of the beginners workout calendar..I’m so excited for this month! I’m 23 years old and just had my first baby 6 months ago. I’m finishing my senior year in college and am sooo glad that I found these workouts!! I love that I can just do them at home whenever my son is sleeping and homework is done 🙂 very convenient for me. Ready to get back to my healthy body..good luck to everyone!!
I’ve been doing random blogilates workouts for months off and on… but I finally decided to get onboard with regular training. Just finished the first workout, feeling great:D
Do you need any equipment besides a mat to complete this calendar? I want to know so that half way through a workout… “Oh, you need that weight thingymabob? I guess I’m done…”
Nope! All you need is a mat 🙂 in one or two of the videos it asks for something else (weights or a strap) but she tells you common household items you can use to replace them! I had no issues getting through the calendar as far as equipment goes.
Thank you Victoria for your quick reply! I really appreciate your helpfulness! So nice! *\(^_^)/*
I’m a real newbie when it comes to this but I’m loving it!. I really regret not doing it before. To be honest I never knew there was a ‘beginners calendar’ so when I first found your videos I tried to keep up with your regular videos and those were to hard so I just gave up!
Starting beginners calendar once again. Regular workout calendar is still too much for me 🙁 I will try to add some videos or exercises so that it won’t be too easy 😉 And I will try to do all the exercises without any modifications that make them easier 🙂
That’s a great plan! i know you can do it!!! Philippians 4:13 I can do all things through Christ who gives me strength!
Thank you very much for your encouragement Paloma! <3
Hi! Well… I know Blogilates since many years ago because of my sister’s hard work. But today I finally decided to move on to a better life, I can’t continue to have such a bad fitness, I will try my hardest to complete one month of working out, it will be difficoult but I know I can, I have to! 😀 thanks for the support Cassey
*Sorry for my not too good english
Go Lina! you can do it!!! Philippians 4:13 “I can do all things through Christ who gives me strength.”
You go girl! Good luck 😀
Hello Guys!
I’m on my day 20, and I’ve already lost about 3 kg (sorry, I’m from Poland, I don’t know how much does it make in pounds). I gave up sweets (except during weekends) and I don’t use the lifts, I also jog 4 times a week (30 minutes, but I alternate jogging with marching). I’m quite happy with my results, but I’m not sure I’m doing it all well. I mean, I’m burning as hell during the workout, but I’m not sore at all the next day. Is it normal? I’m a REAL beginner, so I thought I’d be sore as never before, but no… Plus, I definitely feel a bit stronger, but I don’t think I’m strong enough to start the may calendar in 10 days! I saw the april one, and boy is it tough! Do you guys think, maybe doing this beginners calendar (with some more exercises added) twice is a good idea? Or should I go off the deep end and give it a go? Sorry for my English 🙂
Hej Jola!
Aktualnie kończę plan dla początkujących, ale przyjrzałam się kalendarzowi na kwiecień. Myślę, że nie ma sensu powtarzania planu dla początkujących, ponieważ to nie będzie już dla Ciebie żaden wysiłek. Każdy dzień z kalendarza kwietniowego składa się z kilku filmików, więc jeśli myśisz, że nie dasz rady zrobić całego to może pomiń jeden albo dwa najkrótsze. Powodzenia 😀
Cześć! Fajnie spotkać tu kogoś z Polski! 🙂 Jak Ci idzie? Który dzień już robisz? Dzięki za radę, rzeczywiście masz rację. Nie pomyślałam o pominięciu jakiegoś filmiku, a to chyba najprostsze i najsensowniejsze rozwiązanie 😉 Powodzenia! Damy radę! 😀
Hej! Cieszę się, że mogłam pomóc 🙂 Ja dziś robię 18 dzień, jednak tygodniowo robię cztery kolejne, a w pozostałe dni chodzę na ściankę wspinaczkową. Trzymam za nas kciuki! 😀
Give it a go 🙂 They start slower and build up remember 🙂
You’ve convinced me! I can do it! 😀
Okay, this is going to be my second month through the beginner calendar. I like to do the beginner workouts and add one or two from the April calendar. By the end maybe I can move into the may fitness calendar! Anyone else, comment as you proceed to help keep me going.
You can do it!!! Its great that you know what is good for your body! I think its a good idea to ease into the the harder workout calendar and I know you can do it!! Philippians 4:13 “I can do all things through Christ who gives me strength.”
Hey Kelli,
I am actually in the exact same boat as you! The other calendars seem so intimidating right now.. I am starting out as a total beginner into fitness world Pop Pilates & I’ve done the beginners calendar once before. I find that I just don’t have the strength to keep going with these workouts and thats usually what discourages me. Trying to tell myself to just do what you can and hopefully it will get easier…
i am from singapore and i am kind of having troubles with the whole Pilates thing and i have some questions. i have been starting your workout calendar for beginner’s and i am in week 3 now. i still do not quite get the lateral breathing and how to breathe correctly during the workouts. i try to suck in my belly button and also i have been trying to follow your meal plans. But it seems like my belly got bigger and bulging even more outwards. And i have not felt muscle aches for ages now. When i did your videos for the first time, there was muscle ache the next day. But right now, i do not really feel any muscle soreness or anything the next day after a workout session? Is it because i am not working hard enough? Having quite some trouble…
Sincerely,
Trying Hard
Hi!
With the breathing, I had trouble with that too. I just kept breathing at whatever pace I needed to and I was fine! With the belly issue, just keep going with what you are doing, it’s most likely a temporary thing. By the sounds of it your almost ready to go on to the monthly calendars! I would finish the beginners calendar but add on another video or two. See if that works. 🙂
Hey,
I wanna try the beginner’s calender but I’m wondering if there’s also an eating plan for this one or do I have to pay attention on what I need on my own for the first 4 weeks?
I don’t know if there’s an eating plan, but just tracking your food for the 4 weeks will be an invaluable tool! You’ll see how many calories you’re eating, as well get a good idea of the nutrients you are taking in and whether you eat more in certain situations or at certain times. This is the perfect way to start because you’ll know based on your measurements whether you should increase/decrease/don’t change your calories (if you need to change them, only do 100 or 200 and check again next month, and continue to monitor). You’ll also get a good idea if you need to add certain nutrients into your diet – getting enough calcium? iron? vitamin C? etc.. You’ll also learn what situations trigger binges or emotional or mindless eating for you – all invaluable information! Only ate 1200 calories and binged? Your body needed more! Had a rough day and got into the chocolate? Learn to de-stress another way! Watched tv and ate that entire bag of chips? Find something else to occupy your hands! Or whatever works for you.
Hello! I know this is kind of off topic but I was
wondering if you knew where I could get
a captcha plugin for my comment form? I’m using the same blog platform as yours and I’m having problems finding one?
Thanks a lot!
Hi! I would like to ask some question! Hopefully can get some advice here 🙂 I’m a 22 years old girl who weights 65 kg and height 170com. My most unsatisfied part of my body is my belly fat and thighs.. I would love to know what should I do? Any specific work out or food plan? I’m also interested in getting abs. currently I’m doing workout every 2 days. I eat light for breakfast,lunch, dinner usually I will be slight heavy.. Any suggestions? Really appreciate if I could get some advice here! Thank u so much!!! 🙂
Track your calories in and out. Make sure you haveonly a couple hundred more calories out than in. You can try the app on MyFitnessPal.com, but DON’T eat only 1200 calories – most people need more than that to function. Progess will be slow, but sustainable. It took you 22 years to get here, you won’t see dramatic results tomorrow. These workouts are great for building your muscles, so you’ll look better as the fat slowly comes off.
I agree with Patricia. I love My Fitness Pal. You can set goals for yourself, and it will tell you how many calories you should take in to achieve your goal. If you want to lose 2 pounds a week, it will say to have your net calorie intake at X calories. Just remember that when you add your exercise, it subtracts the calories you have for your total. So if your goal is 1800 calories and you burn 200 with exercise, you’ll want to take in about 2000 to meet the 1800. This way your body is still happy but you will still lose weight! 🙂
I should also mention that you should take photos of yourself.
In your underwear or sports bra take a picture of your front, back, and side, then do that again in a month or 6 weeks and put the photos side-by-side. You might not feel thinner, the scale may tell you you’ve gained weight (muscle!), ad people may not notice yet – but those photos will tell you the truth. You’ll see the difference there, where you and those around you miss the gradual changes that are happening. This helped me a lot with motivation.
Also – you have a healthy weight! Remember that! As mentioned, you might even gain weight, so keeping photos of yourself and also just thinking about how you actually feel, rather than what the scales say, is a great way of making sure you stay HEALTHY. My BMI says I’m overweight because I’m 77 kgs at 176 cm. It fails to take into account that I play two rugby matches per week, do rugby fitness sessions, go to the gym and do blogilates, so – DON’T LET THE SCALES RULE YOUR LIFE! I’m heavier than I’ve ever been, and I’m feeling GREAT about it because I’m soooo much stronger!
Oh my goodness! Incredible article dude! Thank you, However I am going through problems with your RSS.
I don’t know the reason why I am unable to join
it. Is there anybody having identical RSS problems? Anyone who knows the
answer will you kindly respond? Thanks!!
What’s Taking place i am new to this, I stumbled upon this I have found It positively helpful and it has aided me out loads.
I hope to contribute & help other customers like its aided
me. Good job.
Hey! I just wanted to ask if you ever have any trouble
with hackers? My last blog (wordpress) was hacked and I ended up losing many months of hard work due to no data backup.
Do you have any methods to prevent hackers?
Hey 🙂 I have a qustion . Im a beginner . I want to ask , is this beginners program will help to lose weight . I will run sometimes I’ll eat clean . And do other exersice . Is there will any change in my body ? btw: Im sorry , my english is not good 🙂 I hope you understand me..
It should! 🙂 I think the beginners workout is really to help you get used to the hard workouts and to build you up so you can do the monthly workouts the right way. But you should see a change if your working reallllllllly hard. 🙂
does this workout work and when will we see changes
thanx – diala
Hey fellow popsters and Cassey,
I have a question, I am in week three now from the beginners calendar. And I am feeling I am improving but with workouts where I have to lie down en use my legs (like ABC abs) I am having trouble keeping my legs straight and with keeping my lower back on the mat.
Does anybody know what I can do to train that I get better at this move?
Thank you!
Hi Eveline,
This is because of flexibility, you should do back stretches. Try to stand and touch your toes without flexing your knees. Do this a lot, also when you sit down with your legs straight try to have your back extended. Look for this kind of stretches. I had the same problem, because I don´t have a lot of flexibility in that part of the body. I hope I helped!
Bye!
There is no problem with bending your knees a bit,I had the same problem as you but by time I couldn’t make my legs straight…We are all on our fit journey
Maybe someone can help me with this question 🙂
I just started the beginner’s workout calendar 2 days ago, but I reeeally want to use the AprilAbs calendar as well… Would you guys recommend doing both at the same time, and when May comes around I would stop the AprilAbs, keep on with the beginner’s calendar until I’m done but still start the May one on the 1st – just so I would get into the rhythm? 🙂
It would depend on what level you are on, if you are a beginner i would suggest the beginners workout and stick with that. if you are more experienced and you think you can handle it, go ahead! Just make sure that you rest days are on the same days! 🙂
Thanks for the quick answer 🙂 I think I’ll give it a go with some of the exercises from the AprilAbs workout and see how it goes!
Worst case scenario you can start the April calendar once you finish the beginners one. It’s what I’m doing even tho it will put me a month “behind”. I figure I can start June when everyone else does unless I like the look of May’s calendar better; as long as something is being done and you aren’t pushing yourself too hard do what works best for you.
Okay Im on day 4 (Im going to do the video’s after work) but Im sooooo sore.
If there is an exercise with one leg up Im shaking like crazy. So Im kinda like do I continue, I basically need some one to tell me to suck it up and continue……. cause i kinda want to get rid of the love handles haha
You can do it!!!!!! No pain no gain! 🙂 Plus, you can do all things through christ who strenghtens you, so i know that you can do it!!!!!
Thanks Paloma. 🙂
Woo! Doing the butt video twice absolutely killed me! Feeling rrreal good right now. Thanks Cassey 🙂
I cant wait to get burned! xD
Hi,
I’m just starting today. I don’t make any sport but I’m trying to move as possible as I can.
When I started the first exercise, I had a lot of pain in my neck (i’m sorry if that’s not english, I speak french). I think she says something about it but I didn’t understand what so I don’t know what I did so bad, can someone tell me what should I do? Because it’s a such easy exercise as I see in the comments.
The second thing is my leg really hurt when I did the exercise for the legs but I still keep my leg high (sorry for my english) but for the other leg, I just couldn’t do the exercise. I was really motivated but, I did it and often stopped. Is it normal?
Debbie x
Hi Debbie! Your english was awesome! 🙂 When you had the pain in your neck, did it feel like you were straining it? that happens to most people especially when they first start out. Just try to use your abs more and if that doesn’t help enough, you can put your hands behind your neck to support it. For your legs, i think they were just burning from all the hard work you were doing. Congratulations! 🙂
Hi Cassey, My question if you are trying to follow your monthly calendar and miss a day should you just continue and move on to the next day? Or try to make up that day? Just curious on your thoughts. Thanks for posting I love your website and videos
I have days where I know I won’t be able to get a workout in when I work a 14 hour shift which usually happens once or twice a week. I’ll always do two days in one the day before. It’ll whoop you sometimes, but it feels good! Then just carry on after that!
Thanks for that tip! I wouldn’t have considered that before (because I’m naturally lazy ha ha). I started the calender a few days into the month, so doubling up is a good way to still finish within the month.
Thanks!
You can also switch your rest day with the day that you missed.
I appreciate, cause I discovered exactly
what I used to be having a look for. You have ended my four day long hunt!
God Bless you man. Have a great day. Bye
Agreed with Charistina quote…
Cassey i love ur possitive attitude and ur workouts..
You inspired me to keeo doing worouts and pushing my self
I complete my 3 days today and feel so gud inner n out..
Hello Blogilates!!
Our graduation is next month and i wanna look fit on that special day, so im trying this beginners calendar. Been following Casey and her videos before but im to lazy and busy excercise daily. this is the first time im seriously going to finish it. Good luck for me !!!
I am starting today with my cousine 🙂
I would like to lose some weight i gained over christmas holidays and i would like to be fitter.
My motivation is too look fitter when i am on Summersplash, which is a huge beach festival in Europe.
And i hope I will get more in tune with my body and its needs. 🙂
Hi!
I have a question it isn’t mentioned in here if I shall stretch or not even though Cassey said in 1 of her stretching videos that any1 working out should.
So should I?!!!
Have a nice day every1
Starting today, after my husband comes back from work I’ll get us both to start this program out. I haven’t been able to exercise for many, many years. About 30 pounds overweight, runner’s knee injury (although I’ve never run). My husband has a lot of back and neck pain. In other words, we both really need this program, it’s been recommended quite a bit. We’ll be starting with the beginner’s video. First looking for strengthening our bodies and relieving pains. Next goal will be loosing weight. Wish us luck!
Im on day 26 and let me just say this is life changing! And I dont mean that in a cheesy way. Coming from someone who hated working out, after being introduced to Cassey by a vlogger friend on YouTube, I look forward to working out everyday with Cassey and her spunk. She makes working out fun and her constant encouragement is unbelievable! And just being apart of the Blogilates community is a gift in itself. Everybody is always so positive and helps each other to not give up on the days that it may seem harder. The first week will definitely make you think Cassey is crazy lol. But by the time you start week 4, youre so much stronger ad feel so much better about yourself. I really hope you enjoy the start of your Blogilates journey, its beyond worth it! Goodluck! 🙂
did u lose any weight? or is your body thinner? I’m on day 12 and i don’t know if i should keep it or not.
Don’t quit Ida!
I recently saw a quote, “It takes 4 weeks for you to notice your body changing, 8 weeks for your friends to notice, and 12 weeks for the rest of the world to notice. Give it 12 weeks. Don’t QUIT!”
Hello Christina thank you for sharin that quote. I am on my day 13 and can’t see any changes too. But I keep pushing and pushing…
Agreed with u charistina qoute…i complet my 3 days today
Its such a good feeling..Cassey i love ur workouts..
You inspired me to keep doing the workouts..n love ur
Positive attitude..thnx
Ida, my body is thinner and ive lost about 2 pounds. But thats most likely because I cut out everything except water and a small glass of milk at night. I havent touched soda in months. But this calendar definitely tones you up. Keep going. Itll get easier with time.
Day two ready! 😀 I must admit I’ve been doing cardio for a month or so, so I’m not that tired, but I’m not used to excercise my abs so they hurt xD I’m doing this to gain some muscle because I’m naturally skinny and I want to look more “healthy”.
I like to convine this with some Yoga in the morning, sice I don’t like working out at that time, and I’ve been feeling more energetic, happy and proud of myself. Hope I can finish the whole month!
Cheers to everyone that finished the say! Keep fighting guys!
Day one: check! yey! 😀 I’m determined to make it trough the whole month, then switch to some more advanced routines and be perfectly fit for summer!
I’m just wondering if I should add a warm up before and a stretching routine after these workouts, or is it fine to skip them? Any ideas?
I usually add both a stretch video before and after. Cassey has 7 or so of them now, and there’s a few of them I really enjoy. So I just search “Blogilates stretch” and either pick ones that I simply feel like doing, or ones that target whatever area was the target for the regular calendar day (i.e. on a leg and butt day I might pick the leg and upper back stretches or the splits one).
I does add on about 20 mins to your routine, but it helps me get motivated to do the workouts and have more energy for them, and it feels *so* good after the workouts as well, especially if you’re sore.
Thanks! 🙂
Hello Cassey I would like to tell you that I love your workouts I had never tried pilates because I felt I was to big to try it. But I found the courage to try in the privacy of my home and I love it! You have inspired me to keep doing the workouts I find you very inspirational. I have been doing the workouts for three weeks and I can see the difference already and I actually feel stronger inside and out. I have even lost six pounds and it’s all because of you. Thank you so much for the workouts and for your positive attitude you inspire me and appreciate all you do. Thank you again
I love these videos so far! The only thing is I’m not able to the do the ‘wake up’ exercises when I actually wake up. I am too tired and my muscles are too tight in the morning. I’ve just been doing these exercises before or after the videos for that day. I figured it’s still good enough as long as I do them at some point in the day.
Is anyone doing cardio in addition to the videos? I am trying to lose weight so I feel like I need to add in cardio too, but I am normally pretty worn out just from doing the videos. Exercising 6 days a week is new to me. So it’s been making me pretty tired. Just curious what other people are doing. Thanks!
The first week I did it with additional cardio, but week 2 I repeat the videos twice, once in the morning and once in the afternoon or before I go to bed.
Yes, you are supposed to do cardio along with the pilates. (She has awesome cardio videos as well!! 🙂 ) The pilates tone your muscles, but, as she says in some of her videos, you can’t see your pretty toned muscles if there is a layer of fat covering them! 🙂 I generally pick one of her cardio videos and repeat it at least 3 or 4 times, so at least 30 minutes to an hour of cardio, then I do my pilates. you can do it in either order, though, whichever you find best!
Thank you! Tori do you know if she has any carido videos for beginners?
Yes she does 🙂 The Fat Burning Cardio Warmup is very easy, perfect for beginners. It helps you warm up before your pilates exercices. It is pretty short as well, so I do recommend doing it at least 3 times, or combining it with other of her cardio workouts. You can do it before your pilates or after, to each its own 🙂
Here’s the link to her cardio warmup: https://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_detailpage&v=7BkjRlYq_UE
I’ve done it!
I still can’t believe it myself, but I’ve completed it. Must say I had some ups and downs and took a few more days off than recommended but for a total beginner and a super lazy person this is huge.
I can definitely see some results and I feel more alive. It’s such a good feeling, I recommend it.
I just signed up to your newsletters Cassie and I’m looking forward to tomorrow, BUT I am having problems on seeing the meal plans, could YOU or anyone help me (-:
Thank you- Maria
Cassey, you are my rock! Thank you very much :* xoxo
How Come The Beginners Pilates Is Only For 28 days wheres the new one??
Once you finish the Beginners calendar, you can go on to the regular monthly one!
I’m starting the beginners workout today. I can’t find where the meal plan is? Can anyone help? I’ve gained and lost weight alot over the last 5 years becuz my youngest daughter had cancer and died 4 years ago. So I’d go from eating to NOT eating anything at all for days. Which left me completely weird in the the head cuz I had no energy at all.. so then I had a hysterectomy last July and have gained 30 pounds becuz there was a problem with the surgery in which I was in complete pain and laid on the couch for months it seemed. I’ve tried walking. Or I won’t eat anything until dinner time. Which doesnt work either becuz my body is in starvation mode. I used to train in body building 20 years ago with my brother who used to compete and I was in the BEST shape then… but now not all and 4 kids later with lots of stress due to circumstances beyond my control. So, I’m just asking for support and a new healthier way to help myself and my daughter that is at home and is overweight she’s 14. After her little sister died we were all so grief stricken that her dad and I were emotionally unavailable although she was in counseling… but she ate to help her cope and I starved myself, but have gained the weight back and then some. I am now looking for much healthier ways to deal with all of this.
Sorry, for being all over the place in this post. Probably doesn’t make sense, but I’m glad this is here to help me and my daughter.
Thanks….
#NEWBODYMAKEOVER Meal plan! 🙂
AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Where is the calandar for April already?!?! How am I supposed to start it tomorrow if it’s not up for me today!??!?!?!?!
I love these workouts! I really wanted to tone my body and gain some lean muscle, and these videos do so much in so little time, they’re great! Plus I absolutely love how encouraging Cassey is and how she admits to feeling that burn, too. It makes it so much easier to keep going. I’m only through the first week and I’m already feeling fitter and more energetic.
Hello Everyone!
I am really confused on whether or not we are suppose to do the workout and add cardio?
If so, how many minutes of cardio?
Also, do you repeat the videos for repititions or just do them once?
I want to get the best results!!!!
Hey! I just asked the same question about cardio. So I’m not sure on that. But to answer your other question, yes I think you;re only supposed to the videos once. Just as she has listed on the calendar. So you do each video listed for that day once. At least thats what I think. It’s how I’ve been doing it.
Hey there!
I would like to do this in April and I would like to write about my experience on my blog. Am i allowed to use the picture of the Calender on my blog? I would say where its from and put a link on it to this website.
xoxo Charity
Anything password protected, she doesn’t want shared, such as meal plans, monthly calendars, that kind of thing. That’s why she has them password protected!
Ok thanks but the beginners calender isnt password protected. So am i allowed to share that one? 🙂
I just finished the calendar today and I definitely see results! Definition in my legs, arms, and abs!!
Hi,
I am about to start the beginners chart this week. Just wanted to know, is it best to start on the Sunday and rest on Saturday or is it best to start in the weekday and use the seventh day as my rest day?? Any suggestions, I really want to start as soon as possible but not sure if I should start it on Sunday or start tomorrow.
Hi VI! That depends on your schedule! I made my rest day Wednesday, because that is our heaviest shipment day at the grocery store I work in, and I do a LOT of lifting that day already. So just pick the day that is right for you! I also think putting my rest day on one of my weekend days (thurs/fri) would make it easier for me to sneak indulgent foods.. “it’s rest day! time to splurge!” so I avoided that too! Good luck and have fun!!! You can do it!
Hi Cassey! I am trying to get back into the swing of workouts after a really long 6 month delay with school I had withdrawal symptoms to not exercising but I was so busy with everything its hard to get back into the swing. Anyways, one really big problem I am having is keeping my back on the ground. My back is always arched upwards even If I try to support my body with my hands or towel. Even my breathing still leaves me with space that I can fit my hands through. Is there any other way I can keep my back on the ground? Thanks Cassey! <3
I am on day 6 of the calendar & I am sore but I love it! I believe I need to pair cardio with your videos but how often should I do cardio?
I did Day 4 yesterday, and didn’t really get the hang of the bubble butt stuff..didn’t feel it at all. Then this morning I got up and can barely move!! The tops of my thighs at the back, and my inner thighs are so sore..as well as my back (but I think I might have slept funny and done that). I don’t know whether to push through and do day 5 or if I should make today my rest day instead of Sunday.. Any thoughts guys?
I would say try do your best of it! when waking up sore the best thing to do is stretch! So stretch the sore areas and just try to do the routine anyway =]
Just a quick tip when doing day 11 stretch before and after cause those glad you came calf excercises killed my for four days after! I couldn’t walk!!
Hi Becca.. Thanks for the tip – I’ll remember that!
I’ve decided I’m going to incorporate stretching for flexibility I to each days workout.. Either before or after, as flexibility is a real toughie for me at the moment 🙂
If I am not able to do the whole video, but I almost did it or if I just do 12 abs instead of 20, should I go on with the next day or should I repeat the day?
Please help 🙂
I don’t if I am too tired today or day five was much harder! 😛
I’ve started the beginners calendar a week ago and i coulnd’t do that much immediately but i paused the videos when i needed a break and then i started again after 30 sec with the remaining, so i’ve done all 🙂 i think it is no problem to make little breaks if you cannot do everything at a time. we all start from the bottom, we just have to don’t give up 🙂 just go on girl and don’t give up! <3
Thanks! It’s been hard, but I think I’ve improved 🙂 It doesn’t matter how tired I am at the end of the day, I do my blogilates workouts everyday ^^ Although I can’t do roll-ups yet 😛
I would like to say a lot more but my English is limited.
Again, thank you very much 🙂
Hey i just discovered Biogilates and i was wondering if i start exercising now do i need the March 2014 calender?
If you are just starting, you should do the beginners calendar first 🙂
I have such a hard time doing the leg circles. I never feel it in my legs because my hips cramp up before I can feel it. I have to stop and stretch my thighs then I continue and they cramp up again. Does anyone have any advice about getting my hips to stop cramping up?
Hiya 🙂 I’ve been having that horrible cramp too! Someone on the app said it could be due to a magnesium deficiency? Hope you feel less crampy soon xx
on this calendar, there is no Arm workout ?
I’m just about to do day 25 of the calendar and I must say I’ve been loving it so far! I have a job at a bakery/candystore type place so I struggle with cravings a lot. Overall I manage to eat relatively clean, and combined with POP Pilates I have been seeing and feeling quite impressive results already! Definitely going through with this. I’m so pumped to start doing the more advanced video’s the april calendar will have in store for all of us! Thank you Cassey!
Hola Cassey!
Hi i am going to start out your 4 weeks beginners workout from tomorrow, the calender says that one should start the workout after waking up in the morning. I have classes early in the morning, is it okay if i start to workout in the evening or the afternoon?
I only have to do the wake up& do something in the morning, so it’s alright if you do the workout in the evening! Hopefully I was able to help!
I meant you not I in the first sentence… Whoops ^.^
You can do the workout whenever you want! Even though it says for example “wake up and do a 1 min plank” that doesn’t mean you HAVE to do it when you wake up – as long as you do it sometime throughout the day, I think you will be just fine! I always do the “wake up and…” exercises right before the rest of the videos because I don’t have time in the morning. Although they would give you a nice and energetic start to the day, the time of when you perform the exercise doesn’t really matter THAT much 🙂 Good luck!
stupid question but should I add cardio or HIIT to this plan? I already have some toned muscles but I still want to lose fat.. Please help! 🙂
I just finished day one….though finished is a strong word lol My legs were killing me, let me tell u lifting these thunder thighs and making circles had me screaming, groaning and thinking ‘just u wait, u won’t be this big by the of this month of workouts!’ Here’s to eating clean and working hard 🙂
We finished the calender!
Yippi!!!!!!!!!
So happy
Thanks Cassey <3
Hey! So great that you finished the calendar!
Was it hard? did you see good results? thanks!
Hey! What is the best fat shedding cardio workout? I have a lot of muscle and just a layer of fat around it. Please help!
how did everyone print it out?? i want it a full page but i cnt get it
Hi,
I always have hard time with starting doing something. Last year I went to gym for 6 months, for the first time in my life. I don’t have any problems with my weight… only sometimes I feel like their not at the right places. Also I have a question… I have this fat chubby face even though I’m skinny person. I never lost my fat chubby face… it makes me look like a 5 year old kid. How can I get a nice tight face? do you have any tips for that? I’m gonna try to start doing this…. thank you for your wonderful sweet videos, I like how you are training through out the entire workout… it kinda makes us feel like we are at the gym school. THANK YOU for thinking beginners also.
My sister had the same chubby cheek problem for years. She got her food allergy panel done and she sticks to clean eating and avoiding foods that make her sick. She now has a healthy, not super cheeky face, like the rest of the women in our family.
Hi Cassey, I love the workouts and especially love that they are free and easy to do anywhere! Takes the ‘can’t get motivated to leave the house’ factor out of it.
I find that when abducting my hips they tend to clunk a lot. Any idea what causes this? Doesn’t hurt but I can hear and feel it.
Thanks!
I have a question about the 1 min plank on the beginners calendar. I just watched her ABs video where she shows us 4 different ways to do a plank. Which type of plank should I be doing during the “wake up & do 1 min plank” on the calendar? I had only ever done one type of plank before seeing her video where she showed us the 4 ways of doing it. Just wasn’t sure which one was better to do on those days.
I did the one on the toes and the elbows
Kim
Thank you for your response! That is the type of plank I had been doing. But then I watched her video where she shows all 4 kinds so then I wasn’t sure! 🙂
Hi, Cassey! I’ve just finished day 3 and I’m enjoying it a loy! Unfortunately, I’ve just realized that I’ve an injury near my cóccix 🙁 I must have done something wrong along the way. How may I avoid this? I’m already doing the exercises on a yoga mat. May I use a folded sheet under the area to protect it? Thanks! =* kisses!
PS: Should I rest for a few days until it is completely recovered or may I continue doing the beginner’s calendar?
You should probably call your doctor and ask! Better safe than sorry.
It’s day 9 for me, and I did the total body workout for the second time yesterday. My whole body was very sore last week after doing it for the first time but I am not feeling sore anymore today, and I am sure that’s because I am getting stronger. I am definitely looking forward to getting more fit, stronger, and healthier. Thanks Cassey!
Hey Cassey!
I’m starting to use your workout calendar and the 12 week meal plan! I love it! I just want to know, is the meal plan designed for afternoon workouts (protein powder is meal 4), or can I work out at any time and still burn off all the calories?
Thank you!
Hey guys I have a question.I had a knee injury a few months ago and even tho it’s healed now I’m pretty much paranoid of my knee jumping out and causing the same injury again *I have shallow kneecaps so my knees can pretty much jump out on “their own”* ~ I tried everything to loose weight and seeing a lot of you happy with progress and how positive Cassey is I wanted to give this a try 🙂 .So I just wanted to check if it’s “safe” to do these exercises? Because I see a lot of movement going on here haha :3
Thanks in advance! <3 *any suggestion/comment is welcome ^^*
Hi guys, I tried to load the call me maybe squats but it is ban. Anyone have download it?
Hey Cassey!
I watched a few of your videos now, and I really liked them! I will start this tomorrow, because it’s 9 pm now ^^ but earlier, I was a person who said: eh, I’m gonna start next monday… But now I start tomorrow, no matter what! thank you so much, I’m really excited for this calendar 😀
Monique
Hi! I’ve been doing Cassey’s videos for a looong long time but now I’m about to start doing the beginner’s calendar. I’d like to know if there is a good meal plan that would fit this calendar? It seemed a bit hard for me to find a suitable one from this website.. I have problems with eating enough and since I’m about to get started with a healthier life style using this calendar, I think it would be super important to maintain a healthy diet as well 🙂
Thanks in advance!
Love, Vilma
Greetings from Finland!
Just finished day 10 on the beginners calendar. Really enjoying this series and you Cassey. Thank you for your motivating videos. I actually look forward to each day, and have put my workouts on the calendar so I don’t have an excuse NOT to work out.
hey,
question 1: does anyone know of these videos have to be done in the morning or a certain time of day if not otherwise specified?
question 2: is it ok to do additional exercise on top of this calendar, like running or boxing classes?
thanks.
Hi Steph! I’m pretty sure you can do these at any time of the day and do additional exercice. I am on week 2 and did a few additional videos plus I play basketball sometimes. I think you can do as much as you want to, as long as you dont over-exhaust your body. It’s important to only do as much as you can really handle so you don’t hurt yourself. Also, when you feel over-exhausted you will probably have a hard time to do the videos on a daily basis. If you want to do your additional exercise like boxing you can make a compromise, for example only do 2 of the 3 videos of the day.
They can be done whenever you have time or feel like doing them. Its completely up to you. And absolutely you can add to it. I usally do the days vidoes and then go on and add a couple more of her videos that target certain areas that my body has problems with (ie muffin top). I always make sure I do 30 minutes or more of Cassey and I always walk for about 45 minutes daily too.
has anybody lost weight after completing the beginners calender? or seen a difference in their body???? i am on week 2
I have been wondering the same exact thing. I just finished day 5 and so far I have only noticed how out of shape I really am, lol. However I do feel that with everyday I am a little bit stronger. Keep in mind though that muscle weighs more than fat, so while doing these workouts you might notice the scale isnt going down, but you are still getting stronger and building muscle. Once you build some muscle then your body should start getting rid of fat. By the time you finish the beginner calendar you should see a difference in definition of your abs, etc. And if you keep working on monthly calendars by the end of two months (8ish weeks) you should notice small changes weight. Hopefully I didnt just totally confused you.
I lost 4 pounds (probably water weight, but still) and my butt is a lot more lifted now. My stomach has more definition and my thighs are firmer
Just finished my sixth day of POP Pilates Beginners Challenge! Feel so good! I also have been doing Want U Back Arms for 5 days in a row now! Can’t wait to get more advanced in Pilates! Thank you so much Cassey, you are a joy to watch!!!
Isaiah 40:31 “But those who hope in the Lord will renew their strength. They will soar on wings like eagles, they will run and not grow weary, they will walk and not be faint.”
Hi
I have a question.
In the March Calender there are four videos.
Every video takes 15 minutes. 4 videos 1 hour.
I think it’s too long. Can I choose two, or?
Does anyone know it?
Thank you
I have only been doing posted for a week and a half… But personally I think that Cassey does such a great job in her videos, you barely know that it has been an hour (or however long). Again, that’s just me! But I think you should stick with it! Do what you can!! : )
*Pilates
I wanted to know the same thing, actually. I did the entire beginners calendar (which has 20-minute long workouts, usually) and I still want to do 20-30 min workouts for now (just to get into the habit of working out every day)…. can I move on to the normal calendars but just pick a few videos instead of doing the full hour?
of course you can! You have to work out in a way that is best for your body and what meets your needs. You will obviously see quicker results if you follow the calendar 100%, but if doing only 2 videos a day works for you then that is perfectly fine.
hi cassey
i’m 17 year old from india and i am overweight. will i be able to do the workout?
Hey there! I am not the expert here, but I think you can do this! I am on week 2 and have been talking to a few others who have started the calender. The videos in this calender start with easy moves, but every beginner (if overweight or not) seems to have a hard time with at least some of them! It can be really exhausting and difficult. But even if you have trouble in the beginning you shouldn’t lose motivation! WIth time you will feel stronger and you will be able to follow her instructions more easily! You should definitly give it a try. And don’t be upset if you have a hard time in the beginning, it will become more and more easy and when you finished it, you can be so proud of yourself!
i like this.i am just beginning today..
i like this video…your fitness program is so good..
Hi Cassey,
I have been doing your videos for a while now and have finished the beginners calendar. I found out I was pregnant recently and decided to go back through and do the beginners workouts again. I had to take about 2 weeks off and when I came back to start the first day, I found that it was more uncomfortable than normal. I was wondering if you have or have considered doing any prenatal pilates videos, or if you can suggest modifications…or maybe recommend some other videos that I can watch to continue the pilates throughout the pregnancy. I have consulted with my dr and she has okay’d me to do pilates.
Thank you,
Meri
Im beginning today and im so ready and pumped for this!! Thanks Cassie <3
Hi 🙂
I really like these videos but I’ve been having trouble remembering to do the lateral breathing while focusing on the exercises themselves. Does anyone have any tips or tricks? I’d really appreciate your input!
Thanks!
I am on my 8th day of the beginners calendar. I love it! However, On the 7th day (rest day) I found myself developing a case of the lazies. I know from past experiences with pilates and yoga that some classes offer a meditation type of exercise where you relax close your eyes and so on.
Cassy it would be awesome if you could load a video like that for the rest days to help keep people like me to not be so lazy on that seventh day.
I started a group on Facebook for the beginners calendar, for people to talk to others doing the same thing, to motivate each other, to connect. I will be starting the calendar on the 12th of March. https://www.facebook.com/groups/550606911713130/
Hi. I have printed the Beginners calendar and will start tomorrow 🙂
Bur for me, who’s Norwegian, some of the words and terms are a bit tricky. Do you think you can make links to your suggestions on the calendar as well? (the ones in pink) I have no idea what for instance burpees and teasers are…
Thank you for sharing your passion and skills with us – you are a great inspiration. I hope at the age of 33, going on 34, I will finally get fit. Additionally, if I can get rid of mye post pregnancy belly it would me great! 😉
Hi Ann,
Me too! I’m also beginning today.
Burpees and teasers are probably workout moves, just like squats or push ups.
I wish you great succes!
Hey, i was struggeling a bit with it too, but you just can check it out easily on youtube if you search for it 🙂
Hi Cassey, I just wanted to thank you for these awesome videos! I’m on day13 on the beginners calendar and you have helped me sooooooo much. Your positive attitude and your brilliant smile gets me through each session and makes me want to come back tomorrow. Thanks you so much. Love you
Awwww my calves are aching….. I will try it everywhere as long as people don’t see me doing that I enjoy this workout and I’m happy Cassey
a! I just wanted to tell you how much I love you and how grateful I am to you!I’ve definitely gotten so much stronger in the month that I’ve started blogilates and now I can do your regular workouts without stopping. I’ve combined this with this fitness club at my school and I feel better than ever. Plus, I love your meal plans! Thank you!
Hey guys! I’m only on day 3 and I already feel loads better. Somethings are still a little tough, but I love it! Good luck to everyone! ^-^
First day for my friend and me. Just enjoy
Best of luck to you two! I work out with my mom, who has just started the beginners workout, and I make her try one of the regular schedule videos. It helps with the transition into next month, and gear up!
You both will feel amazing in just a few days! I noticed that I felt stronger inside in two weeks! Good luck! 🙂
So this I around 2 for me on the beginners calendar I tried to do it before I got more then halfway then for some reason I stopped I feel so horrible then I started up on the regular calendar but I can’t do it I think I’m more out of shape then before so going back to the beginners and I hope to succeed and starting to keep track on my eating with my fitness pal. Hope I can do it 🙂 good luck with everyone else’s.
Hi Cassey :*
I am slightly backward. Today I begin POP PILATES FOR BEGINNERS!
previously i practiced with you, but only selected movies. from today I practice with the calendar. I’m so excited!! <3 Luv Ya <3
I’m on day 9 and I can’t believe the difference – Ab time was so much easier than last week! I had to do a hands and toes plank instead of elbows and knees, I didn’t think I would be able to see progress this fast. I was at the gym two times a week before but working out 6 times a week has made a huge difference. I can’t wait for tomorrow! Thank you for the calendar!
Hey!
Starting this again, i used to use this youtube channel a lot until i got an eating disorder (not because of this site) but because i went over board. i am totally recovered now and i wanna be healthy now, not too skinny but not feeling slugish like i do at the moment, but i have a stupid question… i cant find the print button!!! i want to start with something slow and ease into exercise, but i need to print 1st!
xox
Click on it, then save the pic on your computer and print from there. Good luck!
So pumped that you have a beginner’s calendar! I have 2 kids, 3 year old and an almost 4 month old. Needless to say I am much more flabby then I would like to be and have a strong desire to be leaner and stronger! So, guess what?! I am starting TOMORROW! Woot woot!
i’m starting tomorrow with beginners program.
feeling excited!!!
:*
good luck to both of us^_^ I hope I can do it to the very end
Hey Cassie, I just started the beginner calender today. The thing is though, on the app it keeps saying it’s day 8. I want to be able to be caught up with everyone else but I’m behind 8 days. What should I do?
Starting the beginners, can’t wait!! did the 5 best ab exercises yesterday, my core was burning!
Yayy! I’m finally finish with my beginners calendar. For the first time, it was so tough! My whole body felt the soreness so bad. Yayy for me, now i can feel the difference on my body. I’m getting fit, more flexible and much healthier than before. For the beginners out there, what can i say is you must not easily give up, trust me this is the beginning for you guys to be better in the future. The most important is you must always have the determination to succeed. 🙂
Thanks to cassey, you’re my inspiration. 🙂 :* <3
Thank-you this really wants to make me finish what I had started! I am on day 4 and I can’t wait till I will be able to say I had finished the calendar! 🙂
What r u doing after finishing this calendar??….
I finished the beginner calendar and I’m repeating it again cuase I can’t follow with the advance March calendar :'(
i still don’t get the code for the free work outs calender:s
What would you recommend to do after the beginners calendar? I’m not ready for the regular calendar though b/c I can’t do this everyday and it’s too hard for me!
Try repeating it. Or alternating between the beginner calendar and the monthly calendar.
Hey,
On day four I could not go past the second video. I stopped mid way at crazy core workout. Can someone tell me if they’re going through the same? What can I do now?
Sice I am a beginner, I know I should use the beginners monthly calendar nut at what point should I start using the regular one?
I am just starting out on this journey and am really looking forward to it! Just did my first day and it reminds me of my old dance warm ups so I am SUPER excited!! I want my old dancers body back and I cannot wait to get it with these videos! Thank you for putting together this beginners video set! I also bought your dvd! This is going to be great! THANK YOU SO MUCH!!!!!!!
Is it better to do all the workouts assign for a day in one run or spacing them out throughout the day? I just start today so I’m not sure what to do to get the best result.
In one run for a better effect!
Hi all,
I am just starting this journey!
Could you please help me with the calendar? how many times should we repeat the videos? anything to do before or after!!!
Great Thanks
When you follow the calendar you do each video on the calendar only 1x. But you do each one suggested for that day.
Stretch before and after your workout session.
You always have to stretch, but no before and after every single video, just when you’re going to start to work out and when you finish. You have to do each video 1 time, each day are 2 or 3 videos so you have to do the videos indicated for each day of the calendar.
hi Cassey, thanks for the motivation you’re giving me and obviously to everyone. What calendar should i do after this “Beginner’s Calendar” coz I’m almost done with it?… Pretty excited!
Love the videos. I had a baby 5 months ago, I am back at work and I am nursing. I am trying to get in a routine and I love your videos because they are short to the point, and I get the best workout. I love your meal post of Facebook and cant wait to see the results! Thanks so much!
Been following your videos off and on for about two years now.. And I truly appreciate you because your videos are basically the only reason I work out. Everyone else has bored me to death or left me feeling unmotivated. Granted I have have fallen off the work out wagon a few times now – BUT I keep coming back to your videos because they are FUN ! And your personality inspires me. I thank you. And hope you never stop !
I love you Cassey! (: <333
I’ll start tomorrow with this training program, but I was wondering if I can do this all in the morning, or is it better to spread it out through the day? I leave home at 7.00 and I’m back between 6.30 and 7.30. And I’m soooo tired in the evening. But if it’s better to do some exercices in the evening in stead of doing everything in the morning, I’ll do that. I want to do this in the best way possible!
I think it’s better to exercise when you’re not tired so that you can put more effort into it and hence get more out of the workout. Also, some people say it’s better to do exercise in the morning because you’ll get the effect of elevated metabolism throughout the day.
I also like the exercise in the morning just because it leaves me in a good mood and a healthy mindset for the rest of the day! 🙂
Starting Week 3 tomorrow. I am really excited! My stomach is already flatter after only 2 weeks. I can’t wait to see the results after 2 more. I forgot how much I love pilates! Yay!
Hello! I was just wondering if you guys can help me out here!
Does pop pilates combined with cardio work? More importantly, I just want to know what’s the main purpose and benefits of doing pilates ^^ does pilates tone and shape body whilst losing weight?
Thank you for your help ^__^
You are encouraged to do cardio on the side, but pilates itself isn’t cardio (though it can really get your heart beating!). Pilates strengthens and tones your whole body, increasing strength, flexibility, and balance, while decreasing your flabby areas. I’ve done pilates off and on for years, and I certainly remember the times I did it regularly as being times when I was particularly well rested, positive, and just felt all around great. I ran as my cardio for about half the days I did pilates. I’m about to start another pilates binge. You should definitely give it a shot!
Best!
P
So sore from yesterday! On day 2!!
I don`t understand if I am supposed to warm up before these videos eatch day or warm-up is included in the videoes? It doesnt feel enough with just the video sometimes when I start, some muscles are still cold, it would be text somewhere explaining if you need to warmup before. So people don´t hurt themselves!
Thank you for all the videos, inspiration and for making fitness fun. I’m 15 weeks pregnant and I’m doing your beginners calendar, since i figured that would be low impact. Would you be willing to put something together for the pregnant ladies? Id love to be able to follow a program throughout the rest of my pregnancy. Thank you so much.
Hey everyone! (: I just started this today and already love it! I have a few questions though. Do we have to do all the workouts at the same time, or can we spread them out through out the day? And I know it says wake up…(and do whatever) so does that mean we don’t do the workouts in the morning or that we do? Thanks and I’m so happy to be a part of this!(:
Hey guys! I just started the program few days ago! I have some questions, of course…
First: How many times I should repeat the exercises for a day? I mean… I do them now just once while watching the videos. I am not sure if this is working enough? Yes, first days I had such pain on my ‘ribs’ and such tension while doing the exercises, but… Should I raise it to twice a day?
Second: Can I combine the Beginners workout with the New Body Make Over Meal Plan, 12 weeks?
Third: Is it a biig problem that I love, I mean LOVE drinking coffee? I can’t quit 🙁 It’s just like some people are addicted to.. chocolate, i am to coffee 🙂
Would be nice if someone can answer on my post.
Thanks in advance! 🙂
I just had a question I have your workout calendar on my phone and are you able to do 2 or 3 workouts in the morning then the other ones at night or do you have to do them all at the same time?
Hey Cassey! I was wondering about the Beginner Workout Calendar if we are supposed to do other workouts with it or is it enough to get results from your calendar? Like do a 30 on the elliptical or something? I would like to get a nice toned butt and just an overall, hot bod. Aha. And for the meals, do we have to do your meals or can we just stick to a clean diet and lots of water?
Starting week two tomorrow. I’m super excited!!! XD I just hope I start seeing slight results by the end of this week. It is discouraging when you are consistently doing something and never see results. I am feeling the soreness in my muscles after each workout which is a good sign. Sometimes after the workouts though I feel I could do more and it’s not enough. Is it ok to do more or is it best to progress slowly. I don’t want to make myself too sore to the point I can’t workout the next day but I really want to push myself harder and some of the videos are a bit too short for me. Can anyone recommend some good blogilates videos to increase the intensity on some of my days?
I’m starting week 2 today, and I’m going through the exact thought process you are. My advice (and what I’m going to do) is just finish this calendar and maybe do a bit cardio with it, as the days go by, the work outs will increase in intensity and duration. See how you feel after week 3, if it’s still not rewarding enough, add some videos 🙂
Hi Girlies
I’m starting the 90 Day Challenge on February the 17th.
Follow my Tumblr blog to see how I go with it! I’ll be posting regularly, to let you guys know what I think of the program and how I’m coping.
Here’s a link to my Tumblr – http://blogilatescllnge.tumblr.com/
Or just search Blogilateschllnge
🙂 Thanks!
I’m going to start day 1 tomorrow. Do I need to do any other cardio to warm up or end the workout?
Just finished my first week of the beginners calendar, and am so pleased to say that it’s working, and it’s doable as a beginner.
Also, I absolutely LOVE that you have a some plus size options in your shop…it may sound silly, but it’s super discouraging when trying to work out as a bigger girl means having to wear frumpy sweats, because no work out clothing fits me!!
Im on day 4 and i havent noticed any soreness in my abs, only my legs and butt. Whats going on?
Maybe the workouts are easy for you 🙂
I have had the same thing. No soreness in my abs. I was wondering why as well.
I think you’ll feel it after a day or two just like I did before. If not, then maybe you can move on to a much more intense ab workout~ 🙂
The number one mistake made when working out is your point of focus. You’re focusing more on the action rather than the muscle your working out.I used to do that a lot when working out my arms. If you’re doing it right then over time you’ll start feeling the burn. I have a nice visible six pack and even after a while I can feel the effect on my abs, so that’s not a possibility. Make sure you listen to her directions and make adjustments if necessary. Also, the sucking in of you belly button is also very very important. It actually creates a contraction and forces you to use more strength than necessary which works your abs even more. Good luck.
ive been sucking my stomach in.. i dont feel anything. im on week 2 day 2 now and i dont feel any soreness from yesterday at all
I don’t feel any soreness either. I feel it during,but not after. I think it’s because her workouts are short so there’s not really enough time for extreme strenuous activities on your muscles. That’s why I do videos like these. If you really want to feel sore then you can do one of those killer workouts like Insanity, or some Jillian Michele stuff, but those aren’t as motivational as Cassey But wait till you do the calves challenge.You’ll b sore for days & that’s saying something since I’m a distance runner >_<.
Om day three complete I feel so amazing right now. Thanks so much Cassy!!!!!
YAY! So excited that I was able to finish Day 8 without completely feeling overwhelmed! I feel so great knowing I finished week one 🙂 I love the feeling of toning my body and I can already tell I am improving.
Nice idea! Good work!
I’ll suggest it on my fitness website!
Hallo, I´m starting today and I´m so glad, that there is anyone who has this whole funny workout program 🙂 Thanks ♥
Hey there 🙂
I am going to print the calander tmrw and start workout.
I wonder one thing, uh.. I tried to see the February workout schedule, but I dont know the password
so i cant see it ;(
I dont use facebook, and instagram, then I dont have ways to see the monthly schedule?
Plz anyone let know me ㅠ^ㅠ
You just need to subscribe to the email list! There’s a box to subscribe at the top left of the page – no Facebook or Instagram required. Cassey sends out emails every once in a while with new videos and a nice hello and sends out the new calendar password every month.
It really helps me! Thank you!!!!! X)
All you have to do is sign up for her newsletter via email! She sends the passwords for the monthly calendars using those. Its in the box on the top left of her webpage 🙂 Hope that helps
It really helps me! Thank you^-^!!!!!!S2
I think I’m going to do the beginner’s calendar again…I just liked it so much and I really want to try perfecting each video.
to the people who have completed this, have you noticed a difference in your body at all? (physic wise) im trying to get in shape as fast as i can (3 months) so do you think if i do this, along with healthy eating plus cardio, and then the march calendar and the april calendar i will be able to get toned for summer? im already very thin, my stomach is almost flat, i just have a lower tummy pooch and my thighs and butt are not toned at all.
ohh i love this i am starting today!!!
I’m going to start today!!!!!
I’m going to start today! Thanks! 🙂
I’m a beginner and i was wondering if you show the roll ups,plans or burpees in your videos? how do i know if i’m doing it right?
Cassey…I must confess you are a true gem…I stumbled on your workouts through pinterest…for the longest time I have been on yoyo diets and a HUGE Cardio Queen..yes I loose weight but never able to wear shorts cuz…I still jiggle…everywhere…your workouts have really opened my eyes and have realized there is more to working out then cardio..you have become my inspiration to actually loose weight and shape my body into a body that I can look in the mirror and be happy….thanks Cassey and continue to do what you do…you love what you do and it shows…..xoxo
I hope I may be able to do this…I lose motivation easily….But I really hope to change myself…I know I’m unhealthy, especially the way I eat…I grew up never eating vegetables. I would spit out the vegetables as soon as I taste it. I’m trying to start eating healthy and am trying to improve myself. I believe this calendar will be the first step. I hope I succeed. Gosh, I’m so excited for this!
Hey Meuni!
I’m Siti and I’m just starting this out too. Yesterday was my first day and i could feel my body aching from the workout (it’s a good sign i hope! lol). But I’m determined to finish it all through. If u need a friend to go through this journey together then you can message me at dolphinfanz@hotmail.com and we could motivate each other k cos I know it could get rough! Here’s to our healthy new beginning! Cheers!
xoxo
Siti
Thank you…I’ll message you or something then…I think I really need a motivation person cause I give up too soon…
Hi Meuni,
I know exactly what you mean, I’m exactly the same ==> Doing nothing, lose motivation easily and eat unhealthy, never eating veggies or fruits..
I’m doing these excersises for a week now (started last Monday) and I’m already getting used to excercising each day!
I am such a quitter on these kinds of thing, but having that calendar with me is like a motivation to me. Weird what a piece of paper can do :-).
On day 7 (rest day) I even felt weird doing nothing. So I looked up a vid from Cassey and did it.
I know, what is wrong with me? 😀
You will notice that, when you start this, you’ll get really used to doing it each day. And feel better! I noticed that I don’t feel so sad or tired anymore since I started this and actually more active.
Ok, some excercises are though! But don’t let that get you down, if you can’t hold an excercise, then stop for a second and proceed. You will notice that when the time passes, you can hold the excercise you couldn’t before. And that will make you proud of yourself.
Hope this will help you get trough this 🙂
Xx
Jess
Thanks a lot…this was very nice of you n quite motivating…I feel happier after reading this…:). ..it somehow help cheer me on to try my best…
I’m supposed to do all the exercises in day 5 for example , one after the other ?
or one in the morning’one in afternoon .. ????
Hey Cassie,
I just started doing the calendar and I can see and feel the effect it has on my body. I think this is a great idea. I would just like to tell you that, you are really inspiring and you are motivating me to become more healthier and fitter. Keep on doing blogilates because I assure you, you are inspiring a lot of people to become healthier and fitter. Thank you for putting time into making this calendar.
xx
I finished the calendar and it has been such a great journey and hopefully it will continue i have learned so much and i can do many things. Is the best decision I have ever made, the first time it was really hard but then the videos would go fast and i was better at it and the feeling its amazing, It truly becomes a life style and I can’t believe i did it this far, Thank you so much Cassey for this, you are such an inspiration, I will keep doing all the calendars they are just awesome
Hi Mariam!
I just finished day three of the beginner calendar and I’m enjoying it so far. I was just curious as to if you could see any noticeable changes in your body after completing this calendar? I’m not sure if this is more of a ‘learn the basics’ kind of video, or one that teaches and also gets you in noticeable shape too.
Good luck on the rest of your journey!
Started today! Determined to do this for the four weeks to see the difference in my body 🙂 But I barely got through the workout today! I will do it though! Hopefully I’ll get stronger 🙂
this is so helpful thank you thank you thank you soo much
So excited to do this! I’m actually doing this for a semester long class project. I can’t wait to see the end results.
Hi Cassey!
I have been doing the beginners calendar for two weeks now and I can see a change in my body, as well as my strength. What I was wondering is what calendar I should do after I finish the beginners one in order for me to be compatible with it in terms of strength, as I said above, this is the first time I have started an exercise routine involving pilates.
Thank you, you are such an inspiration!
Xxx
Once this is ready, she normally releases a monthly calendar. You can follow that. It will be similar, in terms of set up, like the January one that there is now =D
Can this work if i want to gain weight?
You are really awesome!! Im so happy i found your website!! I lost 4 lbs from doing your workouts and using myfitnesspal! i only started two weeks ago!! Im so thankful that i dont need to spend money or join any memberships to do this. And most importantly, it’s working so far!! Hopefully i reach my goal and be able to share my success with you!! I hope you continue to help people like me. You’re such a blessing!!!
Hello Cassey,
I am a fan from Philippines. It is my first day today to try this beginner’s calendar work out and I am completely optimistic about this. Thank you so much for posting this great idea. Love you!
hello, I am Brazilian now started your training!
I have problem of short column shortened muscle ….
medical indication is pilates!!
I’m super excited!
I loved your videos!
I will comment the results here Ok!
I’m on day 2 of my beginners workout and I already feel great about all this!!! 😀 Thank you Cassey for helping all of us out ! You’re truly amazing!! <3 <3
Sice I am a beginner, I know I should use the beginners monthly calendar nut at what point should I start using the regular one?
I am on day 19 of the beginners calendar. Out of excitement I did the drive by inner thighs challenge on day 27…. TWICE!!!!! I loved it. It burnt, in a great way!!! Really awesome!!! Thank you Cassie.
how many pounds can you loose in 4 weeks
Glad you came calves made it almost impossible to walk for two days! Not at all what I was expecting but I truly love your videos! just following the beginners workout makes me feel better all through the day. Thanks so much Cassy!
how many times do you have to do the workouts in a day?
once
Thank you soooo muc, Cassey!
Hey Cassey,
I started your calendar for a few days now. But I am not sure how long I have to be doing the exercise for.. I was wondering what is a good length of workout time for each day is. So the ABC’s workout killed me 75% through the video. But for some reason I am feeling like I am not doing it enough even though it really burned.. what should I do? Thank you!
will this calender help me lose weight because i still have a lot of fat
Hello Casey!
I’m almost finished the begginers calendar what calendar should I follow next?
Hey Tyisha,
New calendars are posted monthly. Once you finish that one you could start with the rest of the followers on the calendar month you are currently in. 🙂
Just found out about this beginners calendar today and I’m so happy I did. I will definitely be sticking to this regime for the next month. I’m super happy I was able to find this because balancing exercise with school is already hard; Having this all organized will make it that much more easy and realistic for me. Thanks Cassey!
Hi Cassey,
Found your blog by accident, and happy I did. On day 3 today, my lower abs are killing from the ABC’s yesterday! Just wanted to say I really love your teaching style, the conversational flow is great. Your fantastic, and I can’t wait to start another series with you once I finish the beginners!
I kind off stumbled across your video’s in youtube, I tried your for beginner’s video and was happily surprised. Now that was yesterday. Today I find myself wanting to do it again, and now I’m all subscribed and all 😀 Because you made this FUN.
I was really, really, and once more really happy to find someone that shares workout’s for free! I’m a student, so would probably not buy anything like this.
Thank you for being such a fresh breeze of bubbliness!
just done with my day 2 workout..feels good..thanks Cassey 🙂
Is there a good way to integrate a 3-mile run two or three times a week into this schedule? I’m a recreational runner new to full-body workout regimes. 🙂
Which meal plan goes best with this calender?
This thing really keeps me sane in days of stress. Thank you for that! I finished my first week today and I am really glad I started with the begginers calendar even if I am familiar with the basic pilates moves and I am not completely out of shape (you’ve challanged this for several times, though!) I have tried several online pilates videos, but your personality and rhythm suits me best.
Wish you all the best, Cassey!
Woohoo!! First day done! I can do this, big determination! Love that I can do this at home when i feel like I dont have the “time” to go to the gym (like this morning at 4:30am). So far i really feel it in my core and thighs. Cant wait to see what the rest of the 4 weeks has in store for me! 9 months till my big day 🙂
I really love this beginners workout calendar. I haven’t been very concise with my workout schedule, so I found this really good to get into! It starts off easy, which is good as I need a small little push to get back to where I was! I actually feel really motivated starting off here, it makes me feel like I can achieve anything, one step at a time! Fantastic videos, thanks you Cassey! Day 3!
First day done! I slept in this morning and I was worried that I’d failed before I’d even begun, but then I got in from the grocery shop, had the potatoes on boil and though ‘flip it, I can do it whilst they cook!’. SOOOOO glad I did.
I don’t know why I’ve waited so long to really dedicate myself but I’m finally going to do it. I just had my first day of popilates and am gonna come running back for more! Can’t wait for tomorrow~ <3
Maybe it’s my fault for not doing the morning exercises (I’m only about 70% invested in exercising and losing weight) but ever since the day 12 calf workout video I’ve been in pain. I’m limping and the pain is in the upper calf and to the back of the knee in both legs. That’s too much to ask of a complete beginner like myself, and I also felt horrible when Cassie asked us to replicate her when she was on her back with her legs completed over her. I felt so bad about myself not being able to go past a 90degree angle. I know she means well and it’s my own fault, but why put that move in the *beginners* calendar. Other than that I’ve enjoyed the workout so far, today I’m on day 15, hope I can do most of it with these calves.
Wow you’re on day 15, that’s an achievement of and in itself. If you’re not feeling proud about that (especially since you’re only 70 percent invested), you should be!
I have a poster on my bedroom wall that says “Your fitness is 100% mental. Your body won’t go if your mind doesn’t push it.” Don’t feel bad when Cassey encourages you to do something you can’t do [yet], just try your hardest MENTALLY. It’s important to tell yourself that you CAN do it, or that you WILL go as far as you CAN, even if it’s not as far as Cassey can go.
It also seems you have a bit of a negative perception on exercise. Instead of focusing on the pain in your calves and telling yourself it’s a bad thing (too much for beginner’s), tell yourself that pain is GOOD because that pain means your muscles are CHANGING, becoming stronger!! And also, your calves are screaming but obviously you made it through the workout, so obviously it’s not too hard for beginner’s!! See what I mean?
Hope I helped, even though I’m a complete stranger.
And don’t give up!
It’s not how skilled you are, or how far you can go, it’s how committed you are!! Stay committed you’re already 50% finished this calendar!!!
Hi, I’m having the same problem! It’s day 14 and my calves are killing me. I’m stretching my claves now every hour, trying to relieve the pain.. But I won’t know till tomorrow if it helped. I think we may have used too heavy weights when doing that excercise.. Is your pain now gone, because I’m wondering how long this is going to last. Thanks! And I’m loving the rest as well, only that particular excercise was kind of a dissapointment afterwards haha.
Day 2! Hope I can make it! <3
Hey Cassey! Thank you so much for all this, you are just AMAZING!
After more than a year of procrastination i’m starting this calendar! Anyone from Morocco here starting today as well?? I’d love to join the blogilates community…..
Heeeey,
I live in Holland and I love your workouts!
I need to say that hahaha.
Thanks for make new workouts!
X
Hello people I need to ask you something. I wanted to start doing some exercise and decided this one would be my routine. I’m in third day ANYWAYS last week I happened to lose weight -too much weight because of stress and eveything happening- OK, don’t throw things at me I know many people want to lose them but my stiuation is not good. Should I go on? Should I wait until I gain enough weight?
Hey! I am currently in the same boat as you. School made me lose weight and I am naturally a small person and have a fast metabolism. As long as you are eating right you should be fine to do these workouts. Building muscle may add some weight back on. I have been drinking special K protein drinks to make sure my body is fueled and getting the proper nutrients.
Working out is not just about losing weight, it’s about building a healthier body. I don’t think you should stop – just make sure you are eating enough calories to account for your daily needs PLUS to supplement the calories burned during work outs. Eat at least 1200 a day, girlie!
I need to ask you guys something. I wanted to start this program and I’m in third day but I need to gain weight -don’t throw things at me ok I’m 16 and I had exams last week and the stress literally killed me and I lost weight- should I go on whit this routine because I want to be healthy or should I stop until I gain enough weight?
doing this routine can get you more fit, i think you should eat healthy and not in small portions like if you want to gain weight, and along with this calendar that really helps tone your body and not be like anorexic skinny
You should eat a lot and also exercise 🙂
I might of been doing it wrong, but the last video hurt my shoulders more than my butt. And I actually did the bridge for the first time in my life – it felt so awesome. DAY 4 DONE THANKS CASSEY!!!!!!!!
I love this calendar.. totally working for me! I dont want to print because it doesnt look at fun on black and white!! lol.
So I just paid $0.99 to get access to this calendar on the app and then saw I could get it here for free -.-
Cassey, thank you so much! You’re gorgeous. Pay no attention to mean people! You’re the first fitness instructor I’ve seen who really inspires me and makes me feel positive and like I can actually do it. I’m doing this month to get back in shape, thank you SOOOO much for this post! <3
I love what you do. Thank you so much for posting the calender.
Hiya, If you are doing this calendar and eating well should you do other exercises, if you want to lose wight as well?
Day 2 clean eating ,Day 3 of beginners workout calendar. I have confidence I will continue the diet was diffacult the 1st day but getting easier each day and I love the workouts they remind me a lot of my old dance classes that I love , thank you Cassey got all your hard work
Thank you for this calendar Cassey! It is so motivating. I am on day 2 and am loving it so far. I am confident that I will get all the way to day 28. This must have taken so much thought, care, and hard work to put together. Plus it’s free! I couldn’t be more grateful.
Hello beauty! I’m one of those girls with fast metabolism and I’d like to know if i can work out at home (to gain muscles/weight) or it can only be done at gym. Is there some tips or video work outs that you suggest me? thank you so muck :}
I’ve just finished day 3!
I’m so excited to keep going 🙂
I’m so happy I started!
Love it so far!!
Thank you Casey for finally giving me a workout I can stick to! I have tried so many diffrent things and it is crazy. I always do about 2 days maybe 3 skip a day and never end up doing it again. I am on day 6 of the beginers calender and I have not felt more commeted to someone or somthing wight loss wise. I have always been the “fat girl” at school and I am sick of it. I know New Years resolutions are always for breaking (I have broke mine for the past 3 years) but I am going strong and it is all because of you. Thank you 🙂
I just started this i am on day 4 im loving it i wanted to know what exercise calendar should i do next should i go straight to jan once im done with this one?
if you complete this calendar in january, an you still have day lefts in the month do the january or wait until the february calendar comes out!
thank you i will
Yay, I am so happy I found your website, this beginner workout plan is just what I was looking for! Thanks so much <3
Starting the beginners workout tomorrow .. So excited!! Wish me luck!
im a little confused. im going the 90 day challenge and I already printed out my meal plan but im not sure what work outs to use?
if you are not used to workout use the begginers calendars first, and then continue to the next month calendar, if not, directly start with the january calendar!
This is something i feel like i’m actually going to stick with. Sounds fun but i don’t know if it’s my self-esteem or something but i really dislike my thighs and shoulders. They’re muscular and i sort of want to know how to tone them down.
I’m just about 6’0 and I’ve got super long legs. Exercises that require me to keep my legs totally straight, like the double leg lift, are near impossible for me. Will it become easier as I gain core strength? After all, only on Day 3 here.
Too say it shortly yes it gets easier. Just do as much as you can and if its really really hard you can alway keep your legs a little bend. And in the end you find that you want to straighten your legs because you have become stronger and want to challenge yourself. Hopefully this helped even a little and you just keep going and you’ll see it yourself.
Hi! I’m in day 4 now & I have the same problem even if I am not as tall as you >< I think it will become easier gaining core strength too, we'll know after a few weeks. Good luck!
What time of the day is the best to work out?
Whatever time of the day you can stick to!
Some people think it’s easier to do first thing in the morning, get it out of the way, and kick your day off right. Also, if you save your workout for at the end of the day, it may be easy to convince yourself you’re too tired to do it. Working out too close to bedtime can make it really hard to go to sleep.
If you have a small break in the middle of your day, do it then!
A lot of people of blogilates are known to be working out at 1am though. If you get a lot of energy at night and find it hard to sleep, that may be the time to expel it.
So really, it’s about what works for you 🙂
Thanks 🙂 This was really helpful. I was just confused if it mattered weather you work out before or after you eat.
I decided to mention you in my blogpost! Blogilates has brought me a lot more motivation than I could ever imagine! I can’t wait to pursue my goals! Check out the post on my blog if you’d like 🙂 http://thejessicalynnblog.blogspot.ca/2014/01/happy-new-year.html
Comments
Isa says:
January 2, 2014 at 10:04 AM
Your comment is awaiting moderation.
Hey guys, day one finish! Be on shape is my plan for 2014. Im very tired now, cause i didnt any exercise last year, i was studying a lot… but this year is different! Everyday exercise and in the final of the year, ill put a bikini and feel very good! Im from Brazil and i saw blogilates in a brazilian blog, im so happy to found this! Thanks Cassey for all support that u give to us and in the end, when i get a super body, ill enjoy better the brazlians beaches’!!!
Cassey u should come here to Rio de Janeiro!!! To show your perfect body for us lol!!!
XOXO
Comments
Isa says:
January 2, 2014 at 10:04 AM
Your comment is awaiting moderation.
Hey guys, day one finish! Be on shape is my plan for 2014. Im very tired now, cause i didnt any exercise last year, i was studying a lot… but this year is different! Everyday exercise and in the final of the year, ill put a bikini and feel very good! Im from Brazil and i saw blogilates in a brazilian blog, im so happy to found this! Thanks cassie for all support that u give to us and in the end, when i get a super body, ill enjoy better the brazlians beaches’!!!
Cassey u should come here to Rio de Janeiro!!! To show your perfect body for us lol!!!
XOXO
Hey guys, day one finish! Be on shape is my plan for 2014. Im very tired now, cause i didnt any exercise last year, i was studying a lot… but this year is different! Everyday exercise and in the final of the year, ill put a bikini and feel very good! Im from Brazil and i saw blogilates in a brazilian blog, im so happy to found this! Thanks cassie for all support that u give to us and in the end, when i get a super body, ill enjoy better the brazlians beaches’!!!
Cassie u should come here to Rio de Janeiro!!! To show your perfect body for us lol!!!
XOXO
Thanks, Cassie! This was really awesome! Happy 2014 btw! did I mention that this is one of my New Year’s Resolutions?
In our school, prom is like month from now and this is sooo going to help!
TY! :))
I would love to try this but I don’t have that much time in the morning, is it possible to do the morning excercises in the evening just before you go to bed? Thank you so much for the calendar, really hope it works, I already love the signing system. xx
Whenever you have the time! There is no rule about when in the day you need to workout. Just remember that working out before bed might spike your energy levels and make it hard to sleep. The opposite happens to me – I can pass right out after a hard workout – but it’s something to be aware of.
I’m getting started tomorrow and can’t be more excited! I started this summer with clean eating and am now adding in a consistent workout plan. I’ve been searching the internet for the past week or so for the place that I think I’ll fit in the most and I think I’ve found it (funny thing I stumbled on this with a youtube search that started with how to use my new food saver for freezer cooking)! I’ve gotten my printables posted to my fridge and am ready to go! Woohoo to starting 2014 off right! I hope you guys make more of the limited edition fit journals available, I want one soooo bad! Doubt that’ll happen though 😛
I just finished the POP Pilates for beginners workout! I am incredibly out of shape, so it totally kicked my butt! I’m looking forward to getting fit with you Cassey! Your videos are awesome! 🙂
Happy New Year everyone!!
I had to quit and start over because last month I twisted my ankle and I got sick soon after. I am so blessed and thankful for Cassey shooting and uploading these videos for us to use for FREE! I never could find the right routine to use for a beginner like me. I can’t wait to get this train chugging! Cheers to a new me! xx
I’ve been doing the beginners calendar, but as school’s starting, i’m getting lesser and lesser time. Will this calendar still work if i do it on alternate day basis? Which means i’ll complete it in two months instead of one.
Hi, is the first time for me here! I’m Italian, so sorry for my english! I’m trying to loose some extra weight, I started during Xmass period and now I found this beginner calendar and I decided to try. First day is gone, and was good! but I wondering: is this calendar enough for loose kg and build muscles? do I have to add some extra workout or something? on my routine I already do 45 minutes of aerobic, is enough? thanks for the answer and have a preatty nice 2014!
Hi Elisa,
This will definitely help you build muscle. The aerobics will help you burn fat away so you can see the muscle. I saw a big difference after I completed the calendar. On a side note, I am learning Italian, would you like to be friends and practice English and allow me to practice Italian with you 😀
Hi,
I’ve been working out on and off for the past couple of years, like I will work out but get off track because school and work get in the way. I’m not sure how to schedule my workouts around school and work without leaving my physically drained can anyone help me figure it out please? I’m currently on winter break until the 13th of Jan. I attend school from 7am – 5pm Mon- Thurs. And I usually work Thurs- Sun nights… Someone please help! I hate that feeling of finally getting back on track and then losing it because of school and work 🙁
Thanks – Jess
Is this program all on youtube? I won’t have to buy any videos or anything?
Yes 😉 all on youtube for free cause cassey’s awesome
I had a doubt, we eat breakfeast before or after the routine of the day? I will start on next Monday!
i am a big big fan of you i love you
Just finished day one on the beginners calendar!!! And I added 1 mile on the tredmill. I can’t wait for the rest of the month!
Is it better to do the blogilates videos before or after cardio? Does it make a differance?
I personally would do cardio before. I feel like it warms me up more. That’s just me though 🙂
Hey there i jus wana ask how many times do i do the butt workout in a week or month i donnu, im skinnynalrdy but i want a buttttt help plz :s
Hey !
I’m starting this calendar on December 1st and I’m so excited! I was wondering is this for toning up or can you lose weight?
Thanks
I was wondering if I could do a combination of lower body and abs every single day. Is that possible?
I have always wanted to work out, but my only problem is that I am not aiming to loose weight. I weighed 125 my freshman year and lost 25 pounds and weighed 100 my sophomore year. I don’t know how it happened and I have had a problem gaining weight ever since. Right now I weigh 109/110, and it’s been about 4/5 years since I have been a sophomore. I am hesitant to exercise because I do not want to lose weight. People use to tell me I look anorexic. So, my question is, will your workouts and plans make me lose weight? Or is there a different way that I should work out to gain healthy weight? I would also like to tone my butt and make it bigger as well as my legs.. Would you or someone.. anyone be able to help me??
As long as you eat enough food, you will not lose weight.
Start with looking up your BMR(how many calories you need per day too keep your body going) and look on what you eat in a day to see if you actually eat that much. If not increase your calorie intake(if you weren’t close which I weren’t, you could eat more of the healthy foods that are high in calories; nuts&seeds, coconut oil, HEALTHY no sugar or oil added peanut butter etc)
When you start eating enough you can start working out. But when you exercise you obviously burn calories which means if you DON’T want to lose weight you need to eat the calories you burn as well. So calculate how many calories you burn working out and add them to how many calories you eat a day. Make sure you eat mostly healthy food. Cardio is the type of exercise that burns most calories so if you don’t want to lose weight you should stay away from that a bit more, but pilates and other types of toning exercises is great!
If you wonder anything else you could send me an e-mail at satle@live.se , I would love to help you 🙂
Thank you so much . That helped alot . I will definitely save your e-mail!! I appreciate it !
If you’re worried about your weight and trying not to lose it and getting toned up, I’d recommend weight training. Any workout really is going to have you burning fat, but weight training will make sure that you’re muscles are toning and growing! And unless you do some really crazy intense workouts, you’ll never look bulky but get a nice tone look and muscle weighs more than fat! I’d also make sure you’re eating the proper amount of calories each day according to your height and body type along with how often you plan to work out. Hope this helps some!
Yes it helped. I’ve been told this, I just need to learn how to weight train because I am not too familiar with it . Thank you !!!
Hey There!
I’m feeling really excited to start this tomorrow! I’ve been getting bigger and bigger over the last few years and I’ve decided enough is enough and I need to get my life back! Excited to try the recipes and tried the cheap cheat ice cream sandwich – to die for!
Wish me luck!
hello! just wanted to say that i can’t print it so im just copying it down on piece of paper! I’m new to this blogilates stuff. I’m trying to lose at least 20 pounds by the end of 2014!
Hi Ladies ! I just wanna ask if this beginner’s calendar will help me to lose weight or will toned my body ? I want to lose weight but I can’t go on a strict diet because I am a college student and need enough foods for my energy . somebody please answer me. Thank you :*
The calendar is more for building strength and starting to tone your body, so if you want to lose weight I suggest doing the calendar but adding some cardio at least 3 or 4 times a week. Even if you can’t go on a strict diet remember to still try and eat healthy. Fitness is at least 70% – 80% diet and the other percent is exercise. I wish you the best of lucK!
When I started blogilates and eating clean i could not believe how much MORE energy i had. I thought i had plenty of energy for someone 25, but eating clean gave me more energy than ever remember having and it helped me focus and pay attention. I wish i would have known about this when i was in college!
I’m so excited to start this! I’m not going to lie, I’m waiting until after the holidays but once those parties and dinners pass I am ready to focus on this! It sounds great!
I just had to laugh when i read this. I’m waiting till after the holidays too!
I had started this calendar and was only on day three when my little nephew passed away. I got lazy and of course sad so I stopped following the calendar and after a while I decided to start again and I had noticed some changes but then things got hectic again and unfortunately I stopped again! But TODAY RIGHT NOW (no excuses!!) I am going to start an complete this calendar! I just have to! Wish me luck!
I HAD to share this. My 7 year old daughter asked if she could join. I told her sure, just if her muscles get too tired to just hit child’s pose for a while. (Which she knows because she also loves yoga.) I guess she noticed something Cassey said, but said nothing to me about it. Then, afterward: “DAD! Does my butt look more lifted to you?” I am STILL laughing!
Hello!!!! First of all I am super excited about starting this! I can’t wait to get in shape for school next year 😀 Anyway What I want to know is what do you do once you finish the calendar? Do you do it again? It would be fantastic if someone could answer this for me??
Stay cool!
Linn :DDDDD
I think after you finish it you can start the monthly calenders. 🙂
After you finish the beginners calendar you can either repeat it or if you are feeling like a beast start the monthly calendars. Good luck!
Starting week 2 tomorrow. This past week has been great. I love that the workouts are low impact, but tough. I use my fitness pal and the fitbit force. Last week I lost 4.5 using these workouts and staying under my calories, healthfully. I love the community here and find you all very motivating! Good luck everyone!!!!
Hey,
I’m starting the beginner’s calendar und I love it. It’s fun and definitely suitable for “beginners” in everything =P I just wanted to mention that, on the 4 day : you’re suppose to wake and do burpees but we didn’t have any burpees until now (so I remember : sorry =) )…. It’s okay I looked it up but maybe some kind of position list with a little directions would help.
Thanks & Shine on ^^
Dear Cassey,
I can’t thank you enough for bringing miracle to my life. I have big calves and i don’t know how to make it smaller eventhough i tried to loose weight (a lot). But after 6 days following this schedule, each of my calves have reduced by about 1,5cm!
I will continue doing blogilates and hope i can achieve the result i want.
Love you and all of your efforts! xoxo
Hi Tuong,
I too have big calves I hate it…you have just been doing the begginers calendar and have noticed a difference? I’m always afraid the calf exercises are going to make my calves bigger 🙁
Hey Cassey and everybody in this amazing community!
I have recently discovered and started the Beginners’ Calendar. It’s fantastic!
However, I have some questions that have been bothering me.Like, do I do only the videos mentioned on the certain days of the calendar? In total some add up to only 20 min. Do I need to combine them with other workout videos so I can get a total work out of POP for an hour a day?
And do I need to do everyday cardio or just these exercises can be enough?
Thank you in advance! I can’t wait to start the program! 🙂
Hi Sarah! You can pretty much add on whatever you want if you need more of a challenge. The calendar is great for people who do not normally work out because it’s only ~20 minutes and gets you ready for the full 60 mins after you finish it. If you need more of a challenge you can do some extra videos that are related to what you are meant to work that day according to the calendar (like ab day, you could add on abs on fire or something if you want to do more). You can also add on 30 minutes of cardio; that’s personally what I did when I was doing this calendar. Hope this helps! Good luck!
Thanks a lot for the reply Cymbaline!
You helped me to figure it out, so I’m starting it now and hopefully it will all go well 😀
Hello Cassey!
I lost some weight over the last couple of months. I’m eating healthy (consulted a nutritionist) and I do cardio 6 times a week but now it’s time to take it up a notch ..well,more than a notch 😉 and to tone my body.Aside from your whole body workout I’ll have to work on my main problems which are the so-called “saddlebags”. I already lost weight in that specific area due to cardio training.
My question is: Which workouts are best for my saddlebags-problem? I thought that doing the tighs,butt and love handles exercises more often might help…am I heading in the right direction?
I know, that you can’t actually lose weight in a specific body area I’d just like to get it into a better shape.
Thank you in advance 🙂
*PS: If anyone on the blog has dealt with a similar problem please reply! *
Does anyone know where I can find the meal plan for this? Or is there not one?
Sorry no meal plan, but Cassey does have some foods in her cheap eats section. Also if you have the time explore this site, you will find some cool things that she has posted in the past. Life style stuff, personal stuff and food stuff for example.
Should I do cardio too? like after videos … or is okay with just the videos ?
Cardio is great! Do as much as you want, it will only help you reach your goals faster 😀
Wow…my butt is on fire! I just finished day one on the beginners calendar. I tried Pilates one time and was soo sore I could hardly walk! But this time I feel like I can stick with it! I’m soo excited to work my way towards a new me. Like I wrote on my blog earlier, I made myself the way I am and I’m going fix those same mistakes before it’s too late! Thank you, Cassey, soo much for making these videos and being the motivator that you are so that I, as well as the other men and women, can achieve our goals!
I have a condition called diasatis recti and was worried about if any of these workouts would just make it worse? Is there a workout that I should steer away from? Cant wait to hear your reply so i can start!
Thank you!!
Hi, I google diastasis recti but i dunno if it is the same thing though. I thk there is answer for ur ques at the end http://mutusystem.com/diastasis-recti-test-what-works-and-what-to-avoid.html i am not really sure if it is the right answer but hope it helps .:)
I had a 1 1/2 finger space and now my space is pretty much gone. I would definitely consult your doctor though, just to be on the safe side.
Hi! just going to start the beginners calender and i am sooo exited! I have just a question, i am going to do all the days, but i have time because it is the holidays for me, but in january i do not have time og energy to work out 6 times a week, is this a must or ? help!!
Hi there,
Just started the beginners everything!! I’m also on the 90 day challenge eating plan 🙂
How does everyone feel about gluten free bread or bread at all? Is it possible to have one slice instead of say oatmeal in the morning? Its my absolute favvvvvv with avocado!!!
Any help would be amazing 🙂 frickin love this site!
Since I’m a Blogilates virgin I’m starting off with the Beginner’s Calender!! On January 1st I want to start the #Newbodymakeover challenge! I am so excited to start :o!! Cassey, you are such an inspiration and awesome motivator! New me, HERE.I.COME!!!
Thats what im doing!!
I’m starting TODAY! I like the beginner calendar because you can start whenever, no dates to follow :))
It’s great to hear that someone is planning to do the same as me
I just discovered your blog a few days ago and I am really excited to get into shape! I would LOVE to start the 12 week total body makeover (I even ordered the diary!) however, I am really, really out of shape and I am wondering if I should start the “beginner’s calendar” instead? If I do start with the Beginner’s workout would I be able to start the 12 week makeover in January, or is the December Calendar removed from the site once January starts?? Thanks for your help!
In her last video I recall her saying there are two starts for the 12 week program. I have recently found her blogs too and I’m hooked. I’ve started with the beginners calendar and I have started seeing results right away, and the workout is intense. I would recommend the beginners workout for you too, but I would also say print out both calendars, do the beginners and if that wasn’t “intense” enough for you on that day, do some from the monthly calendar. I have done this quiet a few times. Have fun!
You could do the beginners calendar in Dec. The Newbodymakeover starts again the 1st of Jan ^^
Hello!
I just wanted to say I am so happy I found your youtube account!! I really want to tone up for New Years especially, but overall get in better shape so I’m going to follow your workout plan and clean eating tips. They’re so easy to follow you’ve made it very clear and easy to understand and I love your passion and enthusiasm in each of your videos! It definitely keeps me motivated. I was just wondering when we’ve completed the first four weeks should we just jump into your January workout plan you’ll have out or is there a way we can go back to the very start? Thank you so much for helping us all out with our fitness goals! It’s much appreciated :)!
Kinsley
Hi Cassey!
I have been doing your workout pilates for almost a year and a half now. Unfortunately I haven’t improved my body image since then. I have been doing them regularly (about two a day plus 2km bike ride) but it is taking a while. I am very motivated and I start your beginners workout tomorrow and I am super excited as my diet and clean eating is going well. I just have a few questions that hopefully can get answered:
– If I do the monthly challenges every month, plus extra exercise (as I ride my bike and do basketball) will I see some improvements in my body?
– Will my hard work be ruined if I have one cheat food (like some nutella or sweet biscuits) every so often (like once a week), I don’t purposely do it but sometimes I need a sugar boost.
– Will this aid me in losing weight, I am aiming to lose 10kg?
Thank you! <3 p.s I love your videos and have been inspired!
Hey there! Im 22 and I’m fro Brazil. I’m about to start the Begineer’s calendar, but I have a doubt: Am I supposed to do the exercises on an daily bases or should I take a rest every other day?
Thank you so much 🙂
Hi! There are rest days scheduled at the end of the week. The calendar has 6 days of workouts then a rest day. Hope this helped =)
Oh! Yes ypu helped a lotm thank you very much. 🙂
Just did your beginner’s pilates video for the first time, after 2 solid months of heavy cardio, and although I did not break a sweat, this newbie pilates routine thoroughly kicked my butt!!
I am a little worries that I will NEVER be able to keep up with all of those crazy leg reps you do, but this is what I’m here for — to be challenged in the areas where I need it the most!
Thanks for dedicating your life to this, and for making the workouts fun with your infectious, bubbly spirit of positivity.
Day 1 completed! I’m looking forward for tomorrow. I’ve thinking about doing this series for a long time and finally I’m starting. Fingers crossed for me keeping up 😀
I have no idea what to do I’m 5’3″ and 130 I am a bit overweight I should be 115, but everyone says I look fine. The problem is that in photo’s I look super big and I know I’m not that big. I exercise everyday I have no idea what to do. Help? I want to be comfortable in my own skin again.
Rachel, I’m 5’4 and 130ish. Knowing my body fat percentage helps me the most! I don’t mind 130 with muscles rather than 120 and wimpy. I struggle with feeling big and bloated–like I’m pregnant again but I’m not. The key for me is minimizing how many carbs I eat (anywhere in the 50-150 range). Wheat especially makes me bloated so I steer clear of that quite a bit. I love to exercise but exercise alone doesn’t work for me. It could be the same for you.
Hi Cassey
I am a total beginner of Pilates and workouts and have just started with your well provided beginners calendar which I love 🙂
But I still have some questions:
– what is the best time for the workout? I usually have time only early in the morning or late in the evening, are these times good for working out?
– do we have to do all the videos of a day in a row, or can I e.g do one in the morning and two of them in the evening then?
thank you so much for your response
<3
cassey 🙁 i try my best to loose weight but i dun know why my weight is still the same
Well if you only did Day 1 then you shouldn’t expect to lose weight 🙂 However, you should check your “diet” too. I mean- if you do a really intense workout and after it you go and eat 2 chocolate bars.. Losing weight? It is not going to happen.
For example. I did day 6 today. But I”m also paying attention to what I’m eating. I am a teen and I live with my parents so I still eat the same dinner as they eat. Only in a lot smaller portions. 🙂 Breakfast and lunch I do myself as my parents are at work. Also I don’t eat any sweets. Chocolate, chips, lollipops, soda, ice-cream and pastries are out of my dictionary. Instead I eat fruits. But not a lot cause those fruits that we all like are high in sugar as well.
It is really confusing at first but once you get the hang of it – you will burn those calories and also fat as C-R-A-Z-Y ! 🙂
P.S Make sure you do some cardio before and after your workouts, it will help to lose weight.
Hope it helped a tiny. 🙂
I used to be in shape before nursing school took over my life. I just printed the beginner calendar to help me get back on track. I LOVE pilates, and I can’t wait to get back into it. I think the calendar and graduation will help motivate me!
Hey! I am going to start the beginner’s workout calendar on Monday. Is there a meal plan to follow or I just do my best to eat healthy until I begin the complete 90 day challenge?
Hi!
I have one question, please somebody answear me!!
Do I have to do any other exercise like walk or run addition to the Blogilates videos?
I want to lose weight (And Im on a diet that my nutriologist gave me)
If you feel up to it after doing the regular beginners excercises try some of Casseys fun cardio or hiit videos. These will help with weight lose.
Hey everyone! I just started doing the beginners’ workout this week. Every time I finished, I could feel my muscles burning! I felt accomplished! 🙂 However, I also felt a little bit light-headed and shake-y. Is this normal?
Make sure you have food in your system and that you are hydrated. 🙂 Also, being well rested can really help.
Make sure you have food in your system and that you are hydrated. 🙂 Also, being well rested can really help.
I felt that way after one of them. Even dizzy and nauseous. I just sipped on water and chewed some gum to help. But it hasn’t happened since then.
Eat 30-45 minutes before you exercise and drink plenty of fluids before and during. Eating right before you exercise might be causing the dizziness and shakiness. Your body is having to digest your food AND fuel your muscles, not good.
DAY 1 : CHECK ! thanks for the amazing video and the whole idea of this! looking forward to practise all of your routines
What’s sign?
It means your signature. You can sign on those days which you have accomplish doing the requirements each day. It is a way of letting yourself know that you are done on which days and keep track.
Hi!
If you mean the ‘sign the bottom of the box’ (or whatever the small blurb at the top says, I don’t remember it- but it’s something along those lines), then it just means you put your signature on the little dotted line next to the word sign. It’s at the bottom of each little square!:) So you just need to put your name next to it to kind of mark it off!
I never knew there was a beginner’s workout calendar until today!! This is AWESOME!! I want to use this calendar, but I already started the #NovemBURN calendar. Is it okay to start with the regular calendar workout or start with the beginners calendar instead?? I’m a beginner and I want to burn fat off. I’m so confused…are they both good for burning fat???
Hey Camille! I started with the #NovemBURN calender too.. and I am a beginner and well, things were pretty hard.. like i can’t really go through all four videos.. I only did 1 or 2 a day.. So I though of dropping that and starting with the beginners calender to ready myself a little now and then her 90 day challenge starting December.. 🙂 I guess if i make it through all that.. by next February i’d be able to keep up with her usual calenders 🙂 I mean, if you think the #NovemBURN ones are okay for you to keep up with, i think you can just skip this whole ordeal of beginners calender 🙂 Good luck girl! And both burn lots of fat.. don’t worry!
Hey Camile and Kasturi,
I started today with the beginners, but i’m definetly in the 12 week challenge.
Do you think it would be possible to go with it?
hey!
thats exactly what im planning to do! im finishing week 1 of the beginners calendar then on 1st december im doing the 12 week challenge!
i dont see why its not possible. if its too hard you could also do one video from the 12 week challenge each day combined with the beginner videos until youre ready
hi,
yeah thank you, that sounds pretty good! you’re absolutely right. at least we can try to do it 😉
good luck!
hey popsters… i think you should first try to do the beginner’s calendar coz our exercise is like going to school which should start first from pre-school then college, imagine that you went to college without learning first from the basic, your body will definitely have a hard time. so if your at novemburn calendar right now i think that you should stop first and try to do the basic beginner calendar, just my opinion, goodluck on doing the exercise though. :’)
Hi Anna,
You are right. I am not sure but at least i really want to try it. If its too hard for me then ill go back to the beginners but thank you so much for your advice 🙂
Good luck 😉 <3
I love you.
Hi POPsters!
I have just started the Begiiner’s calendar as a practice for the 12 weeks challenge!! I’m getting married in February and I want to look as good as possible!! Lots of love beauties, work hard!
Congratulations on the upcoming marriage! I’m starting the beginners in prep for the 12 week as well 🙂 xoxo
I’m subscribed to your channel for a longer time now and i did some of your workouts allready but now i wanna get into it for real. I wanna loose weight and i wanna feel fitter and healthier. Now in the colder months when it gets dark outside way to early,i wanna do something against my lazyness. you are such an inspiration to me and i hope that this will finally work out for me. Cause is struggle all the time…. i am not fat but i am afraight of becoming fat one day. so i need to change my lifestyle!
Just started Day 1 tonight. I was wondering if it would be wise to follow this calendar and Novemburn at the same time? 🙂
It really depends on your fitness level, if you’re just starting off, I’d have to say no because the Monthly calendars can be too challenging for people who even finished the beginning calendar. You’re always welcome to try, the more power to you, but I suggest taking your time and building up the basics. You know your limits!
Hey, I’m new to all of this. I’ve been doing blogilates videos on and off, whenever the mood takes my fancy but now I want to get serious.
Should I start with the beginner calendar or go straight into the monthly one?
Thank you! xxxx
Oh man, I’m really stoked to start this today! With the holidays coming, oh girl you know we have to look good. I will start with this beginner calendar, but I hope to catch up soon. I’m glad i finally found someone as inspiring as you on youtube, but enough talk lets get started. (:
<3 from Kassy to Cassey
On vacay till the end of the week. Starting this as soon as I’m back!! Super excited, always wanted to be fit but I could never figure out a plan that was right.
HI Cassey !
I wanted to talk to you .THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT SO PLEASE PLEASE PLEASEEEEEE REPLY !!
In mid – January , there will be a farewell in my school for the seniors ( it’s basically like a prom) and i have to lose weight from all over my body but mainly get a curvy waist . please help me .what should i do that will help me get my desired body (atleast see a change ) in just 2 months ?! Please help me . 🙁 what should i go for ? the 12 weeks challenge that will start soon or the monthly one ? 🙁 please ANYBODY tell me what should i do ?
I did the beginner’s calendar and by week 3 was seeing a change around my stomach/waist. If you start with this calendar and cut out junk foods, you should do well
I ve just started beginner’s workout calanderand it’s 4th day! I feel a bit of pain in my belly, but feels good. It hard to try some receipt for clean eating since I’m Korean, I will try to make some dessert someday. I love those videos and I love Cassey!! You are so energitic and make me believe I can do it! 완전 고마워용!
Hi guys! I’ve just started. Any tips for the newbie? 🙂
Hey, I will start this calendar soon, too!
Looking forward to it, thanks Cassey!
I already made a plan, of cardio, butt and thighs workouts, belly etc.
But I think that maybe, this calendar is better. Is it okay, to always to this ?
Not only for 4 weeks, I mean, first when I’ll finish 4 weeks of doing it, doing it for another 4 weeks, and then doing it again and again?
Is it ok? Or should I only start with this, and then continue with the other months calendars?
Please, I need a reply! Thanks ♥
I think you could do this for as many months/weeks as you want. But if your goal is to become more fit, then you would need to do progressively more challenging workouts. If you keep doing only this, you will hit a fitness platau. =D
Oh yes, I think you’re right :/
okay, thank you! Then I’ll start with this for 4 weeks and continue with the monthly calendars! 😀
Hey Cassey!
I just finished week 1 of the beginner’s calendar and WOW…blogilates is kicking my ass so far! I have always been mildly active and simply wanted to work on my toning. I am in my early 20’s and thought I was in decent shape but your videos really make me work and I feel sore everyday (but love it)!!! I look forward to your workouts every morning now! You’re so inspirational and I love what you do. Love Always, Jess
First day: passed!!
My arms hurt!But “Sore today,Strong tomorrow”!
I have problem with side plank. It s hard what i can do?
hi cassie..I have just started the beginner’s calendar. .im on day 3 now and I can now do the roll!,…I was wondering do I need to do any other exercises or are the excersises on the calendar sufficent for weight loss and body toning..as I have just had a baby and need to loose weight fast!
Try some of Casseys cardio and hiit videos for weight lose.
guys, i want my legs and butt get skinny. should i do squats? some websites say “you shouldnt, your butt will get bigger” and some websites say “your butt will get upper and fitter, so do squats everyday”
i really dont know what to do, should i do squats or not? 😀
If you want to burn fat, you should be doing some kind of cardio in addition to the videos. Squats will make the muscles in your butt bigger, which will give it a rounder look. They won’t necessarily make it smaller, but they will make it perkier and nicer, and everybody likes a nice butt.
So, yes, do squats, but also cardio.
So super happy that I just finished the first video of the beginners calendar! I had trouble balancing on the leg exercices though, what was I doing wrong?
So excited to try this out tomorrow 😀
This calendar is perfect. it has been 30 days since i started pop pilates. to be honest i’m on 16th day in the calendar because the second day was too hard for me a couple weeks ago . so i repeated the very first day about 2 weeks. now i can do most of the moves and my body is a lot strong.
I’m on day 8! [just finished actually!] And my body does feel like it’s toning itself up! muscles sore and all that. buuuut i’m not sweating like i thought i would, is this normal? lol i feel like i’m not doing much if i’m not sweating. am I over thinking this????
Hi! I’m from Poland. I think I’ll try it 😉 I hope to see the effects 🙂
About to Start the beginner’s calendar! Wish me luck! I’m not very good at sticking to these things but I’m determined this time!
Just finished the Beginner’s calendar! What a great feeling, I am so much stronger and more toned than when I started. For those starting out – keep with it! It took a couple of weeks to start really seeing results but I’m so happy now.
Congratulations and keep going!!!!
Did it take a lot of time to start seeing results. I’m asking because I think seeing results is an extra motivation to keep up! 🙂
Hey.
I started Beginner’ s Calender 2 days ago, unbelivable but i’ m feeling the change, especially i lost most of my belly fat. I can’ t believe that. For many years i’ve been tryin to lose weight and finally i find my right exercise.
I can’t wait for finishing this workout calender. I’ m really excited abot the day 28. Thanks Cassey.
I just done day one and my legs are so sore! I’ve been looking for pilates exercise and I found this. I’m so excited with this!
YAY! I just finished day one and I’m soooo happy and excited to be doing this Pilates Beginner’s Calendar 🙂 I can’t wait to see how strong I will become and I’m very inspired and motivated to continue this journey. I love you Cassey!!
I started doing Cassey’s workouts 2weeks ago. But i didnt know there’s a Beginner’s calendar and i did straight to the normal one. So should i stick to the normal one or try the beginner’s calendar?
Hey guys!
Was just hoping I could get some advice. What are your thoughts on detoxing? I have just started the beginners calendar (day 3 here I come!) and am trying to eat healthy too but I know I have a lot of bad stuff in my system from living such an unhealthy lifestyle. Do you think going on a 3-5 day juice detox cleanse is a good way to help kickstart a new healthy you?? Any help will be great help!! 🙂
Hey Alexi! In my experience, sticking to the healthy diet you’ve chosen, along with tons of water and a cup of warm green tea a day, will detox you just fine. The juice cleanses and all are very monotonous to stick to, and no fun if you’re craving variety, which is something you’ll really want once you get into healthy foods.
The first week of this calender was awsome! but unfortunately I BROKE MY FINGER on day 9 🙁 and i stopped working out and i feel as this is messing things up for me i haven’t done any workouts for the entire week! day 9-16 🙁 and i feel absolutely horrible i want to go back on track because my finger is getting better (: I’m very confused, please help me out and let me know what i can do to get back on track 😮
I haven’t been doing the “wake up and do—-” is that ok?
I’m not doing it neither, but I’m still feeling the results on my body, so I guess there is not a problem… Maybe I start to do it the next week ^__^
I just started this today and just finished the first day. I found it really fun! But as I was doing the leg workouts, my ankle’s started to really hurt. Is that normal or is my form just wrong?
Hi everyone! So I’ve been doing the beginners calendar for almost 2 weeks now, but have added an extra video a day to increase leg/butt strength and definition. I love how they make me feel, and love the sore feeling the next day! I’ve been looking at the app and the females on there have definitely had amazing transformations from thinner legs to smaller waists. I’ve noticed though that my thighs have been increasing in size and are getting a bulky soccer player look( looks good on some people but I’m 5’2, have a small frame and am 107 pounds. ) I’ve had this issue very often and want to stick to Casseys workouts and not stop due to huge thighs that pull at the seams of my jeans and is perfect everywhere else. I don’t know what to do to slim my thighs and look as amazing as Casseys. Please help me out, I’m completely unsure if what to do!
You’re developing muscles in your legs. Maybe when you do the exercises if you try and use your glutes more? For example… when squatting, make sure your back is straight and abs working, and when you come up, press your heels into the floor and use your glutes rather than your quads to lift yourself. That way you target your bum more than your legs. Hope I helped xx
On day 19 of this calendar, doing nothing else in addition except eating well — went to visit my mom this afternoon for the first time in a month, and the first thing she said was that I look “firmed up”. She even pointed out the definition in my legs! I knew I was getting stronger, but it feels so good to be a bit less than 3 weeks in and have someone able to notice.
Just wondering here, but on the beginners workout, with the little leg circles..I felt it WAY more in my ankles than my thighs..any advice?
Make sure you are using your glutes and inner thighs to move your legs in circles, not your ankles – similar to how you use your abs rather than your neck when doing situps.
Hi i am going to be doing this but i was just wondering do you continue on with the current calender after you finish? it seems way more intense then the beginner videos
Hi! I’m gonna tell you the truth… No, you might not be able to finish the month calendar after the beginner one. I did the beginner one and jumped straight on with the month. There are a few differences. First – it will take 40-60 minutes to finish every day. Second – some of the videos in the month calendar is veryyy hard. For me, the bikini ones, victorias secret ones, and 100 burpee one. You will discover which are too easy, too hard and which are perfect. What I did was to take the daily workouts and remove one or two videos every day. By doing this you can control your workout and make it fit perfectly for you! Some days I have very early school (I do my workouts in the morning) and I don’t have the time to do 50 minutes of working out. Some days I just do 20! But it doesn’t matter, because as long as you enjoy your workout, fell that you are getting better and you are doing SOMETHING, your doing it the right way! Good luck with your new fitness journey!
Thanks for this advice! Silly as it may be, I would have felt pretty bad about myself taking out a video or two at first after finishing the beginner’s calendar had I not read that someone else had to do it!
some of us are trying this: https://docs.google.com/file/d/0B250jFXGdsDJM3NZSEVLVHJCODQ/edit?usp=sharing
I just started this, but I was wondering – what do you do after you finish the beginner month? The regular calendar seems intense compared to this.
Done DONE DONE with the beginner’s workout! Like so many others, I feel stronger. I haven’t been working on my cardio as much so I don’t see a drastic decrease in size overall. BUT I’ve lost 4 inches of stomach fat since I’ve started and I am so going to kill cardio for the rest of the month. SWEAT IS FAT MELTING AWAY. BE GONE FAT!!!
I’ve also started the Oct calendar and whew, those are killer workouts (longer too). I’m excited I’ve stuck with Pilates this long. Since my school does the quarter system (10 weeks in a quarter), things move pretty quickly but I’ve found the time to fit workouts into my schedule. Hope I can keep that up!!! Thanks Cassey for the motivation! XOXO
Well, I did the Workout for Tuesday October 8…AHHHH is right…I have to be honest. I did not get through all of the videos. But I will try again today. However I did go walk a mile with my hubby and did some bleacher pushups. He walks slower than me so to lessen the gap between us, on the 100m curves of the track I walked backwards on my tip toes, and on the next lap I did some grapevines. Today I will try some lunges. I have to say I did love the grasshopper!
Hello,
I feel a bit stupid because the fashion now have the tendency to admire smaller a lifted breasts which is fine but.. it doesnt work for me. I have quite a big breasts, not really droopy because I am still young but I would like to get them some kind of a shape and maybe lift them up anyway. The problem is I havent found any single video from Casey which would help me with this problem. And because I really like her workouts, I thought, maybe somebody here could help me?
Don’t think you can. Breasts are not made of muscle tissue so you can’t really do anything to them. You can work your chest muscles (pectoralis) though.
also slightly different question but should answer your question from Cassey: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=REMXsSbTcyM
I wish I could download all the videos. Internet sucks in my country. 🙁 : ( takes 2.5 hours on a 4 mins. video! 🙁 🙁
I just finished the Beginner’s Workout and tried moving onto the monthly calendars. The biggest problem I faced was that the time needed for the monthly workouts is a lot more (45 min – 1hour) compared to the beginner’s calendar (25-30 minutes).
So I made my own calendar (using Cassey’s workouts) that is a step up from Beginner’s but has the same daily time requirement! I just wanted to share it in case somebody is in the same boat as me. It took me a few hours to put together so I hope you find it helpful 🙂 I uploaded it to my google drive.
https://docs.google.com/file/d/0B250jFXGdsDJM3NZSEVLVHJCODQ/edit?usp=sharing
You can click each workout for it to open on youtube! And you can leave comments on the doc 🙂
wow… this is EXACTLY what I needed. I can’t thank you enough!
I also finished today. Congrats to you!!! 🙂
Thanks! Sometimes I have to modify my workouts due to time constraints, but I’ll just use your calendar instead of taking the time to dig around for some targeted workouts.
Thanks so much for sharing!
I’m so glad you find it helpful!!
I just finished day 6 and it was amazing. I love her workouts! I’m so happy to try some of the newer ones because they’re presenting new challenges (like seriously, the first abs day was ridonculous) and I can’t wait to see improvement again over the next 4 weeks.
I feel like the start of the week was a little slow because I underestimated how much time Cassie talks in the videos (vs. the workout, lol) so I added her 5 minute challenges or stretching videos whenever I felt like I had extra time.
Thanks, I have the same issue of not really having that much time daily for the bigger workouts so this is perfect!
Hey Cassie!
I have a little problem, I want to try this workout plan but the problem is that some videos actually do not work because I live in germany and The GMA do not accept some of them :/
Hey 🙂 I had the same problem 😉
Just type in the title of the video on youtube and there will pop up some videos that should work for you as well 😉
So this is probably going to sound like a really stupid question but is this calendar for loosing weight or just gaining strength and muscle? It’s just that I would really love to lose some weight at the moment so I was just wondering if this would be a good thing for me to try out?
Sian
x
I have the same doubt too! I hope someone responds to this!
This will definitely help but I would recommend adding some cardio in. I think this is mostly to make you stronger. I still think you should do the calendar, but maybe you could add in some cardio or pick a day or two to do cardio instead of the calendar. I do Jillian Michaels cardio workouts in addition to the calendar about once a week. You could also try HIITilates. Just know that MOST of losing weight is your diet. You have to eat clean and lean!!
I think it’s still a good idea to do this calendar first and then you can do cassey’s monthly calendars which will be more intense and definitely help you lose weight and get more toned. But this is just to get you started with, like she said, getting stronger and learning the moves. Adding cardio in is a good idea too. Also what i’m doing is finishing this calendar and then doing the sweatember calendar because Cassey made it with a lot of cardio and toning for losing weight because that is the month she did the second dietbet. I’m also finishing the last two weeks faster by doing two in one day so I can get used to doing more videos since the monthly calendars have more videos a day.
But exactly what the last person said, you HAVE to eat clean! It’s so important it will give you the energy for your workouts and the fuel your body needs to burn the fat and tone your muscles.
Hope this helped as well, and if you want to you can follow my tumblr blog where I’ve been posting my experience with Cassey’s workouts and trying to eat healthier and get fit. 🙂
I am almost 30 years old and have never worked out a single day in a my life. I’m 5’5 and 115 pounds, but have no muscles, so I guess what people call “skinny fat”. I figured it was time to start taking care of my body, so I joined a group pilates class a few months ago, and it was SUPER HARD! I signed up for 3 months, but I pretty much gave up after a month because I couldn’t keep up and was embarrassed. This is when I found this site, but I picked a random video and thought I was gonna die. I felt pathetic and figured maybe pop pilates wasn’t for me either.
A few days ago, my doctor told me I had PCOS. She told me I have to start eating right and exercising, but I had no idea where to start. I went to the gym today and did some arm workout routines with dumbbells (obviously watching youtube vids while exercising, also embarrassing), but didn’t know what other workouts to combine with it and went home. I was feeling discouraged when I suddenly thought of pop pilates. I found the beginners workout and finished day 1! I couldn’t keep up, but I’m determined to try my best and not let it bring me down!
This is beginning to look like an e-mail, but let me just end by saying THANKS Cassey for this calendar! If you could also give some pointers on how to start working out at the gym while following your beginner’s calendar, that would be AWESOME! I don’t want to hurt or strain myself, so any words of wisdom would be much appreciated. <3<3<3
Will I have results doing beginner’s calendar with BLOGILATES 90 DAY CHALLENGE: MEAL PLAN??
I did the Beginners calendar last month and am doing it again this month because I don’t feel like I’m ready to move on to more advanced routines yet. I have not tried the 90 challenge yet, but had considered adding it now. I lost about 5 pounds last month…and I wasn’t eating the best that I could have…but baby steps! I also did the best that I could with the calendar…didn’t complete absolutely everything every day. Everyone is different, but I think that anyone should see a difference by making these positive changes to their life!!
Hi Cassey and everyone! I have just finished the beginners workout calender and am not as strong as I thought I might be after completing it – I struggled during the last week of videos. I was looking forward to starting the October calender but I think I might struggle with it too much. I was contemplating doing the beginners calender again but adding in extra videos every day to challenge my weak spots (arms and abs). I feel a little bit disappointed because so many people have talked about their amazing progress on the beginners calender and how they went on to do the regular ones afterwards. What should I do? Am I just being a wimp or has anyone had the same experience as me? I would really appreciate any feedback xxxx
We’re all at different levels! Don’t give up! You may have to do the beginners again, and that is ok! When it becomes easy, that’s when you have to change it up. If you don’t feel comfortable yet, just try and do the beginners again. Don’t think of yourself as a wimp! Just don’t overdo it by adding videos. Good luck! 😀
Hi guys, I’m a 17 year old girl who goes to high school. I’m obese and I really want to start losing weight before I go to university next year. I’m about 160 cm and I weigh 76 kg. I’ve lost 10 kg so far, but for the last 2 months I haven’t been losing any weight and I know this is mostly because I haven’t been working out quite as often as I used to and I’ve been eating unhealthy again. I tend to skip meals then I’ll just eventually eat everything I could lay my hands on. I don’t even workout everyday anymore. I think I’m also gaining my weight back.
Things have been pretty bad at home lately and my life has been quite chaotic. I’ve been feeling depressed and stressed out and I have no one to talk to so I tend to turn to food and my computer for comfort. I also don’t have any motivation anymore.
Please, someone help me. 🙁
Dré
Hey if you need someone to talk to or motivate you just message me
Nina
Hey, Dre, I am in the same situation you are in (same age, situation, etc. albeit I weigh more than you do, about 220 pounds) and am looking to find someone in the blogilates community to message for support and was hoping we could support each other through the journey!
I found this site from a link to the Sailor Moon workout and after browsing came upon this beginners calendar. I’ve really been needing to get in shape again and I think this would be great. Going to start tomorrow so I can fit better into my halloween costume next month!
Wow! Day 1 was amazing. I’m always pretty focused on cardio, not muscle and body form. I did it 100%, but it was challenging. Made me feel a little out of shape, but I’m SO happy I did it!!
Hi, I’ve just started the beginners workout calendar and was wondering if I’m supposed to pair the videos up with cardio everyday? Thanks!
I don’t think so, but cardio helps to burn fat faster! If you feel like you are able to do both the videos and a cardio workout you should!
GOOD LUCK
I just started a few days ago and was very amazed at how much I persperated and i was a little sore but nothing i cant handle and your app i really would like to have it but i have a kindle and can only buy apps from Amazon so if possible can you try to work on expanding your area of work
Just started pilates today – with your help. I’m loving it so far. Will definitely try to make it work everyday and very excited to see results. I’ve been working out at the gym for two years now, mainly cardio and strength, but I’ve been told that pilates is perfect to get everything tones nicely, so we’ll see how it goes. 🙂
Hi Cassey!
I just started with today and i feel the buuuurrrrrnnnnn!!!! I really do NEED your help because I was just lifting my body and it hurt like hell. But you were so enthusiastic and encouraging on the video that I actually finished it! I was almost dead but I found more strenght to add another 10minutes by doing your POP Pilates stretching for flexibility. ^_^
Thank you for the calendar and I’ll try my hardest to finish it! Love from the Philippines :-*
What excercises am I supposed to do after I finish this?
What should I eat during the beginner’s workout?? Can you please make a food calender for this? :DD
Im gonna start this workout tomorrow. WHEEE so excited!!!
I’m starting tomorrow too! I’m so excited, I hope we can make it! 😀
i have serached a lot of workouts, but im happy that i have found the best, but i have a question that, I dont want to lose my weigth, i just want to have a healthy and nice body 🙂 am i on the right way?
I’m so irritated at myself. I started the calander and got to day 9. Then I got sick and had to skip a day. Maybe I’ll just try to do day 9 & 10 in one day! Whew! That may kill me though!
Whew! I’m a gymnast and I’m finding this difficult! Shows just how much I can improve. I started this once before and didn’t complete it because (as usual) life got in the way. I worked out without blogilates though, and I’m getting back into it by printing this out again and starting over.
I’m going to make it through this time! 🙂
Yay!!!! Finished day one!
Do you have instagram? If so what is your user name?!?
Hi im Bianca, 17 years old and im not fat (5’8 160 pounds) but I do consider myself on the road towards it so im gonna start your blogilates workout calendar TODAY, actually I already did the whole begginers workout playlist then I found your calendar haha, so technically i’ll start tomoroow but omg I love your wokouts they are so cute & fun to do <3 Wish me luck ^_^
Oh my gosh we’re like the same size!! Good luck!! 🙂
Done with day 1! I’m so happy I found your channel, I coulnd’t make it without you, thank you!<3
I’m going to start your program by tomorrow. I subscribed to your youtube channel and very enthusiastic to start the exercise. My goal is to get rid of my belly through your exercise. Pray for me.
omg!!!! i did it!!!!
today i finished the beginners calender!!! who would have belived that??? i’m so proud.
thank you so much, cassey!!!!! <3
YAY me too!!! are you going to start the October calender next? I was thinking I would run one day and do blogilates the other day…
GOOD LUCK!!
The best thing about this calendar is the excitement. I just love it – if it’s a new video, I’m excited to try it out and see what it’s all about, and if it’s a repeat video, it’s so cool to see how much I’ve improved since the last time!
I have been trying to lose weight since I had my son 2 years ago. I did pilates everyday but I wasn’t getting the results I wanted. I found your videos and started to do a few of them but there are so many of them I don’t know which ones to do for my type of body. I have the lower pregnant looking belly, thick thighs, love handles, and weak arms. I’m only 5ft tall but I weigh 158 lbs. I have been eating a lot healthier too. Can You PLEASE Help me Thanks Krystal
Hey there! Congrats on taking your first step to a healthier you. I’m not sure if you are aware, but at your current weight you are in obese class I. A healthy weight for you would be around 128 pounds, so if you think a health issue may be stopping you from losing weight you should see a doctor. I definitely recommend Cassey’s workout plans! They work your entire body, because unfortunately we cannot spot reduce. Cassey also has meal plans posted here on her website so that you can be guided towards healthier eating. Try the 90 day challenge, and you’ll be amazed! My Fitness Pal is also a great resource. If you need a bit more motivation, Cassey has been doing some DietBet challenges recently. You sign up and bet $25- that money will get you to stick with it! Then, you have 4 weeks to lose 4% of your body weight. For you, that’s about 6 and a half pounds. If you lose the weight successfully, you win, and get to split all of the money that people bet with the rest of the winners! You can keep doing DietBets until you are at your target weight if you find them motivating. Sorry that this was so long, but I really hope that I was able to help! Good luck 🙂
Woo! Buns are burning! Done with week 1. Now off to go have a healthy lunch with my sister!
how can i win the nike shoes ? i really need but i cant efford myself
Hi Cassey,
I’ve been doing Pop pilates for nearly 3 years! I do 2 workouts 3 times a week and go jogging 3 times a week and boxing 2 times a week. Usualy for lunch I have a healthy salad with home made dressing, have almonds for snaks or vegetables and treats every now and then. But I’ve actually put on weight over the couple of years and I don’t even know why and sometimes I just feel like giving up. Im 17 at school still so I get pretty busy I live at home still so I eat dinner what evers there. Maybe its because I need to clean my liver out first? I havnt had my girl problem for at least a year now and I wen ton the pill but that just makes me cranky and put on weight so I stopped, do you think its my hormonal issues that cause me to gain weight or is just the age of being a teenager? I’m really stuck, so if you could help me i’d be great! Love you so much Cassey your my inspiration! xx
Hey Marike…
Regarding your liver…I suggest you do that 🙂
Get Andreas Moritz’s book The Amazing Liver and Gallbladder Flush!
It’s amazing, i just did my second detox this week. He’s the most qualified when it comes to liver flushes, and he knows exactly how to do it.
Take care and hope that helps
Gaining weight from age 14 to age 17 is natural. I would be more concerned about not having a period for a year, especially if you are not on the pill. Your body may not be getting the nutrition it needs and you may in fact be exercising too much. I would suggest going to your gynecologist and explaining your feelings about the pill, but also let her know about the lack of a period. I’m 22 now and have been on the same pill since I was 16 – I lucked out with no negative symptoms the first pill I tried, but this is rare. Many women try multiple pills until they find the one that works best with their hormonal makeup. Good luck!
Hi,
Thankyou for you responses!
I will try that liver detox, it sounds fantastic!
Just this past month I have been using this Magwore insence stick thing I got
from my Acupunturist and just last week I got my period back! How insane is that,
apparently the stick is suppose to regulate hormones and help with cramps.
I was thinking of trying Casseys workout calender and I was wondering if its good results? 🙂
xx
You might have PCOS like me, ask your doctor (it’s not serious, just makes it pretty hard to get pregnant).
Hi Madison,
Yeh I already had a scan for that but I don’t seem to have it but thanks
for letting me know 🙂
Just discovered this Blogilates and love it. You can do 2-3 workouts and not be bored. I am truly a fan. GAME TIME!!!
You should make a series of videos to help ballet dancers! I have poor balance and there could be a core video and one to stretch your feet. This would be vary help full for me to advance in my dance career. Thanks!
I just finished Day 4, Feeling good, and my 4 year old love to do the videos with me. It’s our Mommy and Daughter morning work out 🙂
hola, me pueden ayudar podrían pasar el calendario en español.
seria de gran ayuda
Gracias
hello, can you help, it could be the calendar in Spanish .
would be helpful
thanks
It would be really nice if the calendar had some language options, such as Portuguese
Congratulations for the work, xoxo
I’m on Day 5 and loving these workouts but as I read these comments I’m getting mixed signals and wondering if I am doing the calendar correct. I only do the videos that is listed on that specific day, Is this correct of should I be doing additional videos everyday on top of what is listed?
Do each of the videos for the day once. If you have extra time and energy, you can do more videos if you really want to. But since it’s the Beginner’s calendar, to avoid getting overwhelmed or burned out, don’t overdo it. I just finished Days 1 and 2 on Saturday and Sunday, and after I did the listed videos, I added one or two of her short cardio ones. I know during the workweek I won’t have enough energy to do extra videos.
Do the videos listed below.
The first week, I just did the videos of the calendar. From the second week, I added a stretching video before and after each list, every day. The result is wonderful, I am not horribly sore the next day at all. Even after the last week (even though all my muscles were shaking at the end of each workout). I highly recommend the stretching 🙂
This is my first real calendar after doing the beginners calendar in August. Adjusting to longer workouts has been hard but I’m getting there.
I don’t weigh or measure myself because I find I can become obsessed, and I have worked really hard over the last few years to achieve some balance and not become fixated on numbers.
Since starting these workouts I have not wanted to step on a scale or grab a measuring tape once. Instead I go by what I look like in the mirror, how my clothes are fitting and how I feel.
Today I feel amazing. I feel strong and healthy and confident. For the first time I feel strength in my body. I looked in the mirror today and I can see abs developing, with a line! I have calf muscles that you are starting to notice and even my inner thighs are a wee bit tighter. My butt is bigger, but its firmer and lifted instead of sagging and soft. No more “skinny-fat” for me.
I love this woman.
Hahah – oops! Wrong calendar!
yeah, you do ah really good job! just found your videos on youtube an i really like it!! greetings from germany 😉
Hey, so I’m only 13 and i was wondering if doing these workouts will stunt my growth or anything? I already did the first two weeks but i just wanna make sure there will be no problem if I keep doing the calendar.. Thanks <3
Hi Donna,
No, exercising will not stunt your growth. In fact, you should be exercising at your age to help reach your full growth potential. If you don’t exercise, your growth may be stunted. The number of muscle cells you have stops growing around age 12 (the number, not the size – the size can grow after) and your bone density potential peaks around age 25. So you need to keep exercising to build up to your potential, and after that age, all you can do is continue to exercise to maintain it.
Before starting any exercise program though, it is usually advised that you double check with your doctor if you have one. Because each person is different, the doctor may be able to guide you in the right direction. For example, somebody with arthritis or joint problems shouldn’t do certain exercises, but they can do other exercises.
That being said, you are also young. That means there are so many more opportunities to exercise and be fit! Sometimes following an exercise program can be boring, and it really is okay to just go outside and play with friends in your neighbourhood, ride your bike, join a sports team if you like that stuff, play soccer with your friends, the many variations of tag..going swimming. But if blogilates is working for you, GO FOR IT! 🙂
Alless
-A medical student.
Thanks a lot Alless! I do like Blogilates and I think I’m going to keep doing these but I’m also going to be more active, play and have fun. I’m glad I don’t have to keep thinking if I will stop growing or anything 🙂
I forgot to add that as long as you are eating healthy and you are in control of the exercises you are doing (such as following this calendar and not becoming obsessive about it), you will be okay. What I am trying to tell you is that sometimes if somebody becomes unhealthily ‘focused’ on certain exercises and not eating enough nutritious food to support those exercises, it can lead to something called the “Female Athlete Triad”, which does indeed lead to stunted growth from losing weight too quickly. You want to keep a healthy weight while exercising and eating well. That is all 🙂
I saw this after i replied to the other one 😛 I do try to eat healthy tho, but I have like a high metabolism i guess and It’s actually hard to gain weight and by doing these exercises I’m hoping I’m gonna be healthy and fit, but I’m not like obsessed with it so if I can just go out and play with friends, walk or run I won’t be over thinking about doing these exercises! Thanks again 🙂
Hello 🙂
I have a problem , I have REALLY BIG thighs but I think that they aren’t just fat because I played handball for 9 years.
So my problem is that I want to burn the fat but I don’t want my muscles to get bigger.
Apart for endurance running what exercices that you know are right for me?
I would be so so grateful if you could answer me <3
Lots of love <3
I have a question, I dont have enough stengh to do one push up so 15 is impossible, I only can do them with my knees on the ground, is that okay to ??
😀
I would say that yes, it is. I do exercises the way I feel comfortable doing them so I build my muscles slowly. You can do one of those when your on your knees and you make a plank and then push up. It is way easier than real push ups, but you still work out a lot!
Hi! I want to know when is the better moment in the day to do the work out!!!!?
It really depends on your personal preference – the best time in the day to workout is that time where you’ll have the most energy to get it done, and where it fits into your personal schedule. For some people that’s early in the morning, and for others it’s further into the afternoon or evening. I’ve found I can’t work out in the morning, even after having something to eat, so I generally leave it until after school when my energy is at it’s peak. Experiment, and see how you feel!
what if you dont have twitter to show her the pic do u send it on instagram because im not aloud twitter
Hello!
Maybe it’s a stupid question, but I want to start the beginners calendar, and I want to know, I need to do all the videos for a day? Or select one video @.@ i’m newbie and i’m a bit lost!
Thank you!
“Do each video once”… ook
I’m not very smart during the mornings lol
Do ALL the videos at least once a day. Do them more then once if you can though. : )
quick question…
I have been traveling for a week and couldn’t do any work outs as I had no internet connection so no laptop, I had completed day 11. should I continue from day 12 or should I start from the beginning? thanks x
Personally, I would say go with what you think is best for you. A week certainly didn’t ruin the progress you made on the first eleven days, and I would not personally feel the need to start over. Sometimes things happen, and we can’t work out! But you still DID the first 11 days, and it’s only been a week… So I would say, in my opinion, it would be fine if you just started at day 12. That’s what -I- would do. But it’s really up to your personal preference. 🙂
I’ve been doing some of your others videos lately, but I really started “for real” today. Can’t wait to be tone and fit! I’ve never been the kind of person that workout, but I really like your videos and you made me realize that getting and staying in shape is important! Hopefully it is not too late! 😉
I’ve been doing her work outs for some time, I’m not the most bubbly person her personality is bubbly and cute, I’m well cool and laid back and don’t talk alot. Unless a conversation strikes me as interesting I can be sarcastic with a flair of evil /dark humour. One of my main problems to get off my a$$ was motivation. Cassey makes working out fun and I no longer see the need to do the beginners calandar. I take a small break and small break if i need to while working out, my pace is a bit slower but still able to complete the work outs when given a quick second to catch a breath. I don’t own a scale and glad I don’t Id rather just work for it and assume I am loosing weight. I do like sweets though I can’t cut that out completely / and pizza I just work extra hard the next day to make sure it doesn’t catch up to me. I do eat lots of fruits and veggies though. Thanks Cassey for giving me the motivation I so badly need. I actually wow I can’t believe I’m saying this enjoy working out.
I rest for like 5 seconds to catch my breath drink some water and towel the sweat off my face, Or it burns my eyes and skin I’m weird! ( just wanted to clear some confusion) I push myself for the hard stuff, and rewind and do them if i didnt do them all . Push myself and i’ll get stronge. I really enjoy your work outs Cassey. I’ve already lost about probably 5 to 6 pounds on my worst of areas which are my thunderous thighs. and little pooch on my stomach. 🙂
Will this actually help anyone loose weight since this is the beginner s
Yes!!!!!
I have just started week two of the beginners calendar and I am very pleased so far. Some of my jeans are beginning to loosen, which surprised even me because I didn’t expect results so fast, I can now do a push-up (which I have never been able to do!!), I have more energy during the day and when I go hiking I can hike farther and longer than the rest of my family! Also the cardio workouts have helped my asthma become less of a problem for me! Thanks so much Cassey for making this site, I hope to come back with more bigger and better results!
just did day one! excited to see the end results! thanks for all your hard work cassey!
Hai,
Can anybody tell me any cardio activity that can replace running ?
I wanna boost up my beginners calendar and get in shape but I don’t have the space or gym near me, as I work on a supply boat which basically only 70 meters long and in the midlde of the ocean, hehehe. The lack of space is really frustrating but I’m pushing through. Thanks and cheers
Hey Ira. You can find all kinds of cardio workouts on YouTube that don’t require a ton of space. Like cardio kickboxing or core rhythms (which is sort of a dancing thing). Hope this helps!
Hey Jenn S,
Thank you, a really good idea… I’ve been random dancing like crazy in my cabin just get my heart rate up.
Hey, whatever works! I’ve done that before too! But I know doing the same thing all the time can get super boring after a while. You can just google search for free cardio workouts too, and it should give you a lot of choices. Some websites, like Sparkpeople have their own videos too.
How about skipping?
Cassey has tons a of really good cardio work outs to follow.
Try Cassey’s Quiet Cardio Workout. She teaches it on Day 4! There’s also the Fat Burning Cardio Workout on Day 3!
Just finished my first work out and loved it! It’s really amazing!
You give me the energy to push through to the very end!
I’m doing this work out when I wake up in the mornings, does anyone
know if its best to eat breakfast before or after workouts?
It could be personal preference, because I know I like to workout with an empty stomach, but since it’s in the morning, I would recommend eating before hand that way you have fuel to work out. If you don’t eat, you might get really dizzy from low blood sugar.
In my opinion, it is generally better to do the workouts after you eat (or at least have a snack when you first wake up) since your metabolism does not start until you eat.
Hope this helps!
i eat after because im sooo hungry when im done
Before! You need to have breakfast before working out because you need the energies.
I know I like to eat a little something to give me energy before I workout but I do so 20-30 minutes prior. I find that just a little something will carry me through the entire workout.
You got me inspired Cassey, I keep thinking about my future workouts and have so much fun doing them!! Thank you!
I’m so excited today’s my first day, I’m going in with
A positive Attitude eager for results. This is long overdue
for me. So Happy, this is exactly what I need, aleady with
Casey’s help I’m finding motivation and answers to all
questions. YaY I can’t wait for whats in store!!!!!
Just started this morning. Looking forward to making changes that count.
Just started this calendar for beginners, hope i won’t miss a day till the end!!!
Thanks for everything.
I’ve just started on this calendar today (1 Sep) with a bunch of my friends! So excited 😀
I just started today too (1 Sep)!! We’re gonna rock this sweatember! Cheers to everyone also starting now!
Marta x
Me too!!
Thanks Cassey for this calendar. I wanna to participate on dietbet but I’m just a begginer and I tried to do day 29 of august but i failed. Now, I do right. Started basics. thankx, bye bye! 😉 PS: I’m from Brazil!
Oi Nina seja bem vinda!
hey cassei i just finished to do this calendar and I’m loving the results I see. anyways, i want to continue training with you so, i was wondering what should I do now?, i sure need some help… I already wacthed sweatember’s calendar and it’s INSANE, should I try it out or should I keep doing the biginners’ one? or should I alternate them both? I love the results and thanks for your energy to keep pushing myself… I hope you answer me asap… Lots of love from Venezuela. José
Hello,
I’m new here – just discovered Blogilates today (love the site/philosophy/videos!). I recently had a baby (July 5th) but was very active before my pregnancy and semi active during my pregnancy. I’ve been cleared to return to workouts for a few weeks now, but haven’t done much more than walking. My gym membership starts back up tomorrow, but I’ll only be able to make it twice a week (I used to workout 6 days/wk). I’ve never tried pilates before, but I think I’m going to start this calendar on Tuesday (along with some other health goals, schedule/baby permitting) and I’m wondering if the workouts are mostly strength training or if there is any cardio involved. I don’t want to overlap my gym workouts with these, so I was thinking of making gym time mostly cardio time. Thoughts? Suggestions?
Thanks!
Hey Cassey (and all girls)! I am at day 23, but my period came up…. I don’t know, should I workout or not? Any advices? Thanks! 🙂
Period should not stop you from working out. Workouts can actually ease the pain, if you suffer from any, so just use a tampon and keep training! It’ll do only good. 🙂
Hi! I don’t see why that should stop you (unless you normally feel a lot of pain during your period..). I workout all the same.. 🙂
Hello there 🙂
I am new here and I cant wait to get started! I have been trying to loose about 30 pounds for a while now but after of a day or two of dieting and exercising, I loose that motivation to keep me going and turn to those bad unhealthy foods. I saw some Blogilates videos about a month or so ago and thought they were amazing. Cassey is just so uplifting and full of energy and so nice. I am excited to begin a new fresh healthier start ^.^
Finished! I will now start on the monthly calendar! 😀
Ahh! November 3rd is my Birthday!!! Can’t wait to buy those weight scales!! Been waiting so long! 😀 I lost 7 lbs so far in ONE month! Today is my junk food day. 2 slices of cheese pizza. Yummy! I feel really fat today. Don’t know why. I guess it must be my bloating. It had not end since last Friday! Which is 1 week! I hope it ends tomorrow. It’s really messing up my diet because I don’t know if Im full or not. Or can’t tell if my tummy is hungry when I touch it it’s always hard. BUT Thank you so much Cassey! This is going to be my first time doing a Monthly Calendar! Wish me luck. Hehe. On October I’m starting on the Beginner Calendar again. It’s FUN! 😀 Love ya! xoxo
I’m thinking of restarting the begginer’s calendar because I missed a lot of workouts. Also, im gonna try and combine it with Sweatember! I can already tell its gonna be really hard but Im gonna give it all I’ve got and stop if I feel like its too much for me! 🙂
Can anyone answer my question? So you’re supposed to do dynamic stretching before and after you workout, but do you need to for this calendar? Cassey doesn’t necessarily say to, so I wasn’t sure if you got all the stretching you needed from the videos themselves or if you needed to do additional stretching before and after…
If someone could answer that would be great!! (:
Cassey does say that it’s very important to do some stretching before-after your exercise, whetever it’s pop-pilates/runninng/yoga/itc..I do the stretching before the daily videos of this calendar, and I stretch after all of them, but not between them, if you get what i’m trying to say with my shitty english :DD Stretching makes sure that you won’t have any injuries during your exercise and the moves will be much much more comfortable to do, at least I would say hell no to Call me maybe challenge if I wouldn’t have stretching before it !!
Hello from Malaysia! I’ve been working out with Casey for months now and i love her! I heard that gettin gfit is better with friends so i was wondering if anyone wants to be my friend? 🙂 You can email me sheunny@outlook.com xx
Do you think it is important to follow the calendar exactly? Like each day after each day?
I do other classes at the Gym such as spin and think I would get too burnt out if I was doing these as well everyday, so would it be okay to do one day on one day off for example? In saying that, it would mean it would take me 8 weeks to get through this beginner plan instead of the four.
I just wanted to thank you for this calendar. I’m only on day six, but I feel so motivated. I feel like all of these workouts, while being challenging sometimes, are in my reach. I tried starting the regular calendars before but I became unmotivated when I couldn’t complete them. Now I feel like I’m on my way to becoming stronger and achieving one of my goals (being able to complete one of your normal monthly calendars). So thank you for this 🙂
Does anyone know the best way to get their mid-abs in shape? I feel that my upper and lower abs are getting stronger, but my mid section is shot from two pregnancies/c-sections. FYI: I’m on day 24 and loving every minute of it!
I feel like a total failure at the moment. I started this calendar a few weeks ago and have recently missed quite a few days. I know now that I should start the calendar again but I’ve just lost the motivation.. Wah! Why’d I stop 🙁
Don’t lose your motivation! we all miss sometimes if you don’t want to restart just continue, the most important thing is to go on. We can do it!
Hi Cassey
I have just delivered a baby four months ago and I just wanted to get back into shape. Can you please let me know if doing the beginner calendar is safe and adequate for me.
Hi Irene,
I have a five-month-old and have been doing this for a few weeks. I have to modify a lot of things because my abs are shot from three pregnancies. I am already stronger and getting better. I do just what she says on the beginner’s calendar, and then I add 20-40 minutes of cardio (either walking outside or interval training on the ellip at the gym).
Obviously if you have any concerns, check with your doctor. I had a natural delivery, so I have no idea when someone with a c-section or a traumatic birth might feel.
Don’t be hard on yourself for how you look or how weak you seem. Just be thankful that you are starting NOW, versus in 10 years after spending all that time out of shape and losing muscle mass with every year. Today is the best day to start.
Good luck!
Thank You Mighty.. I’m starting today..
My baby is 4 months too! We can do this!
Yayyy Clara… Im starting out today and hopefully I’ll continue 😉
Hellooo everyone!!
Just have to say that Cassey’s videos are amazing I’m in love with them <3 Just began the 4th week of the Beginner's Calendar and now I'm wondering what calendar should i do next.. Any help? 🙂
You could start the monthly calendar workouts. But if you find it too hard, try and start the beginner’s workout again until your comfortable with every move. Always push yourself though! That’s when you’ll see results! Good Luck. 🙂
Thank you 🙂
Hi, guys!
I have been love-love-loving Cassie, ever since I discovered her probably like a month ago! I finally found my motivation for working out 🙂 So I am a few days into the Beginners Calendar and I was just wondering – how much time do you rest in between the separate workout videos? I am trying to do them as close together as I can, but still – just wondering…? Thanks in advance! Keep up the good work!
xo
I don’t think it really matters. Your still burning calories!
I just do them back to back but I have to pause the video to breathe a little bit when it is getting too crazy 🙂 Just take your time, whatever feels comfortable for you is probably the best. It is better to rest and to every movement right than not resting and doing them halfway or wrong. This is youtube, their is a pause button, and I enjoy it 🙂
Hey hey, just have to say, LOVE the workouts so far. I just finished day 11 and it felt great. I must admit though…. I skipped day 10… but I did do a 30 minute run/walk session instead.
I do have one suggestion / request to make. In the mornings when it says to do specific exercises, I can’t always remember exactly what moves those are, or what video they were in. For example, this morning I was supposed to do double leg lifts, and I couldn’t remember exactly what those were… so I improvised and did some sort of leg lifts. If there were printables available that broke down the basic moves, it may really help us beginners out a lot.
Thanks for everything so far!
I’m having the same issue with the morning exercises. I forget which ones they are :-/
hi cassey,
your videos and workouts are really cool and fun (aaaaand hard!!!! 🙂 ).
i did day five today and i am so proud of myself.
thanks!!!!!!
and i really do appreciate that you show vegan recepies. i’m a vegan for about four an a half years and i think it’s so important to eat less meat and animal products.
lots of love from germany.
lena
A couple of months ago, I started working out and eating clean. I cut out processed foods and replaced it with lots of veggies and fruits. I lost a couple of weight and I was really happy. I worked out for an hour a day 6x a week and sweat my butt off. A week ago, I thought I’d give myself a little gift for all my hard work and ate two pieces of peanut butter and chocolate chip cookies. After that day my sugar cravings kicked in. I ate every sweet things I can get my hands on and I kept shoving food down my throat until I was stuffed. I felt horrible, like I was about to blow up at any given moment. But I kept eating. I would tell myself its okay and I would start eating clean again the next day, but it didn’t work. Most of all, the foods I ate made me feel lazy if that makes any sense. I didn’t feel like working out anymore and I have lost all motivation. I gained weight within a week and I very much want to start fresh and eat healthy again. Also, my family isn’t really that healthy. Whenever I want to clear out our house with unhealthy junk foods they would complain and say I am being too healthy. I apologize if I am being too dramatic, I just needed to get it all out of my system. That is all. Have a great day/night! 🙂
Its hard to resist temptation when they are in front of you 🙁 ate some chocolate today! But I’m gonna give my best workout ! My family hardly eats clean, When ever they bring junk into the house I either throw it away or give it to some poor person. They hate me for it :). All my friends are overwieght and they are constantly binging. It make it difficult for me to control my self when im with them. But i keep giving them lectures on healthy eating. But they still gave me chocolates on my birthday! 🙁 🙁 and i gulped them all
I feel you, I am at the same point, Kalsee. RIGHT NOW. Exactly, I started living/eating a lot healthier & doin’ pilates, running itc..About six months ago? Maybe 5. However I end up into binging too. Yes, there’s all kinds of sweets, icecream, cookies, microway-stuff to eat in my house, because of my family doesn’t mind that much what they eat, and they keep buyin that stuff, no matter what I say, “because I don’t have to eat any sweets, if I don’t want to..” Ok, I didn’t want to at all, before…
At first, when they ( my family) weren’t home, I started to eat slowly and more and more everything unhealthy, like thinkin:”I diserve this, I haven’t ate this for ages, It’s ok, just a bit..More, that one..I should stop, but I can’t. I just can’t. Little bit..More.” until I feel very very sick. But no I don’t puke anything out. I am afraid of it.
Every time after binging, I feel horribly quilty, I feel like noooo, I can’t do aaaaany moves or go out, I feel disgusting, wanting to stop and start livin’ “normally” the very next day.
So this is my sort of confession about this stuupid thingy, which is controlling me very badly right now. But funny, I feel a bit better, now that I had write about it..
Same here, I started five to six months ago. I have been reading books, watching documentaries and researching about it all. I always counted my calorie intake. I also measured everything, making sure I wasn’t eating too much or too little. I guess my body went to “starvation mode” because I restricted myself with a lot of food and my body felt deprived. And now I’m attracted to sugary things more than ever. In conclusion with my researching, I’m starting to think I’ve developed an eating disorder but I don’t want to believe it because it won’t do me any good to think negative. I am no longer counting my calories and I eat whatever I am craving. I’m still trying to eat healthy, but if I have to be honest, this past few weeks was definitely not healthy at all. I’m a very shy person and I don’t like drawing too much attention to myself, I’d rather be left alone. I mean I have friends but whenever I’m with them I just like to listen to their conversation and laugh when someone says something funny. I just feel like everything I could think of sounds completely stupid and boring and I don’t want to make things awkward. Therefore, I remain silent and speak only when they are talking to me directly. Also, I’m always stressed out. My parents don’t really communicate towards each other very well and sometimes I just want to disappear for a moment, you know? It’s so hard. I was at a normal weight before I started all this, but I thought it wouldn’t hurt if I tone up, build some muscles and burn a bit of fat in the process.It may sound like I’m complaining but I’m not. I agree with you about writing about it. It feels great to know that someone out there understands and feels exactly the way you feel. It feels so darn good to express your feelings somewhere you know you wont be judged. Its like an elephant is being lifted off your shoulder! Lol. But even with all this crap going on, I’m still thankful. Where is the fun in life when everything is always great, right? I’m always up for some challenge. It keep things interesting. ~Smile :3
You know, the best thing to do is to not cut out everything you love cold turkey like that. What I do, is buy something (like, a bag of gummy bears) and then I divide it into about a weeks worth of sweets to have a few each day. That way, I can have some every day to cure my craving, but because they are already pre-packaged for a number of days worth, it is way more difficult to gobble them all down at once. Works for me!
Hi Kalsee!
I would just like to say I suffer from the same thing. I’m an all or nothing kind of person so i bounce between obsessively exercising and then bingeing. People say just cut out sugar, but if you’re anything like me that’s almost impossible.
What really helps me, is that if i know i’m going to break and eat something sugary is to eat ‘healthier’ treats.
For example i’m a chocolate freak. But instead of eating normal chocolate I only eat 70% dark chocolate now and I allow myself one small piece a day which keeps me sane. The rich coca gives you satisfaction so when you eat a small piece you don’t get that ‘more’ feeling you get from regular chocolate. I also recommend making yourself healthy treats like some of the ones listed in the recipe section here. You feel like you’re having a treat but its really healthy. It keeps you sane and you don’t feel deprived xxxxxx
Nope, I’m not Kalsee, but a binging-sugar addict too and wanna thank you for your advice 🙂
I don’t see improvements. Maybe just alittle but their not visible. I have a bad eating habit. Sometimes I would overeat. Then today I overeated again. *Sigh* Im going to keep doing this Beginner Cal and some of those month workouts. Everytime I overeat I would tell myself “I will start over tomorrow” and eventually few days later I would end up overeating again. If I overeat I would torture myself for an hour. Doing as much workouts from you as much as possible because I’ve overeated. This time Im going to promise myself. Tomorrow I WILL NOT overeat again. If I do then I will torture myself. Im serious this time AND FOREAL. I’ve been working out hard for the past few days. Im going to have a fitness test in a few weeks so I’ll be able to see how much i weight. My scale broke years ago and my mom don’t have enough money to buy one. Since my birthday is coming up I’d might as well buy me one. 😀 Best. Birthday. Present. Ever! [Well to me it is ;] Sometimes when I eat those boxed food I feel soo bad and unhealthy so Im going stop. I always like to start new on Sunday or Mondays. I just don’t know why. But tomorrow Ima have to start out new and STOP overeating. I hate myself for that. I eat healthy but sometimes I would over eat. Thank you so much Cassie! I am currently in the 9th grade, weight about 165 lbs and I need to lose 30-45 lbs before 10th grade. I need to start a healthy life. I hate my weight. But I have alot of confidence that I WILL lose that much lbs before 10th grade. I will be STRONG and go through all these workouts no matter how much torture it is! 😀 I quitted for 2 weeks but then I started to miss doing this so I just can’t stop, even on school days. Love you Cassie!
Hey why don’t you eat 6-7 small meals through out the day? that stopped me from over eating. Always listen to you body. It will tell you when to stop eating. And eat in silence and comfort. You will notice a positive attitude in yourself when you eat as much as required by your body. Stuffing food just makes you dull. Use this as a motivation. But don’t feel guilty about food. Love it and it will nourish you. Quality of food is more import than quantity.
Don’t buy weighing scales for your birthday. You will just feel more sad towards your body. How about a pair of running shoes instead? or an inspirational t shirt or a cute sports bra? It will make you love yourself and help to motivate you. Don’t buy those weighing scales. they are just horrible things.
Lastly don’t punish yourself rather love yourself and your body will thank you for it.
What kind of meals? How big? What did you ate? D: You sound like you could give me a good, healthy advice for stopping my mad foodwar between healthy-overating sometimes way too much. I’m not trusting into google anymore 😀 so if you could describe those meals little more for me…
I’m not Ashi, but I think I can help with the many meals per day thing. Try to have protein at each meal (eg. a banana as part of your breakfast or lunch) and fibre (eg. porridge/oats at breakfast/lunch). Proper protein and fibre make your metabolism process your food a little slower so you don’t get hungry nearly as fast. Cassey has some great quick and cheap snack ideas here on the site, so if you’re not sure of what snacks to eat, try some of her ideas.
I agree though – get some new running shoes or some funky workout clothes for your birthday, and don’t worry about what the scales say. They really do lie. Here’s an example for you: I was at my specialists clinic once and had also been weighed twice the day before because I had to have anaesthetic (and they need your weight for that). I hadn’t eaten that day because of having the anaesthetic so my weight was about 62 kgs. The next day when they weighed me at clinic I had eaten breakfast and everything and apparently had lost 1.5 kgs. So the scales are liars.
I also agree with Ashi’s comment when she says don’t punish yourself – it’ll just make you feel more guilty in the end. Love who you are instead – and if you can’t love who you are yet, at least accept that you are who you are and it’s okay to not always eat right.
Thank you so much, I tried the porridge and dark bread which contains a lot of fibres :). Drinked water, ate at least 5 little meals at day. And it worked out very well today, kept me away from sugar 2 entire days. Until today I kinda skipped breakfeast and dinner (aaaahh moron!!), cause I felt like “aha, not hungry, don’t have to eat, no problem, no hunger, no binging, yay”…. But yeah that was stupid, cause I end up to binging, hardly, again. 🙁
I understand, clearly, that I shouldn’t skip any meals thinking like “yay i’m free from binging now, i don’t have to eat if i don’t feel like it”, and I do understand also that hating myself doesn’t make me any healthier – just the opposite of it,..But when you have binged, you feel like you’ve cheat yourself badly and the only thing you feel like to do is to purge. Which I can’t do cause I’m very very afraid of it.
(Oh. And one seriously odd thing: when i stopped binging 100% for two days, i felt very tired, couldn’t get up and continue this beginner’s calendar for example. I dunno, is it about the bloodsugar going lower than usually cuz i stopped suddenly the sugar?)
Thank you, and sooorrry for another long long confession, but no can do, i’m a teen girl after all.. 😀
What do you guys do after you finish the beginner’s workout calendar?
The monthly workout calendar.
Hi Cassey,
I just wanted to say I love your videos so much. I have been trying hard to loose weight since late last year. So far I’ve dropped about 10 of the 40 pounds I’m trying to loose. Since discovering your beginners videos I have been super motivated to eat clean & train harder. I’ve even started running again which I had stopped because of a previous knee injury that I have since recovered from. I just want to say thank you for making your videos & being so positive. You have really changed my life.
Thank you,
Zarya
I started the beginner’s diet and workouts and in the last week I’ve lost 4 pounds! I don’t expect that extreme of weight loss to continue, but I gotta say that’s some fabulous motivation!!!! Thanks Cassey!
Hey guys! I was at day 16 when I get sick and I spent like a month in bed. Do you think that should I start over again or at day 17? I dont know what to do!
thanks!
I’d definitely start over. Not only did you take a break from excerisize but your body just got over something, so I’d def take it from the top and go verrry easy on yourself, and check with your doctor before you start again. My two cents. 🙂
Hi! Can i take the beginners workout? Although i don’t wan to lose weight i just want to tone my abs, butt and thighs,
I have a question for everyone next week I’ll be done with my beginners workout what should I do the last three days of August. I am really nervous about trying her monthly calendar. Should I take a chance. I dont think I’ll be able to do all. I’ll modify. Any suggestions and advice?
I’d just try to do as much of the monthly calendar as I can, and skip out on whatever I can’t do
Thank you so much! It’s better than nothing. I might go back and for combine the beginner plus one or two of the monthly. It depends I start school on Monday. I’ll do what I can.
Hi guys! I’m only on day 3 but I was wondering what I should do after I finished the beginner’s calendar? Should I use the regular workout calendars right away?
Hey there! You don’t have to worry to much about that so early in but the regular workout calendar lets you have the opportunity of having the newer workouts wiggled into your routine. If you think that you could’ve done better on the beginner’s go do it again. You’ll want to try and perfect your posture/technique next time. It really doesn’t matter. Go knock yourself out!
I have the same question also.
Hello. I am sixteen from Malaysia. I am 162cm and 49kg now. Basically I am trying to get rid of the flabby are around my waist and tights. I had been following blogilates workout on youtube for months but i never stick to a particular Plan so I’ve just started the beginners workout. I find it really hard when it comes to abs exercise. Anyone have any idea to help?
Secondly, I always feel either very hungry or lose all my appetite after my workouts. Can anyone explain this?
I’m 17 weighing in at 186.6 pounds (just lost 2.1 pounds in five days!)
I have a couple of questions.
Should I do two days at once since I haven’t started on the first day of the week or does that not make a difference?
Is it okay to continue my regular workout at the gym AND do the beginner’s calendar too? Does it matter or make a difference?
Also if anyone lost weight in this…
well I lost 1.4 Kg in one week! and you should see my body. It is like as if I’m doing for months. I really like to do this calender because It makes me wonderful! I’m looking forward to doing it next day.
I am 13 years old and I am wondering if anyone seen any changes while doing the Beginner’s Calendar. Also if it works to.
Hi Cassey! I really love how you are motivating women everywhere to get fit and healthy. 🙂
Just wanted to ask, is the beginner’s workout okay to use for moms who just gave birth? 🙂
Thanks in advance, and more power to you!
Just finished day 6.. it was extra hard because im sore and sick!! ONE QUESTION THO.. woah caps lol are you suppose to do all the exersises in one time period? ive been doing them throughout my day, sometimes two at once then another one later.. is that ok?
Should I do this workout calendar if I want to loose weight? Please answer this 🙂
Hey! I’m 12 years old and about 110 pounds. Yeah.. I really want to exercise more since i’m a lazy potatoeee. Any suggestions? I’m thinking of doing the beginners calendar but not sure if I should do all since i’m a bit young.
Join a sport!!
Hey guys! I was just wondering, do I have to do cardio while doing these workouts? I know there are cardio videos included but do I have to go running and stuff aswell? Thanks. x
Hey Christina, if you’re a beginner, I’d suggest just trying to do these workouts first because your body hasn’t gotten used to the exercise and it may be harder than you think. Also, if there’s too much exercise to do already and you add cardio, you’ll be too tired and feel motivated and want to drop it. Anyway, if you can handle it, add cardio as it helps build your body stronger and drop pounds quite quickly. Remember, it all starts in the mind and every bit counts. You can do it ! Good luck 🙂
Hey guys.. i really want to share thing… I really feel like giving up because i dont see any much result but rather my pants is getting tighter. i have been doing this for the past 2 weeks. This is quite depressing when dont much result. Can anyone assist me if its normal?
You’re probably gaining muscle! Bodies fluctuate all the time.The scale can’t tell you how you feel about your body. trust yourself and keep at it!
I’m super underweight and I really don’t know what to do. Any suggestions to gain weight the healthy way?
By the way, I’m only 13
Hey! I used to have the same problem, but now I am at a much healthier weight 🙂 Try eating often if you find it difficult to eat a lot at the same time. Also, sometimes you have to push yourself a little bit, like having a couple of more bites even though you might feel full. It’s about changing your habits, as what you are eating now is not enough for you. Nuts are great as they are very healthy and high in energy. If you need to eat more, try alternating sweet and savoury things. For example: having your lunch, then something sweet for dessert and then you will hopefully be able to eat something savoury again in two hours or something. Worked for me 🙂 Also, don’t exercise too much cause that will make it very difficult to keep any weight on. And don’t compare your food to others’, if you have a high metabolism you might have to eat more than them to be at a healthy weight. Let it take time, It’s great that you are taking this seriously. Let your parents help you as well! Best of luck, take care!
Thank You so much. I’ll definitely try that
try to find out why…dont you eat enough? then i would suggest to try to eat bigger potions or snack more (healthy snacks)..
Are you eating enough? Are you full? maybe you just have a very good metabolism…at your age it is possible to be underwheight without a reason. I know what im walking about because I’ve also been very skinny and was super underwheight until the age of 14 although I alway ate soooo much…but you will gain weight eventually (I am 16 now and almost normal…still slim but not as extreme)
Another possibility would be doing more sports (i don’t know how active you are) to gain muscles..they are even heavier than fat so it could help..
The most important thing is how you feel! would you like to change your body if you didnt know that you are underwheight? If you are afraid something might be wrong or your weight could cause some damage see the doctor. he can also give you tipps.
I hope that was helpful 🙂
Hi guys! So, a few days ago I posted that I am not motivated anymore and I just wanted to thank everyone for answering. Yet I got really helpful comments not to give up I’ve stopped doing the workout calendar by now, because I just couldn’t notice any results although I did every single workout. Actually, I feel like the cellulite on my thighs has gotten worse and they look more “wobbly” and that is exactly what I did NOT want to happen. Has anyone of you had the same experience? If so, what did you do? Shall I continue doing workouts (start the beginner’s workout calender once again) or just leave it for a while?
Whenever I start a new fitness routine I don’t notice any differences for at least a month. When you workout your muscles build up lactic acid. Sometimes your body will begin to retain water in order to flush this lactic acid out. I notice that my thighs swell a little after a hard workout. I also get puffy when PMS comes around. I would stick with a workout routine if you can. Results sometimes take a while but they are worth it. Maybe try some different workouts if motivation is an issue. I switch up my pilates with bellydance and kickboxing. I find a set routine too boring and that feeling of “obligation” just kills my motivation. So, I just set aside time in the morning for a workout and decide what I want to do when I get up. You could also try measuring other successes. Maybe you didn’t lose any inches or weight this week but you’re more flexible. If you want quicker results make a few diet changes in addition to working out. Give it a little more time if you can 🙂
I’m not sure where you were when you stopped the workouts, but I’m up to day 18 now and I haven’t seen too much change in my outside appearance yet. I know that I can do some of the exercises easier than I could on previous weeks, but for a while everything felt harder because of being sore. I think that this is something you should see through to the end, because it is possible that there is noticeable change that you haven’t seen because you are being to critical of yourself. For instance with the cellulite, the only thing I can say to explain that is maybe you’ve burned off some of the fat that was masking the cellulite and you just need to burn off the cellulite now, or you expected it to just go away as soon as you started working out and it hasn’t so, because you want to gone you are focusing more on it than before. It’s hard to say, but I think you should have faith in yourself and Cassey’s calendar and keep trying, but honestly, if you didn’t see or feel any improvements and found the exercises really easy, you may just need to move on to Cassey’s regular calendars!
I hope that you keep going!
I’m super underweight and I don’t know what to do. Any suggestions to gain weight the healthy way?
i just did day one a friend showed me it and i was telling her how unhappy i was with where i am and let me tell you it was tough
I just wanted to say thank you to everyone who has posted on here. I’m only on day 2 and wasn’t feeling very motivated since I’m still sore from day 1, but reading everyone’s comments has really encouraged me. I’m so glad to see that the blogilates community is so supportive. I know next time I’m feeling down or need motivation I can come back here and get it =)
Hi Cassey ! Hi everyone !
Just wanted to share my little story with you, if it helps motivate a few people out there who’re just like me 🙂
I’ve been following Cassey’s website for quite some time now (many months to be honest), her energy and her will to motivate everyone around her is amazing. But I’ve been doing that sitting on my couch/bed like a lazy potato (with extra butter) 😀 I’ve finally gathered the motivation to get up and start working out again.
I’ve started the beginners calendar because I am terribly out of shape (I’m on day 18). I’ve always been active in my teens (martial arts and basket ball and badminton), but ever since I started college and law school, things got out of control. I was financially independent and I didn’t had the time to work out anymore, and without realizing I woke up one day weighing 205 lbs (eating junk food because I do not cook). Needless to say that it’s quite depressing going from fit to obese.
I’ve found Blogilates browsing through the internet. And I knew I found a jem. I just needed this motivation to just getting started. While vacationing in Spain, I’ve decided to take my life back in my hands and JUST DO SOMETHING. I’ve started the calendar, and I was sore, so sore… I felt like I was drowning in my own weight, struggling to go through every tiny exercise – which for many I used to be able to do when I was younger (and lighter). But I didn’t give up. I kept on going one day after the other.
I’m not done yet, the journey is only starting- but what I can tell you so far, it’s that I’m less sore. And by day 5 I was already adding one or two cardio blast. The most amazing thing is that I actually feel better – I’ve lost 13 lbs (swimming helps too).
So if you relate, even a little, to what I wrote, and you are also trying to find the motivation to just start working out again: Just do it ! Try one day ! You’ll be sore, you’ll struggle. But it gets better. You get better at it. Your body will respond better to it. You’ll feel better, and proud, and strong. IIT’S WORTH IT !!!
Thank you to all the Blogilates community and to you Cassey if you ever read this – thank you so much for everything that you do <3
Cam.
PS: don't judge my english too harshly – I'm french 😉
Wow! That’s amazing! Congrats! Thank you for sharing your story!
I am a beginner and trying to start Day 1. I am completely out of shape and find it very difficult to run a full block. I was wondering how long should I start out running? Or how long should I start biking for? Any opinions? Thanks!
Hey Marissa!
You aren’t alone with the whole being out of shape thing. I just started running again and I’m running/jogging a mile for a week or two then I’ll try two miles. Just keep adding on the miles until you’ve reached your goal. Mine is to be able to run/jog 5 miles without stopping. Good luck!
Hi Cassey! I just wanna take the time to express how grateful I am to have found your YouTube channel and website! You made it INCREDIBLY easy for me to follow through your videos and calendars, so now I don’t feel lost when starting to workout and shed some fat. You are blessed to have such dedication to your viewers/fans and I know I’ll be a loyal one for a long, long, time. You give such great inspiration and motivation and just ughhhh you’re an amazing individual. And for all that you do, I thank you. Best regards!
Hey Cassey!At first me and my mom were looking for some workout videos and found one of your videos we did spring fling part 1 and we loved it but unfortunately we didn’t make it all the way through I my mom is 30 and she just had a baby so she’s trying to lose the baby fat, I’m 13 and 150lbs, .. the reason I wanted to lose weight was because I have a twin sister and people are always comparing us ans she’s the skinny one. So what my mom did to motivate me was she said she’ll give me $1 for a every day for a week for doing ur workouts. I made to 5 days but couldn’t make it farther. What motivated me again was ,well we went shopping today for uniform and shoes for school at the mall and I saw all these skinny girls walking in their shorts eating cookies and cinnamon rolls and when we went to the store and my sister was getting her x-small shirts and I was getting my large shirts I felt VEEEEEEEEEEEEEEERRRRRRRYYYYYY self-conscious. When I got home tired from walking for 4 hours I instantly got on my kindle and signed up for ur newsletter an did one of ur videos an today was challenging for me by I decided to test myself,so today I also had church at 7:40 p.m.and it usually ends at like10:05p.m.and my family goes out to eat every time an I know it’s very bad to eat that late so there I was sitting there for drinking my water while watching everyone sip their sodas and eat in front of me ,but anyways I hope anyone can give some advice:) any advice is goods thanks!:)
Hi!
I read your comment and I wanted to say you should do this for yourself, if you live for people’s aprooval you’ll die from their dissaprooval, trust me, once you start doing this for your health and happiness instead of your looks or what others think, you’ll be happy to do yout workouts and you’ll feel motivated.
I’m on week 4 and I’ve never kept a routine for so long, i’ve had ups and downs but I have done every workout in the calendar (on some days i had to skip w.o. so i did both the next day).
In my case, pilates give me more energy, i feel motivated and happier. I may not have the body i aim for yet, but when i’m feeling bad or comparing myself to others i remind myself that i’m working towards my goal and i’m doing my best. the only person you should be better than is the person you were yesterday, so keep it up, i promise you can do this!
you may feel sore or less motivated some days but you’ll get better, pilates give you flexibility, balance and strenght.
if you need anything, please send me and e-mail, i’ll be happy to walk with you towards our goals.
fernandaontiverosc@gmail.com
hugs and the best wishes from México :*
Yay! I have someone who is the same age as me and we have the same problem ! So I am about 150 lbs. myself and im about 5’4 and my brother is soooooo skinny I can put my index fingers and thumbs together to measure his and thigh and he eats A LOOOOOT of junk food he doesn’t even drink milk or water that much. My mom also keeps complaining about how I have to lose weight and not eat a lot and I started to also be self-conscious about myself too also my mom said she would give me money also for every workout so I got motivated a little bit. Anyways I’m barely starting this today and I’m ready to be sore ! Just remember to not give up! Also when school starts I play volleyball and basketball so that helps me out too anyways its cool to see someone my age who has a similar problem to me !
I would like to talk to you or be your friend if you want to just try to contact me any way at :
Twitter : @vianey_swift13
Kik: vianeysel_swift
Instagram : vianey_swift13
I hope we can talk soon!!!
By,thanks for your advice,I really appreciate it,sorry I took me so long to respond Binary…but I’ve been sick and really busy and haven’t clenched blogilates.com for quite a while now:/ and of course I’ll love to be it friend.
I just wanted to tell everyone who’s struggling not to give up! I started the Beginner’s Calendar in July and followed it as closely as possible.. There were some days when I skipped a workout for whatever reason, so I did 2 days the next day. At the end I could definitely see improvements in my strength, flexibility and even though I still have fat to lose, I could see muscle definition I’ve NEVER SEEN IN MY LIFE, especially in my stomach, legs and booty! But, I didn’t feel like I was ready to move on to one of the “regular” calendars yet. There were still videos I struggled with on the Beginner’s Calendar (ABC Abs anyone? >.<) and I wanted to make sure I was keeping good form with the "easier" workouts before I moved on. So I decided to start the Beginner's Calendar over and this time do two days worth of workouts at a time. I also add at least one of Cassey's stretching videos to the workout if there's not one on those days. I would seriously recommend this to anyone who feels like they're not quite ready to move on, or is still struggling with their form, and having neck and lower back pain like I was. This time around I really try to concentrate on using the right muscles and not straining my neck and back. In a week I was noticing MAJOR improvements! Don't worry if you have to take breaks or can't make it all the way through! Just keep at it, give 100% and you WILL see changes, and it WILL get easier! I actually crave these workouts now! The first time I thought, "I can't wait to go home and workout" I actually LOL'd, but it's every day now! Trust when I say, one day you'll make it all the way through ABC Abs without stopping, and that day will be glorioussssss! 😛 😀
I just started 5 days ago. And I agree with you about ABC abs. and I had to do 2 days workout today as I didn t do yesterday!!! It is so nice to hear that I am not only one here… reading what u wrote just gave me extra motivation… Thank you!!!
Loved it! 🙂 Except I don’t know if I was doing the leg part right… since my butt wasn’t really hurting by the end. But my legs were sore… so we’ll see tomorrow morning I guess? 🙂
well, i’ve been trying to lose weight, cause i hate pretty much everything about myself. so, i hope that this works. i just need that extra push, to eat better, which i already eat good, but you know, cutting out the sugar and eveything else. this is hard. ugh.
Hello! Please share the blogilates bikini blaster calendar! 🙂
thanks so much!!! =]
Day 6 done….n looking forward for the relax day yay… 🙂 🙂
Im feeling so gud…n feels like my body is changing…
Im trying to started eating clean too.
Thnx a ton Cassey!
Respect n Luv from India
I am trying to play day 8 the pop pilates for beginner but it wont load for some reason it stopped after a few seconds any tips I really want to be committed!
Hey guys! I need your help! Just did day 18 but i’m just so unmotivated. Do you have any tips to stay motivated throughout all 4 weeks? Thanks a lot! 🙂
You have 10 days left! By now you should have seen some improvements in your form and maybe even physically. You are more than half way through already. Why give up now?
I know how you feel about motivation, before trying blogilaties I always found it hard to keep a routine! What helps me is I post on instagram and facebook after I complete a day. I use a phone app to crop the day off the calendar and check off what I completed! This works for me because I look forward to people who like it, I know nothing much, but my brother started liking my posts on instagram and that was a big deal for me! I hope you can find what works for you! Keep up the hard work!
I basically look at the calendar and see how far I’ve come and what I’ve done and I basically end up feeling like i’m only cheating my progress if I back out now. P.S i’m on day 18 too 🙂 just keep going, we’re almost there. Hope that helps
C’mon… you reached day 18! You are sooo close to finish the four weeks, and after that you will feel really good 🙂 Cheers
Hi not
Just keep doing it and try read the inspirational stories…
Think about how you are going to look in future… this will surely motivate you.
Be patient n keep going
Gud Luck~
Hey! I’m in the third week of this plan and I’m loving it! Would you recommend combining this workout with spinning classes twice a week? The workout is quite exigent by itself, and I’m afraid of over training. I’d love a piece of advice 🙂 Thanks!
Hey Cassey,
I just did Day 9 today and I simply LOVE your excerises and breathing technique – I’m feeling so well and relaxed and I’ve got sore muscles but it’s just great! 😀
Thanks a lot for your motivational videos! 🙂
I’m at day 6, and I’m FEELING IT! It’s burning and I’m so sore, but yet so excited! I’ve never had this much motivation before and it feels AWESOME! At day 1 I couldn’t do the roll-ups properly – I really had to hold my thighs and wiggle around like a dying whale to get up. But just now, on day 6, I actually did the roll up properly!! I feel so proud and happy about the change in only 6 days! I haven’t seen any major change yet in body, but I feel better all around <3
I’m getting ready to start the Beginner’s Calendar you’ve posted and I’m really excited! Quick question: can you direct me to where I can find videos/instructions for some of the exercises that are listed under the “Wake up & do____” portions of each day? For example: how do you do a roll up, elbow pushup, Hollow Rocks, etc.? I tried looking on the Blogilates website, maybe I missed them? PS: Really like
how you have all the videos organized by day, makes it easy to follow
I just printed the calendar and was wondering the same exact thing! Never heard of a roll up or hollow rock..
I ended up googling/you tube-ing a lot of the moves and hoping they were what Cassey had in mind. Then I kind of just browsed the blogilates site for the stange-named exercises haha:
1. Hollow Rocks (day 18) demo can be found in her video titled “Hardest Ab Challenge Yet + Running Vlog”
2. Teasers (day 25) demo can be found in her video titled “Pop Pilates Bikini Ready Abs Workout” dated on June 8.
3. And then the last one I wasn’t sure how to do was Elbow Push Ups (day 13 & 26), this demo is in her “Never Ever Getting Back Together” workout dated Aug 24th.
Hope this helps Samantha 🙂
Oh and here was the you tube video I found for the roll up demo:
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bEnVg7yG5wI&list=PLGgQC9I81F6-UU2oJ6VuIOq2sdASHvFxT&index=4
I have a question about Cardio and the beginner’s calendar. Is the Cardio included into the calendar workouts or do I need to add the Cardio blast at the end of the workout? Before starting this I’m just used to do cardio and than strength training on the days I’m exercising.
Hi! I just started the beginners calendar, and i really feel like it’s working. But i was wondering, is it best for me to start with the beginners calendar or the august calendar?
Hi, I’m 12 years old and for a few weeks I have been regularly doing videos but I have never actuallt followed a calendar but I’m thinking of doing the beginners one. I was just wondering whether or not at this age I should follow the whole calendar or just cut it down a bit as I am quite young?
Hey! I think because you’re 12, you don’t need to stick too much to the calendar. You’re only 12 so don’t push yourself because you’re still young – as long as you’re eating well and doing a good amount of exercise everyday, staying on a calendar or doing anything that isn’t necessary for you right now doesn’t need to be a big deal. But, if you do decide to do the calendar, don’t force yourself to do everything if you don’t want to because you’re still growing (: have fun.
how many minutes do the workouts take up each day? 30mins or what? 🙂
The workouts start off around 20 minutes or so and then begin to incrementally increase in length and endurance. I’m around day 12 and the workouts are around 40 minutes. This is without extra cardio or warmups, etc. I believe at the end the workouts expand into an hour. I think it’s a great way to ease into working out, although sometimes I’m like “nope, can’t do that yet” even though I’m not terribly out of shape (I’m definitely one of those “skinny fat” people).
Hi everyone, I desperatly need advice! I’ve been training every day for 3 weeks with my legs, and about 10 days with my stomach. I’m avoiding bad and unhealthy food, too. I am not seeing any changes yet, and I’m not expecting to see some right away, but I would like to know, that if I wanna train my abs and thighs, isn’t a better idea to mix up my own calender and work out routine, instead of using this one, since it doesn’t have that much focus on legs and abs in particular, but more the whole body?
What I do is I do all the daily exercises and then I do the abs and legs. Also, amp up the cardio if you want changes. But its good to follow this because you train your whole body. You dont want nice legs and abs with weak arms and back, right?
Loving your Beginners workout so far, I am really excited to get active again! Thanks Cassey <3
Hi, I’m 16 and a beginner. When I workout I aim for the legs, arms and stomach. Whenever there’s a workout for abs, for example, crunches, I always put too much strain on my neck and I just wanted to know how I can fix that. Thank you!
Hi Monica! I am 15 and I’ve got the same problem.. The 8 Minute Ab Workout is always killing me and I have to pause several times throughout the video cause my neck hurts too much. Generally, when I workout my abs, I feel the pain in my back, not as much in my abs. Kinda strange, right!?
Sorry I couldn’t tell you how to fix that problem, but I thought I’d just let you know that you’re not the only one struggenling with it ;)!
Hi Monica
As you are a beginner…your body is not flexible
I suggest you not to strain at any point just do it slow when you feel the pain and gradually when you complete the beginner’s calender your body will get flexible.
I know its hard…but you have to keep going..try to have steam bath or massage to ease the pain
Cheers~ 🙂
How do you print it out?
Just klick on the calendar and then print it out however it works with your browser ;).
I’ve been doing the beginner’s workout calendar for a while now (I’m on day 12) but so far I haven’t been able to see any results or changes . Am I the only one with that “problem” or is that quite usual?
I know what you mean! Don’t worry, it takes time, but even now your body is improving and getting more in shape. later on when you do the same workout you’ll realize that it has gotten easier, so keep working at it! 🙂
Well it’s only been 12 days… It’s not really a miracle cure, its a lifestyle change.
Did my day1 for the beginner and man, i am feeling it already!! Love the breathing technique!
Just done day 3 today. How long did it take people to see results? What did you see?
I’m on day 12 and I can see my abs getting back some definition. I’m naturally thin, and seem to build muscle fairly fast though. My boyfriend, who was in the army and went through basic training, said that it takes about 6 weeks to start seeing any substantial results.
However, I FEEL better. The first day I struggled with the full body workout. The beginning of the second week it was already MUCH easier for me to get through it. I already am adding extra videos to increase the length of workout time. I also feel a bit more energized – though not as much as someone else might, since I have some health problems.
just started today and i have finished Day 1, feeling good. so excited to change my lifestyle. 😀
Greetings from Turkey 🙂 I really love you Cassey !!
Hey POPsters!
so I’m nearing the end of the beginners calendar, but i’m trying to plan/decided on what to do next. What did you guys do after this calendar?
the august calendar 🙂 + my cardio routine
I am starting this today! I have lost 23 pounds since May and have 19 more to go! I really hope this gives me the extra push I need to get the last 19 pounds. Is there a printable version of the calendar somewhere?
https://www.blogilates.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/06/Beginners-calendar-new.jpg Here you go!
How effective is the Beginner Calendar workout? I’m debating if I should do this one or challenge myself and do those monthly workout calendars.
Hey Estelle!
I actually was doing her regular calendars but i decided to go back to the beginners because I wanted to get my forms down. Sometimes, her regular calendars were too hard so I couldn’t finish all the exercises. I’m not n bad shape, I am an athlete and run but her beginner’s workout was still challenging! Its all how you make it 🙂 she gives you modifications and directions during the video so you should opt for the challenging poses if you want a challenge.
best of luck!
Thanks! (: I think I’ll try out the regular calendar first to see if how much I can get through the workouts, and if they’re too hard, I’m going to do the beginner calendar instead (:
I’m planning to start this calendar today, though in reality I’m very skinny, I just want to strengthen my muscles by doing Pilates…
Well,,, I hope I don’t die in the next 10 minutes!
Cheers
I have some x foods for you.
Xanthren (herb)
Xi gua (Chinese watermelon)
Xouba (small, sardinelike fish found near Spain)
Also, U foods.
Ube: purple yams
Urchins
Umeboshi plums: preserved and delicious little Japanese plums used an accompaniment to food
Upside Down Cake
So I did day 3 today and damn did the second video burn. Because I haven’t had a brilliant eating day today, I’m gonna do it again, let’s gooooo
OMG. Just did day 2, and ABC time wasnt that hard, although im sure i didn’t do it with these nice long legs. That’s just too hard. But after this i am shaking as hell, even when im just leaning on my wrist!
This is going to be a haaaard time!
But yes, all for that sexy body!!
Although summer is nearly over, who cares?! 🙂
Love you casey x
cant believe i lost 15 pounds by finishing this <32627887236 omygosh!! and i think the eating "clean" helped A LOOOOOOOOT omg im so happy!! cant wait for august calendar
ummm this is amazing (on day 5 right now) but should i be pairing it with cardio, because i dont want to get muscles under my fat and bulk up as i have a lot of fat especially on my waist
I asked my boyfriend to join me because we’ve been eating so unhealthy lately and he thought the workouts were insane! lol only our 2nd day. I can’t wait for the 3rd day workout tomorrow 🙂 Thanks Cassie!
Hi all,
I’m just wondering, are these videos for each day enough or should I add some cardio?
Cassey doesn’t write anything about it but I’m sure it would be useful…
Thanks, E
Hey Estelle!
I actually was doing her regular calendars but i decided to go back to the beginners because I wanted to get my forms down. Sometimes, her regular calendars were too hard so I couldn’t finish all the exercises. I’m not n bad shape, I am an athlete and run but her beginner’s workout was still challenging! Its all how you make it 🙂 she gives you modifications and directions during the video so you should opt for the challenging poses if you want a challenge.
best of luck!
Hey E 🙂
I usually do her calendar n the morning and add a couple more cardio videos if I feel the need to. On nights I’m super motivated i’ll come home after work and do a cardio day from her regular workout calendar. Hope this helped!
I have done up to day 4 and then my hamstrings were killing me and so I did stretches because I couldn’t really move or do much. And now I have stopped following the calender and been doing my own thing – still every day, cardio, strength, abs, stretching. Also Pilates at my gym.
I was wondering if anyone else has drifted but are still working out to POP Pilates??
Or after the Bubble but workout on day 4 had sore hamstrings??
Hi Cassey and everyone here! I’m on day 3 now and wondering if i will lose weight just by eating clean and doing this calendar? I try to do a cardio warmup before the calendar will it help me lose weight quickly? I’m about 5’1 and 154 lbs..
Beginner’s calendar… DONE!
Oh, I feel just amazing. I’m 20 years old girl, totally normal weight but I want to gain more strength. It’s been only a month but I can already feel & see my muscles! My butt looks amazing and you should see the way my boyfriend is looking and touching it. XD lol.
KEEP GOING POPSTERS! It will be totally worth it! and THANK YOU CASSIE, I love you.
Hi beginner POPsters!
If anyone is looking follow each other as we progress through this beginner’s calendar and onto the future monthly calendars you can follow me at the blog I started yesterday, sarablogsilates.tumblr.com !
I’ll be mainly posting about my progress through each days workouts and also hopefully some encouraging and motivational stuff as well! I would love to follow you back as well!
Have a great day!
Sara
Along with getting you started in Pilates , does this calender help you get a flatter stomach,get better legs etc ? Thanks 🙂
P.S: Great Job Cassie ! Your the best <3
Hi Cassey! So I was just wondering if you have any exercises for the 29th because I dont see it! Thanks (:
Hi Cassy,
I absolutely love your videos and energy. I used to do a lot of exercise years ago anywhere between 7 and 12 hours(possibly more) a week which consisted of Wing Chun Kung Fu and Chinese Lion Dancing, weight training until I found out I had two slipped discs and had to stop everything,have an epidural injection to help my muscles recover and from then on I did physio exercises everyday.
The thing is I still try to keep fit but I get to a point where I lose a lot of weight then I get ill and then have to stop everything because I don’t even have energy for yoga and then I think bugger it I may as well eat crap and I feel sorry for myself, all not very constructive I know.
Before I got ill last my workout consisted of mainly zumba, advanced bellydancing, sometimes a bit of cycling and yoga and of course some pop pilates. I was up to about 10 hours a week a while ago and then I got a through infection which wouldn’t shift for about 6 weeks and of course being ill I put on weight, felt depressed and started bad eating habits again and now i’m back to square one.
I’m awaiting a blood test to see if i’m deficient in any vitamins and I also know from a personal trainer friend that when you lose weight your immune system is lower and I’m also a TEFL Teacher which is a stressful job.
I feel I’m lost and frustrated and demotivated like never before and I LOVE exercise but sometimes I think I burnt myself out years ago and every time I try to get fit and eat healthy I get ill and I really, really need to lose weight.Apart from the slipped discs(which are under control now) I have a creeky knee which is another reason I need to lose weight under Doctors orders.
If anyone was or is in a similar position tell me how you got out of this vicious circle. I need help.
🙁
Leanne, Frustrated in Spain.
Dear Leanne: I had the “food issue” you mentioned a couple of years ago and I’m still trying to get rid of the extra wieght. I’m going with a professional nutrician, and the diet is helping me as a guide, but the most important part of loosing weight for me is the fact of convince yourself that you deserve to be fit an healthy, It’s a mind issue for me, and also, is important to understand that if you are very overweight, unfortunaly, you don’t loose weight as fast as you gain it… be patient with yourself, and writte down everything you eat, so the next time you go up to the scale you can identify where is the problem…
Love
Cecilia
Wow can’t believe I found this blog- I struck gold! Ill be starting the calendar tomorrow…. Lets hope I stay motivated until the end and continue on! 🙂
Cheers xo
hi to all of you and cassey! x
i was wondering, do any of u here dont sweat while doing the workouts? its my first time to do it and i absolutely have no idea if i need to sweat really hard or not. its werd because i dont break a sweat even tho i work hard. 🙁 i really wanna know if this is normal.
god bless! xx
PS, im a begginer, and i can say, this is definitely my favourite exercise because its really challenging and it motivates me more. 🙂
I’m a beginner and I rarely sweat too. But I think for me it’s mainly because I can’t even do most of the moves properly (my body is so stiff so I don’t really move as much as what is requested). So let’s just keep doing it together until we become stronger, shall we? 🙂
yes, we should. haha. thanks for replying. i really thought i was the only one. 🙂 x
Dear Ellia an Jessia
It’s completely normal not to sweat at the begining, once you get stronger and the excercises get harder you’ll star sweatting. I promisse
xo
Cecilia
Okay i need help!
I started the beginners calender, but then i had to leve for holiday, and i couldnt train for like a week, and now i am wondering, do i need to start all over again or should i start where i quit before holiday? Xoxo.
you should start all over again for the best results!
Hi everyone! I had previously started the beginner’s calendar but had to stop at week two when I traveled to an intensive education course that left me with no time to do the workout and no place either(I was in a hotel room with two other girls) I got back about a month ago and could never get up the motivation to start again. So, I’ve decided to start from the very beginning and try it again. I was wondering if there was anyone out there who wanted to make a go of it together for support and motivation?
I would love too!
Alright! Have you done blogilates before or are you just starting?
Me too 🙂 If we could have a 3 person group, and be accountable for working out everyday, that would be SO awesome. 🙂 Do you guys want to share IG accounts? It might be easier! 🙂
I don’t have an IG account but I do have Skype, how about everyone else?
I’ll do it, too! I just did Day 1 today! How about you??
I’ll be doing day one on July 29
I would love to join in with you!
The more the merrier!
Hey, I would like to do that as well! I am already doing the beginner’s calender but I think it would still be fun to do it with someone else ;).
Same to you!
I don’t know whether you still check if someone has answered your post here, but I don’t have tumblr (I still like to follow yours and read your posts but I cannot really interact with you and tell you about my work out progress). Do you have skype or something like that?
Can i join? (: just started day 1 yesterday!
sure, why not?
Hi,
Do u have any DVDs out there for beginners? I love love ur pilates video for beginners.
HI! I actually just started my tumblr blog to help support and get support from other blogilates followers! I tried doing some of her beginners videos about 8 months ago when I discovered this wonderful website but I completely failed at trying to keep a schedule so I could go onto the monthly calendars so this beginners calendar is just amazing for me! I started it a few weeks ago but quit after day 2 and now im starting it again! Just finished the first week! If you wanna follow my tumblr its sarablogsilates.tumblr.com
I would love to follow you also if you have one!
If I didn’t do my best. Should I repeat this calendar or should I just go on to monthly calendar?
I think you should do the monthly calendar. Repeating this one wont challenge you.
At the begining I really stuck to this. I was super proud of myself. Then by day 10 I believe, I pulled two muscles in my neck. That got better and I started up again. I recently pulled a muscle in my glutes just doing jumping jacks. I can barely sit, or workout. I’ve been doing some stretches to try to make it heal faster. I’m not really seeing anything after a week though. It’s still painful to sit down, and get up. I want to get back into working out though!
Since the Summer holiday have started, Its’ time to torture Body 😛
I’m so excited to start this!
Wow – 10 days and I’m feeling it 😀 Nice workouts! I’m wondering how many times I mus do this beginners calendar to actually do it properly! For day 10 I’m too scared to think about doing anything more! But I’m lovin it! (specially that I don’t need much space to do it!)
Wooo! 🙂 that leg work out was a real challenge but I love that I can feel it!
Hi Cassey!
Some weeks ago I started with your workout videos. Love it!! I really want to have a stronger butt and my arms dont have no strength. I started working on them, but your normal videos were pretty hard so I decided to start with the beginners calender so my body can get used to yourmovements etc. . But does the beginners calender helps? You said it’s going to get waaaaaayy more harderinyour other workout series, so does this beginner calender makes your body change? I reaaaallly hope soooo!! I love you and your workout videos Cassey thank you soooooo much for all of it. I’m also starting with your recipes, JUMMIE!! Kisses xxxxx Nicole from Holland 🙂 <3
really love you and your videos they’re amazing 🙂
post more training videos fro beginners like me.. thanks much, you’re an angel 🙂
Looking forward to starting this! Do you recommend doing any cardio in addition to this plan and a clean diet? Or should the cardio included in the plan be enough to make a difference? Thanks!
Well this is just my 2 cents but you should try to incorporate a clean and healthy diet whenever possible! It will help your health and make you feel generally better, so it’ll help with this routine. Also a little cardio never hurt anyone xo 🙂
started this calendar yesterday…. I woke up this morning and can for sure feel it in my abs already!!! 🙂
I really love your blog. Right now I’m doing this calendar and it’s awesome <3 But could you make another one but with exercise of three days and with more videos? 'Cause I can do the calendar now only bc I'm on vacations, but when I get into college I'll postpone many days.
xoxo
Seriously I love you!!
This site and your youtube channels are the best things that could happen to me!
I’ll try this out right now ~
So excitedd ^Ö^ ~
You put so much effort, love and passion in this, i have so much respect for you!
Thank you so so much Cassey ♥
HI ! Cassy i’m from thailand (my english too bad so very sorry)
I really like you , you are my model and put me to lose weight , start to eat clean food
i was watching your workout video once time per day .
If i normolly to eat but i follow and workout with your beginner schedule
I can lose weight?
Thnks & love
I think that depends on how much you weight right now. If you already have a good body, you won’t lose very much weight. And ofcourse it depends on what is normal for you to eat 😛 But that’s just what I think!
Just started this today and I love it! I haven’t done this great of a workout in a while! Check out my blog to see how I’m doing!
Hey Cassey ! 🙂
It’s my first day with the beginners calender( I’m dead already) and I have a question;
Should I do the 90 day challenge or should I just try to eat healthy as I can?
I’d say just eat as healthy as you can 🙂
Hey Cassey!
I’ve been doing the Beginner’s Workout Challenge, and I originally started because I had hit a plateau. I am now on the second day of the last week and it KILLED me!! I’ve lost 6 pounds and am now a size ten in jeans. YAY!! Anyway, I was wondering about toning up, because I have been losing weight, but I am starting to get flabby. I was wondering if your videos would tone me up as well, or if there was something else I needed to do, and if so, I would appreciate any suggestions. Thank you very much, I love your videos!
Hi Cassey 😀
I subscribed to your channel today after hearing about your channel from Bubz <3! I just finished day one! I have been trying to lose the weight (20 lbs!) I have gain since dating my boyfriend of 6 years! I love how you have great healthy food videos as well! I don't like bananas but I will try your banana cookies and banana ice cream :)! Even if I only lose 5 lbs by day 28, I'll still be happy to see a change!
HI Cassey! Your vids are amazing! my only regret is that I didn’t find you sooner 🙁 haha. Now I just started on this beginner’s workout. So far the first day is already killing my legs. I love your vids 🙂 thanks.
HI Cassey! Your vids are amazing! my only regret is that I didn’t find you sooner 🙁 haha. Now I just started on this beginner’s workout. So far the first day is already killing my legs. I love your vids 🙂 thanks.
Today was my first day of Pilates…i am so happy with this workout
Hi!! I’m new here…and I finally decided to start working out routinely! I love your beginner calendar, and it would awesome if you could provide more printouts of the calendar!!
I would like to ask…does keeping fit help slim down the face? Are there any additional tips you could provide? Thank you!
Hello!
To slim your face, cassey mentions in some of her videos saying there is no such thing as spot reducing, meaning there’s no such thing as working out only one part of your body. Have a mix of cardio, weight training, eat clean, and sleep right and you’ll see a slimmer face over time! (:
I have recently discovered Cassy Ho ‘ blogliates’ and i can’t wait to get started on the beginners 28 day challenge. looking forward to it. <3
Hi Cassey! ^o^ I just started doing your workouts this week, and I’ve been following your beginner’s workout calendar. So far, I feel amazing! You’re an amazing, funny, and motivational fitness instructor 😀
Well, I was wondering… Is there a specific age range for Pilates? I’m 14, and don’t do other sports. Do you think it’s ok for me to do Pilates?
Thanks so much! （‐＾▽＾‐）
p.s. I went on your shop website, and everything is so adorable!! I really like the Beverly Bowtie yoga bag and the bow headband!
I would say it’s totally fine for you to do Pilates 🙂 your body is probably more flexible than most people, so proper form will probably be easier! Just expect to be pretty sore from lack of other sports training!
I love this workout program. Loveeeeeeeeee & Strenght for everybody to do it. Yeapp ;)))) Bye.
Do we get email notifications when are questions are answered?
Does Cassey answer the questions or does someone else?
Hello Cassey! I want to start the beginners calendar, should I start the workouts with some warmup? Thank you!
You need to stretch before and after your workouts. Youtube: blogilates stretch and i recommend to look at the blogilates stretching for flexibility 10 minutes. If you want to warm up and give you that little hype to start the workout, youtube blogilates fat burning cardio warmup.
the 90 day meal plan is great but let’s make sure i understand it. i have to eat the same food u wrote for the week for 3 mon. or do u have a different meal plan for the next 2 months. and should i do this meal plan for the beginners workout. Thank u for your time
Hello, what meal plan should i do for the beginners workout? i was thinking the 90 day one but what do u think. Thank u
Thanks Cassey!
I really love your videos. Currently doing the Beginner’s Calendar and it’s helping me a lot. 🙂
I’m so happy.
Hey guys currently on day 18 and WOW have I ALREADY noticed results! However I would recommend amping up the cardio with each week (in particular on the days for abs/lower body) in order to SLOWLY take your workout up to fifty minutes. For example, adding in one of her harder cardio routine to tuesdays and fridays workout and doing thursdays cardio about two/three times. Its when you do more cardio you’ll really see your muscle definition showing through. Keep going though guys, really feeling fantastic by week 3!
Okay, so I turned 30 in March and my metabolism seems to be slowing down or something because I have been gaining more weight than usual..especially my stomach and thighs :/ I have been looking everywhere for a decent video I can workout to and have not found one..until now 🙂 I love your videos! You’re so motivational and make it really fun and I’m planning on starting the beginners workout next week. I can’t wait and I really hope it helps with my 2 problem areas! I will post pics on Instagram! evilangel8386 :)) ♥ Wish me luck!
I am starting this tomorrow! I gained 14 pounds in the last month. My 20th birthday was 2 days ago, and I want to get into the best shape of my life! So here I go… from 167 to goal weight of 130!! 🙂
Hello from France Cassey!
I’ve just done day 3 of the beginners program and I feel so good.
It was so fun to work with you and Ana today.
Thank you very much for your work, you’re an inspiration for lots of persons (and me 🙂 )
Au revoir 😉
Hi Cassey, would you have a bikini blaster series workout calendar for July?
Loving this calendar, it’s really simple yet super effective and is totally getting my heart rate up! I’m trying to get back into modelling as I really let myself go over the winter. I’ve lost half a stone so far with exericse and eating healthier!
Thanks Cassey, you literally rock. <3
QUICK QUESTION!!
If i miss a couple days, should I start over or just continue?
Thanks for anyone who responds 🙂
If I miss any days, I do those days and the current day 🙂 x
Thank you!!! I have a lot of catch up to do now, wish me luck 🙂
I’m on day 3 and I couldn’t feel better already! The feeling of sore muscles I had all day yesterday and this morning was amazing and I’m definitely looking forward to complete the month and to continue with the monthly calendars after that! Thankyou Cassey!
Just finished Day 1. I just loved it! If anyone here would want a Pilates pal to especially motivate each other, you can write me at inacenko@gmail.com . 😀
I´ve just finished day three, and I love this calander.
I wanted to be fit so badly this last half year. Every now and then I was a little fit, and then i lost my motivation. With this workouts, I feel my abs allready burning and I love the inspiration Cassey brings over in her video´s. I´m addicted so far and I really hope this is something I didn’t lose my motivation with! 🙂
Thanks so much, Cassey!! And keep on going POP-ers!
I honestly had fun doing the ABC ab workout!! I don’t know any foods for X but on the healthy M ab I was screaming MANGO!! when you were stuck but I kept doing the Ms until you said a word haha! Great workout!!!
Challenge Accepted! So Glad I finally decided to put this to use! No more excuses! Day 1/2 completed!
Hey.
I would like to start this today however there are a few things im not sure on…. eg: IO Rollups, IO Burpees…..etc. Where can i find what these are and what technique to use please?!
Thanks!
If you want to find some of these just go to her youtube channel,you can search her videos on her channel (not using the general search bar for youtube) typing in keywords (i.e. burpees).
My sister and I just started this calendar today and good gracious are my abs killing me in the best way possible. Lol So ready to finally get fit and I think I might just be able to stuck to a great workout routine for once! <3
Hey Cassey !!How r u doing?Well I m Neha from India and i absolutely love your workouts!!I have lost couple of inches and those absolute stubborn thigh fat.Thanks to You.
I m realizing as i m loosing the fat from body its showing on my face,my face size has become very small,i no more have fat on my face,which makes my face look very thin and weak compared to body.I wanted to know with working out how can i get back the charm and my little chubby cheeks on my face. My wedding is near and i do not want to loose that charm at such an important occasion of my life.
Please Help me
Had a baby 4 months ago. You just kicked my butt! I am addicted!
Woohoow, completed day 1 and loved it!! Looking forward to the next days!
No need anymore to search for pilates classes in the neighbourhood… Luckely, because there aren’t any! 🙂
I recently started Pop Pilates and I’m on my second week of the beginners calendar. I’d love to keep intouch with someone so we could motivate each other and track out progress together! 🙂
Follow me at @BflatBeautiful on twitter!! We can be buddies
Hey Taylor, I am starting week 2 tomorrow if you’d like to keep in touch and motivate each other! 🙂
Hey girl, I just started and am on Day 4 today! If you’d like we can keep in touch even though you’re pretty ahead already!
Sure! Email me at wt_10895@hotmail.com
Let’s keep in touch and motivate each other! 😀
I usually do Cassey’s other videos but last week I decided to join the beginners calendar and i’ve just completed day 1! It was more intense than I expected but I’m looking forward to seeing results! Is there anyone starting today and would like to keep in touch? Holla 🙂 and thanks Cassey for laying everything out so perfectly! x
I just started today too. I’m up for it if you want to keep in touch 🙂 x
Hey everyone 🙂 Sure! I don’t know what method you guys would like to keep in touch with though haha. So here’s my email – tania_miranda@hotmail.com.
We can do this guys!
x
Hi Tania I just barely started today aswell and I would love to stay in touch with you
I just started today too! I enjoyed it! was a challenge but I did the whole video!
Hi girls, I’m on Day 4 today!
Hey everyone 🙂 Sure! I don’t know what method you guys would like to keep in touch with though haha. So here’s my email – tania_miranda@hotmail.com.
We can do this guys!
x
Just completed Day 15! I’m over half way there now!
I can already feel a difference in myself.
On Day 1 I weighed myself and took measurements: wrist, forearm, bicep, breasts, ribcage, waist at belly button and waist at natural, hips, butt, high and low thigh, and calf. Sitting at 130.8lbs and a BMI of 23%. I will not weigh myself or measure again until I complete Day 27 (so morning of Day 28), and that way I will get an accurate portrayal of my progress.
Weighing yourself too frequently can cause stress and depression if you do not see results right away, and it doesn’t take into consideration a person’s normal weight fluctuation during the day (I fluctuate 3lbs every day).
Since I am trying to get bikini and surgery ready, I will be doing the 90 Day Challenge after this, and then will move to following the monthly calendars. 🙂 I’ve got about 15lbs of fat to lose and I’m guessing I’ll put on about 10lbs of weight for a total loss of 5lbs but an overall increase in health and tone – shooting to be around 18-20% BMI with preference being 18.
Thanks Cassey! I am so glad that I found you. I love your bubbly personality and some days it is the only thing that keeps me going on the workout. Those calf raises the other day – straight, in, and out? Wholly crap they destroyed my calves for three days! I’d never thought of in and out before … only ever done straight on and wow! Wholly ouch but wholly awesome! You rock!!
I’ve only been doing this for a week, but I already have more energy and a noticable better posture! I can’t thank Cassey enough for doing this. It’s all the more enjoyable when she clearly loves it so much!
im loving this calendar. i used to really struggle with ur videos but now slowly slowly im getting better at them.
really wish there was a yoga beginners calendar.
Thank you soo much for this calender, I can’t wait to start! I’m going to do intensely during the summer! x Love you Cassie, this is great, because umm.. I like organised schedules and things like that, it helps me get things going x
I always enjoy the work outs and I started you calander. I usually will work out 2-3 times a week. I now have more time and tried the calander and it kicked my butt! After like a week I was so sore I just had no desire to do any more workouts! I protein as much as I can especially on work out days, but what do you guys suggest I do to help alleviate or prevent the muscle soreness? I skip a day and it turns out to be weeks before I get into it again. I don’t have much more weight I want to lose, I’m down to like 129 but I’m SERIOUSLY out of shape. Can’t cardio to save my life. Any words of advise?
I am no expert, but what usually alleviates my muscle soreness is to keep working out. Before doing this beginners calendar, I struggled with other fitness videos. If it hurt the first day I would rest the next and go again the day after, but it didn’t make me feel better. After stopping and starting again for what felt a hundred times, I decided to do at least a fitness routine for 6 days straight and see what it would feel like. Well, I felt much better, when I woke up on day three I was sore but nothing that would keep me from doing anything, I almost didn’t feel it!
What I do now is that I try not to stay too long without exercising again. I usually take a one day break a week, sometimes even two or three, but I try not to do it one after the other or else I will start feeling the pain.
Hope that helps.
I get really really sore too but what really helps is just doing the workouts everyday because once you stop the lactic acid builds up and it gets really sore when we try to do it again! You can do this! 🙂
I’m on day 5 from the beginner kalender omg everything hurts hahaha !! Love you cassey
Just finished Day 3 yesterday and I am still hurting from Day 2!
Am just starting the workouts today and Day 1 has got me knackered! Anyone starting today? We can keep in touch!
On day 12 and finally decided to get on the scale and I’ve already lost 3 pounds! I also paired this calendar with her 90 day challenge and so far I’ve been getting some good results. Thanks Cassey your an awesome trainer!
I just finished Day 25 for the beginner’s calendar and I am a sweaty mess! After I’m done with this calendar which calendar/workout series should i do next?
The july calendar, i suppose
Question (for Cassey or anyone): So is what is on the calendars all I should be doing per day? Or do you add other videos on to it? More cardio? (I do 30 min on the treadmill now).
I know. I was wondering the same thing.
Not quite sure :S… but what I do is do the vids on the calender each day and then go on a run every other day because sometimes the videos can be quite short and not really add up to an hours exercise in a day 😀
Just started on this workout and is hoping it can help me keep off the weight (and lose weight of course!) since I have hit a plateau after trying out many diets plan. And I’m wondering if anyone is interested in going through this diet journey with me? Like motivate and encourage each other cus I keep finding excuses to not do the workouts… 🙁
I’d love to go on the diet journey with you!! I, too, have recently started this and it’s kind of difficult trying to continue this all by myself, so I could really use someone to encourage me and keep me going along the way 😀
YES! I’m currently at day 4 now and I’m still hanging in there somehow ><
How do you think we should keep in touch?
Hi!! I’m planning on starting this tomorrow and would love to have like a motivating pen pal person! LOL i wanna lose like 30 lbs so i have a long way to go! 😀
Hey! Sure sure! Pen pal sounds so cool! xD I would love to have a pen pal too! 😀 So, you wanna the traditional way or the modern way? ;D HAHA, jkjk!! Email? 😛
my email’s kayylovesjayy@gmail.com (:
andddd heres my twitter for ANYONE who wants to be blogilate buddyes (((: –> kritkraykray (:
i’d love that too! I need to lose 20 pounds and need motivation and reminders to stay on track.
Positive vibes are infectious,
lets do this!!!
How do we get in touch?
Hey Kris! you want to get in touch through mail first? Then we can like exchange twitter, tumblr or anything via mail xD
here’s my email! wt_10895@hotmail.com
I’d be interested–I’m on a similar journey, been working on it for the last two years, with progress here and there.
Me too! Been dieting for years but only recently I have seen better results… I even tried “starving” which obviously didn’t work out for me >< You want to exchange FB/ twitter/ or anything else? 😀
yeah i would need some motivation too 🙂
We can motivate each other! LEGGO!!
i have the same problem, we can be weight loss buddy’s if you want
Sure esraa! 😀 I would love be your weight loss buddy! How do we contact each other tho?
I’d love to get in on this fun! I would love a blogilates buddy!
this is my email essy_1997@live.nl
Im going to be starting this on July 15th :)) Is it okay to repeat this plan 3 or 4 times in a row? or should you wait a bit before starting again? Please follow me at cardio-cutie.tumblr.com please :)) thanks x
Quick question! 🙂 Would you recommend doing the daily workout with other exercises or is doing this by itself enough?
I’m on DAY 7 of my beginners journey and I’m feeling great although I’m feeling alittle lost with this being a rest day… really missing my workouts already, so I did an early morning 2mile run instead. Never thought I could enjoy working out this much and doing it at home. Who needs a gym membership when you have Youtube! Can’t wait to get back on it tomorrow… bring it on!!!!!
If any of you fellow Popsters want to follow me on Instagram @malibubrooks please do it would be great to know how other folks are getting on and swap tips and stories! 🙂
Is it weird that I did it for 2 weeks so far and I had no weight loss?I included a 45-60 min run on the treadmill with this and I didn’t really see much of a difference except that I got a little stronger…
Possibly just muscle building? .____.
Muscle weighs more per volume than fat, so it’s more likely that you’re getting skinnier than actually losing weight. Try taking your measurements and comparing them in a month instead of what the scale says!
Oh ok! Thank you! I will try that out and see 🙂
Just finish doing the beginners calendar …good workout .. can’t wait to see how my body transforms. 🙂
Hello from Denmark 🙂 I am loving the beginners calendar but I have a few questions. I have never done any workout like this before (I used to run BMX-bikes and run as my main workout) so I have zero knowledge about Pilates. I was wondering if you would be able to link to pictures or short snippets of videos explaining what “Teasers”, “burpees” , “Hollow rocks” and such is (Pushups, situps are self explanatory). I try to start my day with these but I sort of loose my momentum when I have to go to youtube or to google to try to figure out what I’m actually supposed to do ^^ Maybe it’s just me…
I heard from a friend about how she followed your workouts, now I’m starting this! I can’t wait to start and see the difference! Let’s see how I do, and can’t wait for results.
me too.
I just wanted to let you all know that it works if you stay focused! I finished the beginners calender, did some extra workouts on top here and there and finally lost ~2kg (~4lb). Maybe that sounds nothing to you but I actually see the difference. I’m getting stronger!
I can only recommend Cassey’s advise to take a picture before starting the calender and afterwards. It’s a good feeling to see the changes in your body.
So good luck to all of you just starting and have fun!!!
hey cassey and popsters! i woke up this morning on day 9, with 3 pounds lost. my diet could be better, but im so glad with my progress and how much more toned i have become. now, i wake up and cant wait for my exercise when i used to dread working out. thanks so much cassey!
Thanks for making this! I have anxiety which really stops me from doing a lot because I just can’t START. I’ve been a fan of your videos for a while now but I couldn’t think of how to start. This is exactly what I needed, organisation really helps and you know what you’re talking about so I don’t have anything to worry about at all so there’s nothing stopping me. Thanks!!
I have anxiety too and it makes it so hard to start any workouts or anything in general. I’m starting this calender and hoping that the workouts help my stress levels. Good luck. 🙂
Hey!
Should this workout-plan be completed in the morning or is it also O.K. if I do it in the evening? Cause I’m not really a morning person 😛
I hope this will bring me lots of FUNN and give me the results I’ve been looking for, for years!!!
Have fun working out!! 😉
Hi Theresa,
I did mine in the evening. It re-energizes me at a time when I need it. Just know that this will wake you up, so don’t do it before bed.
Thanks for the tip! 😀
Does it matter how old you are when you start these exercises/routines ( I’m in my early teens right now and want to get in shape)
It’s never too late to begin exercising. 🙂
Thankyou
I start fasting for Ramadan next week and will be fasting from sunrise to sunset for the month for religious reasons. I want to push myself but not over do it. Do you think this beginners workout calandar would be okay for me to do while fasting
I think its best if you do the videos after you’ve broken your fast and drink water, at nighttime. Hopefully you won’t have to go anywhere in the morning since I usually stay home during Ramadan, I am also following the calendar and that is what I plan to do since I’m on summer break.
Woooo Ramadaners! 😛 I am going to start this today, and I plan on continuing it throughout Ramadan as well! Gonna be doing it at night, since we usually stay up.
I prefer to not workout when you are fasting, but if you really want to do so, you can do it after you’ve broke your fast. I agreed with Zara 🙂 In the morning I usually go to school, even when its fasting month! Im thinking of continue-ing this workout calender after fasting month which is on August.
Hai. I’m going to fasting too this month. I think you should do the exercise before you break the fasting (like right after praying Ashar). I heard that we better exercising In the afternoon on fasting-day. If we do exercise after fasting-break, you can get cramps on your stomach. But I usually jog too for 15 minutes after shubuh.
lol , i’ve been trying so hard to find away on how to do this on ramadan , but thanks to your comments my muslim friend , now i will try this callender , and i agree with abby , my dad is addicted to working out , and he told me try working out in afternoons , and after reading your comments , im convinced that i can do it in ramadan ! GOOD LUCK !
Just wanted to say : I LOVE YOU! You’re such an inspiration! Thank you.
Hey Cassey,
I stumbled upon your videos on You Tube and followed them to your blog. They are Amazing. I’m in my second week of the Beginners Calender and I look forward to working out everyday. I’ve even started hitting the Gym for that extra something. To add to that i have started eating Clean as well. I feel Super..!! You are a Great Inspiration..!!!!!!
Thanks Cassey 🙂
Cassey, I just wanted to express how much I appreciate the fact that you created something just for beginners. I’ve done Pilates in and out but this calendar makes me determined and want to stay on track. I’ve just finished Day 4 and I can’t wait to see what Day 28 brings me! Continue to do what you do because you truly are an inspiration.
Just finished day 4, happily 4th everyone 🙂 I’m going to attempt to eat conservatively today so as to not derail my diet….. we’ll see 😉
Hi! I really want to start this, i tried day one and it was sooo hard for me! I didnt even finish it 🙁
Do you just think i should keep trying each day, or are there other easier workouts for those REALLY out of shape? So frustrating! Also do you have a meal plan to go with this?
Thanks!! love your videos and energy!
Some of them are a lot harder than others and some of the moves are more difficult to master than the others, but don’t give up!!, give them time, your body will gradually build up strength and you will be able to do them eventually – well I hope this works anyways, Its what I am doing :3 hehe Its so rewarding when you complete the exercises so keep on going !!! 😀 xx
You should keep trying! I remember when I did my first Jillian Michaels DVD I struggled to do even 10 minutes of it, but I would push myself a little further into the workout each day or every few days (even if it was just finishing that one exercise I wasn’t able to before) and eventually I was able to do it all (never without breaking a sweat though >.>). I think it took me about a week and half to finish the whole thing, but I had been jogging everyday for some time prior to that so that probably helped a little.
If you’re really out of shape, I would suggest going out for walks or a light jog to help build stamina while attempting to push yourself through that first video (maybe alternate each day?) and gradually aiming for longer jogging times/distance. You know your body better than anyone so really push yourself, but don’t overdo it since you could injure yourself. Small goals and determination can go a long way. Once you’re able to finish that video, I would proceed with the rest of the calendar. Don’t give up! 🙂
Oh and I think she has meal plans on this site. I haven’t tried any of them though so I can’t comment on that.
I created a playlist on youtube so I can do these via youtube on my apple tv.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tUVvec3z-mo&list=PL2f9GeSuelNXqSpLIMyAcnd1UZEp3f60D
Has all of the Beginner’s Calendar videos!
Thanks a lot, Cassey!! I only just stumbled on your site 4 days ago and am so glad I did. Literally just finished Day 3 of the beginner’s calendar and wow some of those moves were really hard (was shaking all over!). Super stoked to push through with everyone here! I printed out the calendar and pasted it on some colorful construction paper and stuck the whole thing on my door and every time I look at it, it brightens me up (makes me cringe a little too, but it’s still good hehe).
G’luck everyone! We can definitely do it together! Hoo-ah!! ^___^
just printed the calendar, and starting this tomoro 🙂
cannot wait to get fit and active again, i thank god for finding cassey :’)
About to start this calendar tomorrow! Super excited 🙂 Good luck to everybody, WE CAN DO IT!
Hey just started the calendar and loving it? Is there like a community center online for all of us popsters?
I’m in the second day and I am loving it…
Thank you, Cassey.
You made me cheer up about working out.
Can’t wait to day 3 ((:
Hiiii, what do I need to do when I go out to eat with friends. Normally there is not an healthy option to choose for in the menu of restaurants around here…
Try a cup of soup with a side house salad with a vinaigrette.
was really active growing up and lost my way a bit, trying to tone back up and get back into eating healthy and regular activity! This plan looks awesome and cant wait to try it all out!! Here comes the best 4 weeks 🙂
hey guys,
I have a question! So this month I am going on a camping trip with family for 4 days, and obviously there will be no time for me to do the videos, so my question is that what can I do to make up? or what else you guys can suggest me to do during the trip?
(it’s a family reunion camping trip, so there are going to be like 20 up people and I don’t want to be “awkward” about it that I am watching a video and doing exercise while the others are hanging out)
Thank you so much!
Hey 🙂 I had the same problem, I went camping for three days with some friends. Before I left I wrote down some of the workouts (especially cardio and abs) in a notebook, since I didn’t have internet access. Whenever I had time, like in the morning or evening, I did one or two, sometimes three (my friends laughed at me btw…but whatever haha all in good fun). Four days isn’t that long, so if you only do maybe two workouts a day, I’m sure you won’t really get out of shape. But it will also help you stay on track, because when I personally skip a day or two it’s hard to start up again. Hope you have fun! 🙂
Sorry to comment again but I forgot to say–I don’t know if you have family members your age who are going, but maybe you could get some of them to join you in working out! Then it would be less awkward. Or you could always go running through trails or whatever, just say “hey I’m going jogging anyone want to join me?”
I got really sick for 3 days on my first week, so I had to skip the workout :/ So what I did to make it up was eliminate the rest days, so that way I could make up the 3 days i lost while sick.
Hi Cassey! I was wondering are we supposed to repeat the video more than one time?
I hope you get to answer my question, bye. <3
Just one time!
Just did day one of the beginner’s workout. It nearly KILLED me. Thank you for the killa workout and your positive energy! I am so glad I stumbled upon one of your videos on Youtube. Looking forward to Day 2!!
Thank you so much! 🙂 Ive tried running, yoga, HIIT, and endurance training but I couldn’t stick with any of it. Today is my first day on this and Im so excited 😀 I love your pilates and I look forward to watching and completeing all your vids! 😀 Thanks! Xoxo!
I was just wondering did anyone lose some weight by sticking to this beginner plan? I’m starting tomorrow, I eat healthy but I also want to lose some weight.
I did! I lost 6lbs in three weeks! 🙂
Go ahead! 😀
try it!
advices:
Sleep 8 hours
Eat healthy
and don’t give up.
And be patient! 😀
The first week i lost almost 1 kg every day, i was like wow! but then it went back. But still then i have lost 1 kg per week constantly, pretty happy about the result.
Just finished Day One & it was actually pretty hard, but do-able. I didn’t sweat, but i am definitely tired! Can’t wait for Day 2!
Hi Casey ! I’m on Day 19 and i definitly feel stronger than the start!
I feel like i develop my muscles and you make me feel good.
It seems like the other fitness instructors are more rude and severe but you can make me smile while torturing me and that’s amazing because it keeps me going when i’m in pain.
I’m happy to be more active. If i can fix my problem with food ( i loooove chips and pizza and everything YOLO meals ), i’m sure i will slim up a little and show my abs and stronger biceps!
Thank you so much 🙂
Hi Cassey! I discovered your videos a few months ago, I just did the beginners total work out and beginners abs work out for a while until I got better at it, I’m no stranger to working out but I still needed to get some fitness back. I am now so addicted to your videos and your blog! I introduced my housemate to pop pilates too and she loves you! I have been doing the beginners calender for a week now, just finished the what makes you bootyful challenge. Wah!
xxxxxxxxxx
On day 2 of the Beginner’s Calendar and feeling great. 🙂 Just subscribed to your newsletter. I was wondering if you have to do cardio on the side..?
What do you recommend? Jogging maybe?
Hi Cassey! I am on day 3 of this work out and I love it. I am sore, but it feels great! This page you put together is so helpful. I feel like you are my personal trainer! Thank you for everything you do!
Hi! I’m new to this and never worked out a day in my life. I’m starting the pilates for beginners tonight! 🙂
I just have a question: at the beginning of each day, the callenday says “wake up and do 10 squat jumps” or “wake up and do 10 burpees.”
Is there a link on this website that shows you how to do these workouts? Or do we have to just google them and figure it out for ourselves?
A lot of her videos have these moves. However if you look up a tutorial or find a Blogilates printable (a lot more are on Ponterest than here i believe) they should show you how to do them. A squat jump is where you got into a squat and jump, a burpee is a little harder to explain
hi cassie!! i was in such a low place when i discovered u and spent days going through ur blog. and now i’m all happy. i havent felt this motivated in a long time. just watching ur vids has burnt a few calories i think :)) 😀 thank u so much in advance coz i just know u r d push iv been waiting for. fingers crossed and raring to go burn!!! MUAH to all Popsters out here.
Hey Cassey ! i would like to thank you so so much , you are such an inspiration and u have all that positive energy and excitement that drive us towards having a healthy body and healthy mind !!! 🙂
i just wanted to thank u and i’ll definitely try this
I’ve been really off and on with working out. Been trying to find something that I can really get into. Lets see if this worksout.. haha see what I did there?.. XD
Just finished Day 1! Never felt the burn more…but had fun doing it! Cassey this is the first time I enjoyed a workout!!! Thanks 🙂
I was wondering if it was ok to switch to the monthly calendars if I’m not finished with the beginner calendar? I’m still a beginner, although stronger since I started 2 weeks ago. I’m ready to take the plunge mentally, just wondering if i’m risking hurting myself?
Ok that’s it ! I’m going to do this !!
Thanks from France Cassey, hope to find enough strength to make a change !
Gonna get ready to follow you every months !! 😀
Yay thanks for this Cassey 😀
Here we go, day 1!!!
hey cassey!!! i love your calendar workouts — although i’ve only done one day of june.
i was wondering if u could make plain black and white workout calendars!!! i know its boring, but its a lot better for my printer 😛 thanks so much!!!
Just print it in black and white. That is what I did
Hi Cassey 😀 I just recently discovered you and you’re amazing! Thank you for the calender <3
Casey,
I am so glad I started your videos and with this calender it sure is going to help motivated myself. I started this calender two days ago and I already lost 3lbs. I feel really encouraged to acomplish my goal with this great start.
To any one who is thinking about doing this calender, I would highly recommend you do it to make you look like and feel like the greatest person you can be. Casey really pushes you to the max level you can go in each video.
Is it normal to feel the bone on fire instead the muscle? Oh my, my legs are DEAD!
It’s not good if your bones hurt. Take it easy!
I’d never done exercises before. Maybe that’s why it hurts so much, even following the beginner’s calendar!
Hi Cassey,
I was wondering if you can make these calendar more printer friendly… They look amazing, but this takes a lot of inkt :/ And my parents won’t let me print it because of it…
May Print it Out in Black and white ?
Or you could save it in your desktop instead, and sign it in ‘paint’ or something like that :3 That’s what I do, since my printer is not working properly.
I am currently training to run a 5k in mid-july. How do I / should I incorporate your beginner workouts into my running training? I would like to work on my running capability and tone up without completely overwhelming myself and burning out.
I am so excited for this beginners calendar! I plan to start next week! So pumped! I have already lost 6lbs doing your workouts in addition to running. The regular calenders were a bit much for me to do everyday and were a little daunting, so this will be a good way to get conditioning for dance classes. My legs are not as strong as they used to be and my cardio ability has gone way down, but quickly getting it back with your vids, some yoga/stretching, and brisk walks! woot! I will keep you posted on my progress. Maybe I’ll even do one of those before and after pics!
Thank you so much for putting this together! Your awesome!
ttfn!
Gwen
I am so sad,had surgery on thursday and cant exercise until i see my doctor again,how i miss the work out and the videos:(
OH MY GOD!!! Thank you Cassey!~ I really needed this beginner’s workout. The other ones were just killing me >.< I took a two month "break" because I was too afraid of the other workout. This is really really helpful for those of us who have never even tried exercising before. 😀 Thanks again!~ ^^
I used to work out 3-4 days in week, but now I am starting with this calender, so excited!! 🙂
xoxo
I wish the calendar was more printer friendly, I’m going to have to use ms paint to get rid of all those background colors before I can send it to my low in ink printer. =( Its so cute too, such a shame!!
This seems like a nice workout schedule for beginners like me but i feel the “in your pocket” personal trainer feature seems to be a trend that’s catching on. I recently downloaded the android app for http://www.Motivade.com which features a “virtual” personal fitness trainer to motivate you which was interesting. It keeps me going!
I only started yesterday and I’m already addicted ! Haha I can’t stop anymore !
Thank you so much for spending your time on making this. <3
Just started your beginner calendar tonight. Ive been following your blog and fb for a while now but really was needing to get serious about working out. I was searching for a beginner workouts when I remembered your page had one already! Here’s to the next 4 wks!
Hello!, me and my friend are teens now and we are going to challenge ourselves to loose a few pounds by using the beginners calender all fingers crossed it will do the trick. We will be using this website more often. 🙂
I’m a brand new popster and I’m starting this tomorrow! Here’s to hoping the next 28 days are pop-tastic!!
Hi Cassey! I was wondering, can I do this workouts 3 times a week instead of 6?
Like same order, but just 3 times a week? I really don’t have time to do it for 1 hour 6 times a week, but I’m pretty sure I can make time for it 3 times a week.
I’m up to Day 19, and the beginner calender doesn’t take as long as her other calender – most days the workout time ranges from 20-30 minutes, so it really is easy to fit in your schedule. Just 20 minutes less of the TV or internet, and you get fit! If you do only 3 days a week, you probably wont see much difference as this is a less intensive schedule than many other fitness programs.
I plan on starting the beginner calendar monday (Tomorrow), but I’m a little worried with how I’ll pull through with this.
I have no muscle, I’m not fat but I do have a little weight on me. I know if I can get this fat off of me I can really start to love my body. I don’t hate or dislike my body now, but I’m not in love with it like I would like to and still kind of wanna hide my stomach when I’m in a bikini since I don’t have any visible muscle oh me whether I’m flexing or not.
With the beginner workouts since I have no muscle and I’m not very strong what do I do if the next day I’m too sore to do anything? Or if I can’t do everything that’s in the videos? I really wanna do as much as I can without skipping days even when I’m sore, but I don’t know how sore would be too sore if i push myself to much.
So my questions are:
– Any tips with how to start from a plain canvas since I’ve never been much of an exercise person?
– If you were a complete beginner, could you please give me some feedback of how you pushed yourself and made it through? (even if you arent done)
– How fast have you seen results so far?
– If you skipped a day, how did you jump back in ? Did you skip the workouts from the day you missed? Or did you just did the workouts you missed the day you continued your workout?
Thanks guys! (:
Hi Amy!
I hope I can help you. I started the beginners calendar about a week ago and I was a total beginner. I kinda have the same body image “issue” the difference is that I like my belly but not my butt. I’m slim anyway but I’ve lost weight by not eating very well, not because I’ve worked out. I felt SO weak, and I was. It was a hard task to help my Mum carry the shopping bag…
Here are my answers to your questions:
– How to start? Just go and do it. I promise you’ll love it!
– It’s not very difficult to push myself through the days because 1, Cassy’s bubbly personality is a huge motivation. 2, You’ll find yourself stronger even from Day 2. You’ll get very tired of course, but you’ll love the pain. Plus, take a look at the before/after stories!
– After only one week I felt A LOT stronger. The best for me is that my posture was literally terrible, and had pain in my back, and now my spine is straight and I could say goodbye to the pain 🙂
– You don’t have to workout every day if you feel too sore. You can do the exercises every two days. But if you skipped one day, just do that one when you’re ready again.
I suggest you to strech your muscles before AND after you work out. This will help prevent any injuries and you won’t be very sore the next day. It will also improve your flexibility. Don’t forget this before you start working out 🙂 You’ll get stronger, and have a flatter belly if you follow Cassy’s instruction as Pilates is about ‘suck your belly button in’, so you squeez it and it will get visible results soon. 🙂
Don’t forget, you don’t have to do every exercises perfectly, do your best! It’s not a bad thing if you have to take a short break during the video.
Good luck and don’t give up!
@Mo,
Thank you so much for the tips and your answers !! It’s funny because I guess when it comes to the belly and butt we are opposites, I love my butt haha. I’ve seen Cassy’s videos but haven’t exercised with her yet so I’m definitely looking forward to it. I’ll make sure keep what you mentioned in mind. Once again thanks! You definitely helped (: <3
Hey I was in the same situation as your are. I’ve never worked out so when I started this calendar I started from 0. But it went well, Cassey did this calendar specially for us beginners so you shouldn’t have a problem from working out. yes you will get really sore! but thats just normal, because your body is not used to it.
So if you are sore Don’t Stop! keep on going! Don’t skip any day! trust me that’s what I did, and the truth is that it doesn’t affect you that much, because each day you work out a specific area, so one day your abs are sore, but the next day you are working out your legs. So don’t worry just keep on going!
I’m on week 4 now and I can definitely see the changes! I wasn’t able to even do the knee push ups! or even worst the elbow push ups! and now I can! My body has changed, not drastically, but I can definitely feel it!
An about the skiping days thing. I got really sick on the first week (nothing to do with the workouts) so I had to skip 3 days of workout, so what I did to make it up was skip the rest days! some people prefer doing two days in one, you could do that as well, it depends. But i recommend you not to skip days unless it’s necessary, or something beyond your control happens. Remember it takes 21 days to make a habit! so when you finish with this calendar you won’t be able to stop working out! 🙂 and trust me you will love it! 🙂
I was just looking at your beautiful beginner’s calendar and I think I am at a level that is even more beginner than what you have here *embarrassed* For instance, I have no idea how to do a plank or burpee or roll up etc. Is there an explanation/video somewhere that you have by chance that demonstrates these? Thanks.
She tends to explain each posture as she does it, especially in the beginner videos.
I felt the same when I started, so whenever something new came up I’d take a break to watch her do the move/posture, then ‘rewind’ to where I left off.
There’s no embarrassment in blogilates! It’s all just progress 😀
I’d suggest you just follow the beginners calendar and learn as you go 🙂 Good luck! x
I wish you could do a calendar for us who are short on time. For example, i find it very hard to find an hour everyday for working out. Could you do a calendar with maybe one hour 3 times a week or just half an hour a day
This calender is for only half an hour a day – if you look at the length of the videos they are normally 5-10 minutes long and you will do three of them on average a day, so you workouts tend to be between 20-30 minutes long. I’m up to Day 19, and found it really easy to fit it into my busy schedule, even amongst exams!
OMG! I’m on day 19 too! I just finished today’s workout and am really excited to join the monthly calendars…I’m hoping I’ll be seeing a more distinct transformation by then
Actually, wait..I do know why I’m doing this…I want to feel every part of my body., and familiarize myself with it 🙂
omg thank you thank you! No more searching on youtube!You have become my Idol Cassey, my laptop is full of your pics, gifs and videos to inspire myself to be as motivation as you. love from HK
I am so glad I found you on youtube. So far your videos are the best workout videos I have seen on youtube. And slowly im seeing improvements. THANK-YOU!!!
Cassey, can’t you make a beginners calendar nr 2? A calendar that we can continue with after this one, only that it is harder but not as hard as your normal calendars?
You can always modify the monthly calendars. Instead of doing all 5 videos on the monthly calendar, do 3 or 4. That way you’re making it more challenging than the beginner calendar of 2 or 3 videos a day but not as challenging as doing 5 videos a day
Hi guys!
I have a membership at a gym that I don’t want to give up or waste – what day would be the best to forgo?
Thanks!
Cassey
I love how organized these exercise programs are ( the calendar is awesome =) thanks for making them available to us .
I have a question about the beginners workout program : Are we suppose to do each video multiple times or just once?
Just once is all is required, but if you want to do multiple rounds, go for it!
HI,
I have started with your beigneers calendar and am on day 8.(A little Late). But the problem is that my lower back is very arched. so every time while doing floor exercises I get a back pain. I do suck my belly in. But regardless even when i lay down flat i get an arched back.
Would you be able to advice me?
I have the same problem. I only completed one video but am suffering pain already. What advice has been given please?
I’m suffering from the same issue…you’re meant to suck in your belly button all the time and form a triangle with your hands in some excercises for back support but my back still hurts
I just wanted to say thankyou for creating this! Normally, I hate exercise but I started watching your videos on a whim and now I can’t get enough. I’m working my way through the beginners calendar and I’m already loving the way I feel, even though I’m only on day 3! I can’t wait to see what you do next.
Cassy, you are amazing! I’ve been adding your vids to my workout, but it’s been on and off — now I’m going to take it one step further and start following these calendars!
Thank you so much for making these videos so reliably! It’s a huge help, and I hope to be a true fitness enthusiast by the end of the summer! : )
Do you suggest we do any other cardio in addition to the scheduled work outs?
Owwww the burn! I love it! You are so amazing, so happy I stumbled upon your you tube vids I adore them, your so beautiful, funny and inspirational! Adore you!
I LOVE YOU SO MUCH ! You are so amazing, you basically changed my life ! Thank you for your hard work and i’m going to start this !! Wuuuuuuuju !!
If you want to have a body which is fit and firm a good Pilate exercise is really very good. It can very well strengthen our muscle core and can keep our body firm. I really love this kind of exercise as well as running. I have been on this exercise for 5 months now.
I haven’t worked out in awhile and yesterday I started day 1! Yay! The thing is my core is really really sore (I’m a little embarrassed to say that) and I couldn’t get through the second day workouts because they focus on abs alone. I jogged for a half an hour instead. What do you suggest I do when I’m really sore?
um what are roll ups, elbow push ups, hollow rocks and teasers?
There is a thing called Google that’s very useful.
don’t be mean, everybody here needs some support to power through his own journey.
when you lie on the floor , extend your arms and roll yourself up until you’re sitting by using your abs, it’s a roll up.
for an elbow push up you do the plank and go down on your elbows and up again.
these two are the ones i know, i think you can look them up in the beginners video.
wish you a lot of fun 🙂
Thank you very much for these exercise. When I finde your videos I just love them i feel like you are next to me and say ‘keep going’ 🙂 You really can motivate other people.
I’ve started running recently but havent been sure on what to do exercise wise, and this helps a lot. I just wanted to say thank you 🙂
What’s a roll up?
what are calf raises
Just stand with your feet hip width apart, lift your heels off the ground so that you’re standing on your toes, and then lower back down. Watch Glad You Came Calf Challenge if you need a visual
I’m going to start tomorrow. I also started jogging. I don’t know what came over me but i love working out
lately and pushing myself. Can’t wait to start this and get the dream body i always wanted
Haha, I know! I have liked doing some aerobics or pilates always, but not very intensly and absolutely hated running and now, randomly, I enjoy running all the time! Good luck to you!!! 🙂
I just finished the ABC’s ab workout and am loving this program so far! I’ve been dying to get in shape for a long time but have never actually been motivated to do much more than some boring old crunches and maybe some jumping jacks (giving up my favorite foods is a no-no as well), but now that I’m working on the calendar I feel much more motivated to get up in the morning and get exercising!
of course like your web site however you have to
test the spelling on quite a few of your posts. A number of them are
rife with spelling problems and I to find it very troublesome to inform the reality on the other
hand I’ll certainly come back again.
Hey, I was wondering if this would be effective in weightloss?
I don’t have a lot to loose and I’m 17 (next month)
I’ve been trying for so long to just shed the last 10 pounds and tone up but nothings worked for me so far.
I also saw some other blogs online that say its not healthy to do pilates everyday? If that’s true, is there a schedule I should set up for myself? Or is it okay to just start off from day 1?
Sorry if this is a lot of stupid questions! xoxo
this will help burn fat and build muscle so no but you will look SO MUCH better. I would just start from day one, that’s what I did and it has worked great!
Omg finally a calender for beginners! I’ve tried to do follow the ‘normal’ calenders, but i give up.. Every single time. I’m always like :’ im going to lose 10 pounds’ but 3 days later i’m eating icecream and hamburgers.. I just want to lose weight during summerbreak, can someone help me? Like
Motivate me to keep going and not to quit after 3 days 🙁 thankyou xoxo
I’m going to start working on the same thing, summer break is the only time I have time to try and lose weight and feel good about myself!
I think we’ve got this though (: Just be sure of yourself and if you need some motivation just hit me up
idaughertyy@yahoo.com
Im sure I’ll need it too >.<
I’ve been sick but I finally had enough energy to start Day 1. Can’t wait to wake up to my 1 minute plank and hit the abs tomorrow.
Hey Cassey! I just started the Beginners Calendar and I’m on Day 4, but it’s been awhile since I’ve last worked out and sometimes I can’t fully do a move, should I just continue doing the calendar until I finish it and then if I’m not any better, do it again? I really love Pilates because they’re different and entertaining and I don’t wanna quit so what do you suggest?
Day 11 has great workouts, but they definitially aren’t good for my legs =( My legs are too thick, too heavy. I’m not fat or anything, but my legs are a bit massive and I want them become thiner, and those exercises make them thicker =(
may be someone can help me with what exercises to do for thiner legs, especially thiner calves?
If there isn’t fat on your legs, and the muscle is too big for your liking the only thing to do is to not work the muscles. Cassey addresses this in her FAQs, ” if you really want to make them less prominent, the truth is, you need to stop working them out. Unfortunately this means to stop doing any exercise that targets the muscle. No more calf raises. Lunges. Stretching the leg will help…very slightly.” It is impossible to do exercises that make your muscles smaller. Embrace your muscular legs! My goal legs are thick and strong and full of muscle. Trust me there are people that want what you have and I’m one of them.
yeah, I know, I just want them to be a little bit smaller =( and I think there is some fat on my legs, “I’m not fat or anything” meant my whole body doesn’t need diets and weight loss, but legs don’t think so. And I want this fat goes away without increasing my musculs. May be I need some kind of fat-burning cardio for legs?
Even if I’m a beginner, is it still ok to do the normal workout calendar? I can’t get through everything in one “sitting”, so I end up splitting it in half. I do 3-4 video’s when I get home from school and the rest later on in the afternoon. Is that fine? Or should I be doing the beginners calendar until I can do the normal calendar all at once?
Thank you to anyone who replies to this! 🙂
That’s fine.The important thing is that you’re doing it. As long as you’re not overworking or injuring yourself, more exercise is never a bad thing, even if it’s in chunks.
Are you going to make any more printables? I love them so much. They are so much easier when I can’t always do the videos.
if you sign up to her newsletter every month u will get one and they are great
Day 10 has been completed this morning..just got off work and am already seeing changes! Keep it up.
Just done the second day and I cheated a little bit on the abc abs by just running through the alphabet quickly and stopping or a rest a few times but I did get through it all this is only the second video I have ever done I hope I can do it without stopping and stay doing it for longer with time 🙂
Oh My God, I’ve just started with the beginners calendar and I love it. Thank You Casey.
I really like how you listed a link to the videos for day 1, day 2 and so on…It definitely is much easier to find and access! Totally Bookmarking this page!! I think it would be cool if you did it with your other calendars? But then again, I can imagine how much time( I think) that will take…since the monthly calendars have more workouts on it than the beginner ones. I am at a beginner level when it comes to working out, so this was amazing!! I found her monthly calendars very hard for my fitness level I am currently at so again, THIS WAS AMAZING!! xoxo love what you do and most importantly I LOVE YOU!!!
There are POPsters that make YouTube playlists of all the videos for the monthly calendars. They’re also posted everyday in the POPsters United facebook group
How many pounds ca you lose by doing this?
CASEY, i’m your biggest follower :* i’m doing this june one fire, can’t wait for the net vid. xoxoxoxoxo
Cassey,
I wanted to share with you that I’ve known about your blog for almost a year. I stumbled across your “Abs all night” video and “Glad you came” Calves, and threw myself into them last summer. In the short amount of time I found I was barely able to make it through the videos once, let alone try for two times. Now, here I am a year later, and I stumbled onto your beginners calendar. I have made countless promises to myself about getting into the shape I was in when I did gymnastics full time– but with my college schedule I could barely find time. I would go to the gym, putz around on the machines, run or bike for 20 minutes and that would be that. Now, with your beginners calendar, I feel motivated after finishing just the first day, and I know this is something that I’m going to stick with.
I’m joining your June of Fire! motion, through he avenue of the beginners calendar, but still, and I can’t wait until hopefully one day, maybe a year from now, maybe more, my transformation picture will be up somewhere.
Thank you for inspiring me, and giving me options, as well as never letting me give up (even if it’s through a video that thousands of people watch). It feels like it’s directed straight to me, and that in itself is powerful. You’re a wonderful role model. Thank you again!
— Cali
Hi Cassey! I’ve just started the beginners calender, and I was wondering if I could continue my morning jogs in addition to doing your video workouts. Thanks so much!
You sure can! As long as you listen to your body and you’re not overworking yourself, you can always workout more
Thanks for the calendar Casey!
Just want to ask what advice could you give for someone who’s slim but has fatty stomach. I don’t want to lose weight as i’ll be underweight if i do. I just want to have a flat and shaped stomach but maintain my weight and most fats on other body parts.
Can anyon help me? Thanks!! 🙂
If you lose weight, you will lose weight ALL OVER. There is no such thing as targeting zones of fat. HOWEVER, you can spot tone… Do ab work outs mostly, light cardio 🙂
I just realized you have a blog! I’ve always watched your videos and just didn’t take the time to actually look at your website! Thanks so much Cassey!! Your bubbly personality is really motivating me to keep up with this! I in desperate need to stay in shape and I finally found something that keeps me in line!! 🙂 here’s to a healthy new me thanks to you 🙂
About to start this just in time for a holiday to Portugal! And I’ve just made the healthy ice-cream! Loving it.
Awesome!!!
I am doing this right now and writing about on my Blog. With some inspirational collages for you all to get motivated. If you’re interested check it out!
The table with day 1,2 ,3, etc is a brilliant idea. It is so easy to access the right video . I started doing workout using beginner calendar and it works perfect for me. It is so much fun ! Thank you Cassey!
Hi Cassey! I’m so excited to begin the Beginner’s Workout Plan tomorrow. I’ve lost 39lbson my weight loss journey so far, but need to lose an additional 106lbs. I have hit several plateaus and am restarting tomorrow hoping this is it for me. Your site and helpful information is so inspiring. Thank you!
Hi ! Somebody could help me with some exercices ? I don’t exactly know what are “hollow rocks” on day 18 or “teasers” on day 25…. It would be nice ! Thank you 🙂
I. am. so. sore……
Yay so happy for the beginner’s calendar…I couldn’t get through all the vids in the regular calendar in May so for June I’m back to these basics and then I’ll tough it out in July! Thanks for posting <3
Hey Cassie, I just finish the first day of the calendar!!! Im so excited I hope to do all the routines by the end of week 4
heyy, ive just signed up and was wondering if anyone knows how cassey replies to your comments? Is it to your email or? if anyone could help thanks 🙂
She often replies right here in the comments when she can. She’s a busy woman so often time a helpful POPster can answer many of your questions
Thanks
Dear Cassie,
Trank you for uploading the beginner’s calendar – I just began with the workout- and I am feeling great and motivated! Please keep on guiding the beginner’s, I am sooooo greatful you do this!
Lots of Love , Claudia
PLEASE please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please please MAKE MORE PRINTABLES!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
This is amazing!
Thank you so much for making this! 😀
I need this 😀
Thanks Cassie 😀
Hey ! How long does it take to see the results from the beginners calendar ? I want to lose weight before I go in vacation , I tried many diets that didn’t work because I didn’t have time to do any exercise (I had a tough year , I have my final exams this month , I’m so nervous about them ) and it’s a little late now so I try to repair this in a healthy way .
Hey Cassie! I’m so glad you posted this calendar, I’ve been following every day so far and I’m already starting to see and feel the results 🙂 I can’t wait until I’m on track to do the normal calendar in July, thank you so much!!!!!!!!!
Hey Cassey
I love your work out videos there great!
With this calendar, do they change every week? Also if they do can i just stick to each calendar and get a better physique still? i would rather just stick to each calendar rather than searching videos
If you could get back to me when you can, thanks 🙂
Hi!
I would love to help you out and answer your question, but I’m a little confused by what you mean when you say “do they change every week”. If you click on the picture of the calendar, you can see the workouts for each day. There are some videos that you will do every week on a particular day, the others change. No matter what videos you do or what plan you stick to, as long as you’re consistent, eating clean, and challenging yourself, your physique will improve.
Ah thanks, does it get harder in July?
Actually never mind, ive got the videos that i wna work on! 🙂
Hey Casey, thank you so much for uploading the beginner’s calender! I do have a quick question, are we only supposed to do the daily videos once each, or should we do each a couple times?
You only have to do them once, but if you feel up do doing a few rounds of each video go ahead! Train Insane or Remain the Same
What a beautiful idea!! Thank you SO MUCH Cassey! 🙂 <3
I’m trying the regular calendar, and so far I’ve stuck with everyday! 😀 But a question I have is how much water weight do women hold? One morning I weighed myself at 128.4, the next morning I was 130. I think it might be my scale too, because I just weighed myself and I was at 130, then again and I was at 131?! How do you know for SURE how much you weight?
Your weight fluctuates throughout the day, as much as a difference of about 5 pounds. One way to help get more accurate results is to weigh yourself in the same condition at the same time. One popular way is to weigh yourself in the morning, after you go to the bathroom but before you eat. No scale is perfect. Measuring inches can be a more accurate representation of weight loss/gain.
Thank you so much Cassey. I am a dancer and found myself wanting to get more fit and eat healthier and all that stuff. so when I found you I was so happy. But i found myself struggling through the calendars, but I didn’t know what else to do! so when you posted this beginner calendar you don’t know how happy I was. I find myself doing the calendar and losing weight! i cant wait to become even more flexible and stronger! again, thank you for taking your time to make this
Thank you so so much for this beginner’s calendar! I was feeling so discouraged when I tried the monthly calendar because I could never make it through a whole video, let alone an entire workout! Now with this calendar, I’m able to make it through the whole thing (and still really feel the burn) and I definitely am feeling a lot stronger–hopefully I’ll be able to tackle the July calendar!
Thank you so much Cassie! I tried to follow the June Calender for two days, and I am just way too untrained for that 🙁 The Beginners Calender is a big help for me as a beginner to get into shape. Also, a biiiig Thank You for the playlists! It’s so convenient! Much love from Germany <3
Do any of you have advice for a 5k mud run training plan?
Hi Tracy,
A tough run like this requires dedicated strength training for all major muscle groups. Not sure how far in advance your run is, but I would strength train everyday for at least 35 minutes. Be sure to include dead lifts, squats, and light-weight clean jerks. Strength training on a daily basis is key. Do not underestimate training your arms and back. And, throw in Cassey’s diet of chicken, broc. and potatoes WITH some pasta/bread and you’re good to go! If you neglect the pasta/bread basket from your diet, you will have less power from your muscles.
Good luck!
Thank you so much for posting a beginner’s calender! I’m a little to neurotic to start in the middle of the week, but I’ve been doing the beginner’s POP pilates video each day along with my normal yoga until I get to day 2 on Tuesday.
Thank you for setting up such an awesome workout calendar for beginners. I’ve been wanting to start working out and just felt confused (and frustrated!) about where to start. You’re awesome!
OMG !!! This is amazing !!! Thank you so much for this !
This is exactly what I need… But I’m scared I won’t be able to do all of it :/
Greetings from France 🙂
thanks cassey!! ure the best n sweetest too!! .. love the way u pump us up while working out!! and just love ur work outs, the way they r planned!! really cool n working out for me!!.. can work out at the convenience of home now!! n really thanks for putting up this beginners calendar!! just wanted something like that coz five to six vids in a row after a long break from work out just killed me!! 😛
so thanks for reading our minds too! 🙂 lov ya!:*
Thank you very much Cassey for being such an amazing trainer and listening to our requests… I hoped so much for this calendar to come, now here it is ! I have no more excuses ! Let’s do it !
Thank you so much for the beginners calendar Casey! I am definitely going to do this everyday 😉
Just a small suggestion, do you think it would be possible to make a black and white version of the calendars? It looks so great in color and I really wish I could print it as is, but I only have access to a black and white printer. Also, I like to print more than one copy to carry around with me and put it up in different places. Having a BW version would be super useful!
This is perfect for me. My fitness kind of sucks and I’ve only managed to do about 2 videos at a time so hopefully this will help me and not put me off.
But I’m not sure how to do some of the morning steps like
“Hollow Rocks” on day 18
“Teasers” on day 25
Is there anywhere I can see demos?
Hi Cassey!
I just signed up for your newsletter to get the password for the June calendar but I didn’t get the password after I confirmed! How do I get the password because I’m so excited to get caught up?!
Hi Cassey!
I was wondering if you’d make a real time warm up video! I have no idea how to warm up and stretch dynamically so that I’m ready to work out.
Thanks!
Nevermind, I found the one you have posted under stretching! If anyone else was wondering the same thing, here’s the URL: http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=7BkjRlYq_UE
Thank you so much Cassey! The May calendar was a bit too much for me, this one fits me just fine. And also so much easier to click on the day rather than pfaffing about in YouTube. Love the receipts too. Xx thanks a million xxx
OMG! Thanks soo much for posting this Cassey! I tried to do the June calender when I found it . . But . . I failed miserably. And on the first video. Ahaha . . poor me. But now I’m so excited to do this one! I’m going to start on Monday! Again, TYSM! ~ ♥ xo
Dear Cassey, i´m doing your vid´s since three months. I have to say they are awesome! I lost just 10kg with the help of you and a healthier lifestyle. All my clothes are getting to big! Yay! I lost also a lot of inches of my body scope.
And: you are sooo gorgeous! Wonderful body, and the gift that you can encourage me, with your good mood, everytime to go on and to train hard for my aims.
But i have one little problem. Everytime i do the plank, my lower back hurts terrible. I should add, that i have a hollow back, could be this the problem?
How should i go on, so that the pain is getting smaller? Just practising, till i have enough muscles in the lower back, that it wouldn´t hurt anymore when i do the plan?
Hope, you could help me <3
xoxo Jess
Hi Jess. It sounds like you are arching your back while in plank. Try supporting your back by holding your abs tight and keeping your shoulders square, so you transfer more weight to your arms and abs.. You also might need to lift your hips a little more. Do a quick search on proper plank form for additional tips. Hope this helps.
This is so a good idea but I can`t read it , if I want to print it… 🙁
Yess I’m glad u made a beginners cause I tried the June one and totally failed lol or maybe that day just wasn’t my day but I’m gunna do the beginners for now and see of that helps more ! Thanks ! 🙂
This’s all i need. Thx so much . No more searching !!!!!
ho thanks!! a beginner’s calendar is SUCH a great idea!! because May was too hard for me :/
🙂
Finally committing to doing an entire month, even though I’ve been on the site for about a half a year. I’m very overweight, so I’ve been totally intimidated to try any of the calendar work so far. So, I guess I can do the blogilates videos along with my usual 2-3 mile walk and we will see where we are at by the month’s end! Thanks!
Thanks so much cassey!! You’re sooo awesome! I love ya!
Hi Cassey 😀 THANK YOU SO MUCH for all your workout videos, calendars, meal plans and everything! You are such an inspiration for me! Juneonfire calendar is the first I`ve tried and I found some workouts hard for me to do, but anyway I keep working as hard as I can till the end, but maybe it would be better for me to continue doing usual workouts for me like: Fat Burning Cardio Warmup | POP Cardio; Call Me Maybe Mighty Squat Challenge;POP Pilates: Inner Thigh Insanity; Victoria Secret Bombshell Butt Workout; POP Pilates: Hot Abs! – (I did them every day before Juneonfire calendar)… or you think the better result will be if I continue the calendar? Love youuuu <3 Greetings from Latvia 😀
I’ve been subscribed to your newsletter for over 10 months but it wasn’t until June that I printed off the calendar and did all the workouts so far. So after June 1st and 3rd I was wondering about a beginners calendar and here it is!
Also, although I’ve been going to the gym in the past (with my oGorgeous bag!), I finally understand the love of being so sore after your workouts and I finally understand the previous comments about how amazing and different this type of workout is. It’s much more fun, efficient and portable!
Thank you <3
hello,
sorry for my English but I’m French and my english is very bad. I’m a beginners, i have discover your website two weeks ago, and this workout is very good for me to discover pilate and for begin a sport.
I’ve begin the june workout but it’s too hard for me, this workout for beginners is more easy for me.
Thanks you Cassey
I had been following your calendars everyday until I had to stop it because of some private reasons. I haven’t done any pilates move for months. I was planning to start your videos again next week, but I was afraid of being a beginner and suffering again. This beginner calender was all I need! Thank you Cassey!! You are great!!! :D:D
Thank you soo much Cassey!
I was trying to do the calender workouts, but I just couldn’t stick through them. So I was doing the Full Body Workout for Beginners over and over again. I must say, I got bored, and also at some point my muscles wouldn’t get sore anymore. I thought that I was ready for the calender, but I was wrong. I still couldn’t even do half.
So that is why I am so excited for this calender. It has more variety and will hopefully make me ready.
I love you Cassey, you are on of the most inspiring persons in my life and the best advertisment fitness can have 😉
This is amazing! And I LOVE how you listed the workouts as links.
I was always intimidated by your previous workout calendars and now I’ll start one. Yaaay 🙂
I’m not an english native speaker but your videos are soooo inspiring to me. Like really really really.
I just found out your blog and this beginner calendar is truly a treasure for me, who don’t like workouts, but YOU made me like them !! (even if sometimes, it burns so much)
A massive thank you for this calendar, we love you Cassey ♥
Thank you VERY MUCH, CASSEY!
i’ll start right away! 😀
OMG CASSEYYYYY you’re THE BEST!!! I have been dying for this beginners level calender for the LONGEST TIME! <3 <3 <3 times infinity… Much love from a fan all the way from Pakistan!
I’ve been waiting for this for a loooong time! Thank you Cassey 🙂
I LOVEEEE your blog…it’s seriously so inspiring! I just saw your food bites videos. Keep them coming… Will be making the easiest cookie recipe sometime soon! Thank you
Cassey!
Thank you so much for this! Just what I really needed. :>
I’m not a new beginner and I’ve been doing Pop Pilates for a couple of years. But sometimes I wonder if my form is right. I’ll do this calendar to take my time and perfect my form. Thanks!
This really is perfect!! Thanks a lot for the such a beginners calendar!
THANK YOU SOOOOO MUCH! Gosh I was dying after the first day of June fire and realized that I am still a beginner 😉 defiantly going to print this out! Thanks again!
Thank you so much Cassey. You’re awesome^_^
Thank you so much Cassey, But I’m following you’re calendars for many months ago, so i should follow beginner calendar?
Thank you, Cassey! I so needed this beginner’s calendar. I was trying to follow the regular ones but I’m definitely a beginner. This is very helpful and not intimidating at all! Also, I’m OBSESSED with your cheap clean eats lol even though it’s new 🙂
Thank you so much! You’re an awesome person
OMG thank you sooo much!!! I pulled a pull barely finishing one of your workout videos a yesterday. I was hoping there was a beginner calendar and here it is!
This is awesomesauce !!!
Thank you for putting in the extra work to make sure the popsters chickadees are keeping up!!
I was wondering if there is a specific stretch routine you go through? I know flexibility is also a very important part of a healthy body. I can’t do some of the abs because my hamstrings are so tight that I can’t get my legs straight. Anyone else have this problem ?
Just doing basic stretching before working out. It really helped me out :). I reccomend doing her soul stretching video! 😀
Your website is officially my home page. Thank you for the beginners calendar which is helpful for someone like me who is rebooting their fitness routines. 🙂
OMGH this is amazing. I’ve been telling my friends about this site and I’m so happy you created this beginner’s workout calendar.
Still gonna try some of the videos on the other calendar for a little extra oomph, but this is so helpful!
OMG thanks so much for making this calendar! I’ll still try and do the main one but if it gets too tough I will switch to this one! I’ll try and get my sis to try it too!
Oh my god, thank you Cassey!
This is just what I needed! 😀
Thank you! Thank you! Thank you! For this calendar 🙂 I’m so glad I found this website.
heyy Cassey, this is my first comment ever and I would just like to thank you, soo much for encouraging me and motivating me. I admit that I had an on and off routine but I promise to stick with this calender until the end. I have a problem though, I”m not overweight, but I can’t reduce the amount of food I eat, the portions are enormous and I can’t seem to stop eating a lot. I do try but it only works for a day or two and I revert back to my eating habits. do u have any tips for me?
Thank you so much! My core is not strong enough to do a lot of the moves on the June calendar, so Im so very great full you did this 🙂
Thank you thank you thank you! This is truly a gift to so many of us.
And the pre-set playlist?!?!?! I could kiss you.
Thanks, but I have a stupid question,
What day do we start if we start today?? Do we skip day 1??
It’s not really a calender it’s a plan so you can start from day 1 whenever you feel like it.
YEEEEEEES!! Thank you thank you thank YOU very very MUCH! Today I wanted to start the June calendar but it was so hard for me because I haven’t done Pilates before. Thank you for this calendar! You are so awesome, inspiring and motivating, Cassey! Can’t thank you enough! Now I can start from the beginning and learn to accomplish all these workouts properly. THANKS
Hi! So I have never really felt that great about my body, but now that I look back on old photos, would totally love to have that body back! Hahahah Anybody have any encouragement/words of advice for incorporating physical activity into my day-to-day life, or eating tips, etc. Thank you so much! This website is such an inspiration to carry this through <3
All I can say is that feeling when you know you’ve gotten stronger and noticing how you can now stretch your legs further than before is just the best feeling in the world. Once you get it you won’t want to go back.
YES! Playlist for each day. YES! YES! YES!
This calendar is great for all of us with lower-back/hip issues. I can always do something, but I feel bad when I can’t do them ALL… Now I finally can 😀
Thank you Cassey for making this beginners calendar! I have always wanted to star POP Pilates, but I never knew where to start and how to move to harder workouts. Anyway, what I would like to know is if I can do the red stuff (morning) during the afternoon or evening. Because I get up at 5:30 am every morning to go to college, and if I woke up earlier I would be sleeping less than 7 hours.
Oh my gosh Cassey you have made all of my dreams come true!
I’ve been with you for a few months and I try the calendars and end up giving up halfway through. I can never fully finish all of the exercises, there’s just too much and I also have minor lower back problems which all the hard cardio brought up, not great for a beginner!
I’m so excited there’s a beginner plan now to ease me into things, I will definitely stick to this one and I’m bursting with excitement to start it!
This is perfect! I love the “wake up and….” bit. Thanks Cassey!
I am so glad you posted the beginners calendar. I used to be a POPster until I got pregnant and had to take it down a notch (or 10). Then, I tried to do the workouts on the May calendar and my abs would not work! It is amazing what pregnancy does to your body. BUT, I joined the DietBet game and I downloaded the beginners calendar so I will be READY for the July workout calendar. Thanks for thinking of the beginners and those of us beginning again.
Thankyou sooo much for this! I have wanted you to do something like this for about a year! I tried doing some videos at the end of May to see if it was worth signing up for the June challenge and kind of failed miserably and decided I was definitely better off saving my $25…. This is the best!!!
Hey Cassey,
it’s my first comment here 🙂 Anyway I wanted to ask you whether the results will be the same if I split the beginner calendar and excercise every other day? I have a history of eating disorders and when I excercise every day it quickly becomes an obssesion, hence my question.
Many thanks for your reply, greeetings from Europe!
I’m sure that is perfectly fine. As long as you do any kind of exercise frequently you know that you’re doing more than millions of people! Cassey says that it’s ok to be flexible around the calendars and adapt them to yourself, do what’s best for you!
Thanks 🙂
Hey Cassey,
Thank you so much for putting this together!! A beginners plan is exactly what I needed– I do a lot of your videos but often feel like I am missing some of the fundamentals. This is fabulous! I am especially excited because I am also doing the blogilates dietbet, perfect timing. You rock girl! Thanks for being an awesome virtual coach 🙂
Thank you for creating this beginners version! I was beginning to get a little intimidated by the initial June on Fiyah calendar. Will try extra hard to stick to it!
Cassey you are so awesome!!! You are so motivational and inspiring! I’ve tried other workout videos and no one is as charismatic and great as you. It’s not really as fun to workout to someone who is boring hahaha. Thank you so much for your work and for changing soooo many people’s lives =)
can we just do whats in red in the morning and do the rest in the evening?
Of course you can, you can do the rest whenever you want to 🙂
Now this is a brilliant calendar 🙂
Starting tomorrow then hopefully ill b stronger to join
In with the monthly ones and put full effort into it !!
Thank you, Cassie! You rock! This is exactly where I’m at and needed to succeed this month.
YES!!
gracias Cassey!!
Thanks so much Cassey!!! I agree that some of your vids r super hard for beginners, this is exactly what was missing 🙂 I really appreciate it!
Good job, Cassey!
Exactly what I need ! Thanks !!! I specially love the bubble butt video ^^ I do it everyday !
I’ve been waiting for a post like this….:) Love it!
finally!! i’ve been trying to follow your stuff for a while now but definitely need a starter course because jumping right in isn’t always the best for me. Can’t wait to do this then move up to the big calendar!
Thank you for this Cassey !
THANK YOU!!!! I have been meaning to ask you if you could do more beginner’s videos and or a beginner’s workout calendar because I have never really been able to follow the calendars for more than like a day because they’re just do hard for me and I get frustrated and give up. But seriously, it’s like you read my mind!! I’M SO PUMPED!! Haha intensity level 10!!
Thank you so much Cassey!! I tried the May Calendar ones but struggling to make it through all of the workouts. I’m so excited to have a beginner one. I really feel like I can be successful with this month. THANK YOU!
Thank you! I did your regular one yesterday and only could do half of it- about to die (but I figure at least I am doing it) Tonight I am going to use the beginner one, it will be a good start! 🙂
Hey popsters!
I’m kind of confused with whether we need to do all videos continuously for 60 mins or if we just need to repeat them? So far, I had no idea about anything like that so I’ve just been following the videos on the calendar.
Your videos killed me today! Specifically bikini blaster! I loved it so much. The gangam stuff was so fun too! 😀 Thank you!! I love you for being so crazy fun!! <3
OH MY GOOSSSHHH!! Thank you for creating the clickable Days. I have the worst internet and searching for videos always takes a while. I’ve been having to save them on my comp so I could just click them – opening multiple browsers is an automatic fail for me hahah. Thank you Thank you thank you. I will try it today.
oh wait – FACE PALM – this is for beginners. which I still likely fall here – I’ll check this out too. Thanks!
hahaha same here. I thought this was for the regular calendar xD
This is awesome! I just had a baby a month ago… 😮 I had always been super active and fit before I got pregnant but had to be put on bed rest for the later half of my pregnancy so I know I’m SO out of shape. I was really interested in your monthly calendars so I signed up for them 😀 but I think starting with this calendar will definitely help me to gauge whether or not I’m ready to go all out 🙂 Thank you so much! I know supplementing my workout regime with your videos is going bring me back to my pre pregnancy form and then some! 😉 This calendar literally came out at the perfect time! I have 2 weeks before I can start going all out! I’m so excited!!!
P.S. I tried your 2 ingredient banana pancakes this morning. Delicious! Going to start day 1 now!
Jourdan, if your baby is only a month old you should check with someone in “real life” (doctor/midwife) if your through with involution and if your abs are up to extra work at all. I have been told that young mothers better only train their obliques and move on to normal ab stuff later. This is to work against a possible Diastasis recti young mothers tend to have.
Have fun with your baby!
I haven’t worked out in a while and tried doing the June Calendar when it first opened…I def need to start with the beginners instead lol.
I signed up for the DietBet and already weighted in. I also went grocery shopping last night and got everything I needed to follow Cassey’s 90-day total body meal plan to a T.
But I keep hearing from Cassey and others tha Cardio is uber important. Here’s my concern: If I follow the beginners calendar and her eating plan as is…Is there enough cardio included in the beginners vid to be able to succeed in the June DietBet? Or do I need to add extra cardio in?
Any response would be helpful. Thanks! =)
Hi guys…this isn’t the best post to put this comment under, but I didn’t know where else to ask this. I’m a teen girl, 17 years old, I work out mildly, at least every other day for 20-30 minutes. I know, I know. But I really am trying to build endurance so I can go an hour per day 😉 Anyway, I have a bit of a protein deficiency…my nutrition lacks enough protein in general…so do you think I could ingest a protein shake every other day? It’s difficult for me to get in enough protein via actual foods…I just can’t consume enough by the end of the day. It might be easier for me to sip a shake after dinner at about 8:30 in the evening every other day. What protein shakes are good for my cause?
Cassey this is amazing!!!! i wanna ask you something i’m having trouble on deciding if i should continue the June calendar or the begginier’s calendar.. the problem is my neck hurts a lot at times when i do the ab workouts, it actually hurts more than my abs, does that mean i should stick to the beginer’s calendar although the past month i did the may muscles calendar just fine??
Thank you Cassey!!!!!!
Thank goodness! I’m starting these tonight!
This is great, I too, like most had some problems with some of the more advanced moves and I think I will incorporate both of these calenders into one. If I think that one workout is a little too advanced for my liking that I will just grab one from this calender! So excited thank you! Also thanks for putting the videos on here, that makes it incredibly easier and faster for us all! 😀
Hi there, I’m new to this site and these videos (I only just came here in time for June actually) And although the workouts are kind of hard because I haven’t been exercising I’m still powering through them as best I can. Should I just do this one or should I continue with June on Fire?
Cassey! This is AWESOME
Thats awesome!! 😀 I like it!!
Hi Cassey
It is really great that you made this calender for beginners!
Cuz I am the beginner and I have to admit that I felt a little bit discouraged
when some of the moves are too difficult for me.
I bet this would be really helpful to me!!
Thank you^^
Thank you so much Cassey!
I’m an overall active person but I’ve been wanting to tone up and get fitter so I have been attempting to do your calender workouts but I find after a couple of days I struggle quite a bit and get disheartened (I am prone to feeling like I failed if I can’t grasp things within a short period of time, I’m rather impatient!) and stop, but at the same time I wasn’t quite sure how much I should be doing for a beginner? This was just what I needed!
Thanks Cassey! I was about to start workouts for the first time with the June calendar (a day late :/ haha) but then I saw this! I’ve started it a day late but I’m gonna count Monday as my rest day and do that workout on Sunday, then I’ll be good for the rest of the month lol. 🙂
Cassey I’ve been doing your workouts one and a half year and I’m pretty advanced, but I actually got my sister doing this beginners calendar and though she was suffering through it I told her that she could do it. Thank you for these videos and the amount of effort that you put on these calendars! My sister thought you were funny and she had to pause the video couple of times cause she was laughing so much 😀
Okay so I’ve kinda done your videos here and there but for the most part I can keep up (covered in sweat and panting like a dog) so should I just stick with the June Calendar or re-start with this one? BTW my now 1yr old does squats thanks to your videos 😀
I have the same question, Cassey. Is it better to do the normal calendar with modifications/having to take breaks or should I switch to the beginner’s calendar?
Thank you so SO much Cassey! This is exactly what I needed 😀
What a great idea! I noticed that the monthly calenders are sometimes a bit too challeging for me.. This is a nice opportunity for my to start doing pilates – without feeling like I suck 😉 thnx
Cassey I am so glad I found you, you make me actually want to do commit to something finally! xo
Thank you, Cassey! You’re terrific! 😀 This rocks all things 😀
That is so thoughtful, Cassey!
Hi. Cassey, you ARE so good with us ! Thank you. Can we do the Beginners Calendar along with #Juneonfire ? Because I’m loving it so much.
Thank you so much Cassie, I was always a little afraid of the normal workout calender, so I never tried it. It is nice to have a starting point, I will dev try this one!
This is just what I needed! Thank you Cassey!!
Thank you so much Cassey!! I’ll be doing this with my brother 🙂
cassey…. *hugs*
thank u soooo muuuuch…
<3 u…
:-*
This is amazing! I am not strong enough yet to do the monthly calendars, so this is perfect!!!
Thank you so much Cassey, you are our hero 😀
Hopefully, after this I will be able to handle the July calendar :)))
Good luck to all who’s with me!
I’m loving this!! I tries the april calendar, but I was pretty overwhelmed by the toughness of every day workout like that… So I quit :$ but this looks like something I can do! Thank you so much Cassey! 😀 I’m going to start twitter on instagram so I can share my progress 🙂
Xxxx Iris
Thank you Cassey! I am a beginner too.
Not sure if you still remember me but I have been following you from the start. You even commented on my previous blog (musicplayson.onsugar.com) but I have moved to my own domain now. I have been trying out your workouts on and off because I always cannot fulfill the whole Calendar challenge as I’m really weak fitness wise. SO THIS IS PERFECT AND THANKS SO MUCH FOR THIS! I have recently gained weight due to my previous job and desperately want to shed those extra pounds off. I will definitely try my very best doing this Beginner’s month that’s specially made for us beginners. You are such a sweet and thoughtful lady to have thought about us beginners as well. Love you Cassey! ROCK ON! 🙂
Thank you Cassey! I’m not new with PopPilates but now I’m not fit enough for monthly calendar, so this beginner calendar is just perfect!! I will try to challenge myself adding the Monday workout 😀
And a BIG thank you also for playlist! It’s really helpful!
<3
I think this is absolutely perfect for me. I’ve been meaning to start working out and loosing weight, but have been a bit put-off by the intense June calendar, knowing I won’t be able to fulfil all those videos in a day.
Thank you so much for creating this calendar, I think I’ll finally be ready to start on the fitness journey I need to get on. I don’t usually do much exercise outside of school, so this challenge will really help improve my lifestyle.
You’ve really made my day, and I’m going to try my hardest to complete the calendar.
~Simmy x
Although I’m already a few months with Blogilates, the calendar was just too hard for me and because very often i couldn’t do many excercizes of the video, i kept doing the same videos over and over again.. now I am soooo happy i can do a calendar too and i’m gonna motivate myself so that i am ready to do the other calendars too!!! Thank you so much Cassey!!
Thank you so much Cassey for doing this! I just found you last week when my boyfriend’s sister introduced me to your videos. I really love your videos and personality so much that you’ve got me actually wanting to workout! I have already printed out the calendar and can’t wait to start tomorrow!
This is an awesome calender and I really love the playlist links you provided! I’m still a beginner and your videos have really motivated me to keep going. THANK YOU! 🙂
To cut down on paperwork and loosing it, I’m setting the calendar as my desktop background – that way it’s right in front of me every day! 🙂 I’ll paint in checkmarks and save the edits to the image each day. I’ve done some of your exercises, but I really need to get into the daily habit, and this will help me do it, since the regular exercises still scare me sometimes! Thanks so much. 🙂
Oh my gosh I needed this a couple days ago! I did part of your may and June calendars and haven’t been able to move for 2 days! Lol your a tough cookie! Thanks So Much for this!
OMG you are seriously a life saver and the best thing Ive ever found on the internet!! You take all the guess work out of what is jumbled in my head about losing weight and put it into things that I can actually understand! I haven’t known where to start for the past year and I feel like I do now 🙂 Thank you so much!! I will definitely be updating my journey on Instagram and thanking you every step of the way. Your awesome!! <3
Thanks so much for doing this!
WOW! even the beginner was intense for me. Tuck your belly button? I haven’t seen mine for decades! LOL
I also can’t get down on the floor so I did them on my bed. Not ideal, I found it a bit rolly, but at least an effort was made. I tried to do all of them, stopping to rest as needed.
I was only able to do a few at a time before my muscles got so weak they were shaking. Of course any time I’m lifting my own weight it’s a LOT more weight to lift than you have. Maybe by this time next year, I’ll have shed some major pounds and will be strong enough.
Thank you so much!! Cassey. I promise i do ’em all. Many thanks. Love u <3
This is absolutely perfect! As school’s started to wind down, I’ve gotten so lazy from skipping work outs to do homework and stuff, this will be amazing to help me get back into an exercise routine again. Thank you so much Cassey!
This is so great! Thank you so much for making this! 🙂
Yess! This is awesome! Although I’m not a total beginner, this gives me more freedom to do other workouts and still get in my daily Blogilates! 😛
& Thanks times A MILLION for the organized playlists so we dont have to search on Youtube anymore… Love Love Love!
Thanks a tons!!!!! i only started in the middle of the may calendar and i thought i could keep up w/ it and i did. unfortunately, june calendar was too difficult for me but i’ll still try to do it and use this as an alternative. thanks so much!!!! <3
Thank you thank you thank you!!!
This is EXACTLY what I’ve been wanting.
Thanks so so so much! i needed easier workouts since school is coming up and i needed time for studies and exercise. this would really help me. thanks cassey! <3
I seriously love and look up to you Cassey. Ever since I heard about you through Bubzbeauty, I instantly had to check you out. I became fascinated by your work out routines and decided to give it a shot. I’ve been following you since April and I’ve struggled with a few of your work outs but pushed myself nonetheless. Now with this beginners calendar I can work my way up to finally be able to do your other workouts without struggling as much! I really look forward to this. Thank you for all the time you put in making this <3 Much love.
I’ve been wondering about this….before a workout I heard drinking a protein shake is good, but I feel like it’s too heavy on me when I workout. What should I eat for breakfast before working out? Something light or a smoothy? Also, thank you so much for doing this! I was literally having a hard time following the monthly calendars since I’m a beginner. ^_^ Love you Cassey!
Thank you SO MUCH for posting this! I’ve been really hoping for one of these!!
This is incredibly helpful! I’m not a POP Pilates beginner but I love the idea behind it and will work out too some of the routines listed. Linking the videos is also incredibly helpful. Can you do it for the regular calendars (except for the videos that aren’t uploaded yet, of course)?
Kindness is the best accessory,
Rebecca
This is so great!!! I started doing your videos a couple of weeks ago and I love them. I am a total beginner and I felt a little lost but this helps so much. Thanks!
This is perfect for me, Cassey! I’m doing the WaveShape workout this month, but I still love your workouts, so I need an easier Pilates routine (so I can stick to both).
I was thinking about doing half of the workouts on the regular calendar, but this beginner calendar is perfect and I can do all of the workouts scheduled along with the WaveShape workout 🙂
This is amazing! A while ago I was able to do the full month calendar but I’ve fallen off the wagon. I’m going to work my way back. This calendar leaves me no excuses, even when I don’t feel like working out! Thanks Cassey!!
Cassey, thank you so much for uploading this i really needed it but where is the cardio? Why it isnt included here?
Cassey, this is so sweet and thoughtful of you to make a beginner’s calendar! it’s so perfect and I can’t wait to try it! You are such a lovely person for dedicating your time to us <3
Hi! I just started following your videos and was having a lot of trouble keeping up with the calendar. I’m so so sooooo excited you posted this for us beginners! I was wondering if you could post a full pre-workout stretch that includes neck and arems and traps.
Thank you for everything!!! I love your videos and the way my body is changing.
PS: sorry for all the things I shouted at you while I was working out :p <3
Cassey thank you so much! This came at the perfect time for me. I was really seeing a difference in my body since I started working out with you and I was almost able to keep up. Then two weeks ago I had wrist surgery and it is still healing. I’m trying to workout, but even when I try to do something easy like hundreds, it starts throbbing and the pain makes me have to stop. I knew the epic June calendar would be too much for me and I was feeling very discouraged. I was so happy to see this calendar today!
Thanks again!
<3 Emily
Thank you for putting together the playlist! That helps a lot!
Awww, that’s so sweet of you Cassey! I’ve been doing your vids for a while now, but I think it’s so great that you created something that the beginners can all do so that they can go on to do your more advanced videos in the future! We all gotta begin somewhere! 🙂 <3
As Kelly already commented – this beginners calendar is perfect! I can’t wait to check it out… I have been receiving your other calendars and have wanted to jump in there, but have felt a little overwhelmed by their intensity.. Thank you for making this calendar!
I especially love that the videos are grouped by week – genius!
Thank you so much for this beginner’s calendar! I printed both this calendar and the June calendar and I’m definitely going to try and challenge myself!
This is awesome!!! thank you so much!! but do you think this would be sufficient for the DIETBET game? i’m a beginner but sometimes your videos can get intense and i’m a beginner! THanks so much again!
I was wondering the same thing! I always try her videos and some of them I can do while others completely wipe me out! But I want to push myself for the Diet Bet so maybe we should try combining the two?
Eat clean, count your calories, and follow the calendar, and you shouldn’t have any trouble with the Dietbet game 🙂
If you want to, you could walk every day, too, for more cardio.
Omg!! Thanks sooooo much! I did the cardio for day 3 on the June calendar and was really discouraged that I couldn’t finish it all. This is rad!! Thanks, Cassey!
Shout out to me today is my birthday.
Can I get a shout out today is my birthday!?! Plz!?!?
THANK YOU SO MUCH CASSEY!!! And thanks for putting together a playlist!
Thank you! My post baby body needs this!
Thank you for this! The June calendar is kinda intimidating for going from some walking and yoga to full on workouts.
Thank you so much for the beginners workout. I haven’t worked out consistently in so long and the workout for last month just killed me. I couldn’t finish it. I will definitely stick with this plan too. So excited!
Thank you so much!!! This is exactly what i needed & I’m beyond excited cuz it came at the perfect time!
I’ve been following you for months but haven’t started on my fitness yet 🙁
I’m a beginner and this calendar is ideal…thank you cassey!!!
Thanks for this calendar! I’m sure it will be a great help! Now whenever I start a workout day, I will know that I can definitely do it, and not make excuses. I can’t wait to start and finish this calendar, and see the results of my hard work!
Thanks Cassey!